DEWE-3210 Owners Guide sm

DEWE-3210 Owners Guide sm
Owner’s Guide
Energy test
Flight test
Vehicle test
Industrial
DEWE-3210/3211
and DEWE-3213
battery powered
data acquisition
systems
Important notices
Contents © 2009-2010 Dewetron, Inc.
Some portions may be © Dewetron GesmbH or © Dewesoft d.o.o.
The contents of this manual are protected by copyright law, and may be reproduced only with the express written
permission of Dewetron, Inc. All rights are reserved.
Contact the company at our address here:
Dewetron, Inc.
10 High Street, Ste K, Wakefield, RI 02879 USA
Telephone: +1 401-284-3750
Fax: +1 401-284-3755
email: [email protected]
web: www.dewamerica.com
SideHAND is a registered trademark of Dewetron, Inc.
DEWESoft is a trademark of Dewesoft d.o.o.
Dewetron is a trademark of Dewetron GesmbH
Microsoft, Microsoft Windows XP and Microsoft Windows 7 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
Matlab® is a trademark of The Mathworks, Inc.
Flexpro® is a trademark of Weisang GMBH
nCode is copyrighted by HBM, Inc.
Met/CAL® is a trademark of Fluke Corporation
Vector and DBC are the properties of Vector Informatik GmbH
Softing is is the property of Softing AG
All copyrights and trademarks acknowledged to be the properties of their owners.
Printed in USA
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series | iii
Contents
1
Introduction
1-1
Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Certificate included. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Models Covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
What’s in this Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
And what is not in this guide: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
2
Safety precautions
2-1
BIOS notification:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Windows updates and antivirus/security software. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Problematic network stacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Product End-of-Life Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
System and Components Recycling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Restriction of Hazardous Substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
3
DEWE-3210 Series Specifications
3-1
Analog Input Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Counter/Encoder Input Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Computer System Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Data Acquisition Software Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
System Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Top-level call-outs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Configuration guide, DEWE-3211 model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Configuration guide, DEWE-3210 model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
4
System Connectors
4-1
iv | Table of Contents
System/PC connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Computer Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Signal Input Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Expansion connector (DEWE-3210 model). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
DEWE-30-8-EXPANSION Rack (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
System Startup Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Installing the Smart Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5
Operation Guidelines
5-1
Using the smart batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Turning on the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Hardware Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Using the removable hard disk drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Using the Optical read/write drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
6
Connecting your Signals
6-1
Analog input connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Counter/Encoder input connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Counter Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Miscellaneous counter functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
7
Quick start guide to operation
7-1
Part 1: Acquisition and Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Where to Start? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Set the Data File Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Set the Sample Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Save Your Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Using the Acquisition Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Reloading your Data Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Using the Cursors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Print Out Your Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Export Your Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Modify the Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
|
Use the hardware STORE and STOP buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Part 2 - Projects and Global settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
What is a Dewesoft Project?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Global Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
8
Power Related Accessories
8-1
DPS-2410 external AC/DC power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
DPS-2410 Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Neutrino-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
DEWE-DCDC-24-300-ISO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
MSI Compatibility chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
9
Options and Interfaces
9-1
MSI series interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Adapters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Using Adapters in DEWESoft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
10
Signal Conditioners
10-1
DAQ Series Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
DAQ Module Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
DAQP-HV (and -S3) Isolated High Voltage module (300/700 kHz). . . . . 10-10
DAQP-DMM Isolated High Voltage Module (20/30 kHz). . . . . . . . . . 10-12
DAQP-LV Isolated Low Voltage Module (300 kHz). . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
DAQP-V Isolated Low Voltage Module (50 kHz). . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
DAQP-LA and LA-SC Isolated Current Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
DAQP-STG Isolated Universal Input Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
DAQP-BRIDGE-A Isolated Strain Gage Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
DAQP-BRIDGE-B Strain Gage Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
DAQP-CFB Carrier Frequency/LVDT module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
DAQP-ACC-A IEPE Accelerometer module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
DAQP-CHARGE-A Charge/IEPE module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
DAQP-CHARGE-B Isolated Static/Dynamic Charge module. . . . . . . . . 10-46
v
vi | DAQP-THERM Isolated Thermocouple module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
DAQP-MULTI Isolated Multifunction module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
DAQP-FREQ-A Frequency to Voltage module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
DAQN-V-OUT Isolated Voltage Output module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
PAD Series Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
PAD Series Common Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
General PAD module specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
PAD Module Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
RS-232/485 interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
PAD Modules Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
PAD-V8-P Isolated 8-channel Voltage module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
PAD-TH8-P Isolated 8-channel Temperature module. . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
PAD-DO7 Isolated 7-channel Relay Output module . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
PAD-AO1 Isolated 1-channel Analog Output module. . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
MDAQ Series Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
MDAQ Series Common Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
General MDAQ module specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
MDAQ-BASE-5 Mother Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
MDAQ-SUB-STG 8-channel Strain Gage/Bridge module. . . . . . . . . 10-80
MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE 8-channel Bridge module. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
MDAQ-SUB-V200 Differential Voltage Input module . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
MDAQ-SUB-ACC IEPE Accelerometer module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94
MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A IEPE Accelerometer module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
MDAQ-FILT-5-Bx Filter card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98
MDAQ-AAF4-5-Bx Filter card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
EPAD2 and CPAD2 series Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
EPAD2 and CPAD2 overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
xPAD2 Series Calibration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-101
Cross-reference of EPAD2 / CPAD2 modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102
EPAD2-TH8-X and CPAD2-TH8-X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104
EPAD2-V8-X and CPAD2-V8-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
EPAD2-RTD8 and CPAD2-RTD8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108
EPAD2-TH8 and CPAD2-TH8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-110
| vii
EPAD2-LA8 and CPAD2-LA8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-112
ORION Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-114
11
A/D Cards
11-1
ORION series Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
ORION cards cross-reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
ORION card implementation notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
ORION-0424-200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
ORION-0824-200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
ORION-1624-200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
ORION-1622-100 and ORION-3222-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
ORION-0816-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
ORION-1616-100 and ORION-3216-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
AD series Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
AD cards Cross-reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
12
Interface Cards
12-1
IRIG-CLOCK time code interface card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Connect the IRIG signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Configure the software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
IRIG-CLOCK basic specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
GPS-CLOCK time code interface card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Connect the antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Configure the software for TIMING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Mounting the GPS antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Warm-Up time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
GPS-CLOCK Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
GPS time display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Additionally recording speed, position, distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Configure the software for GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
GPS-CLOCK basic specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
VIDEO-FG-4 interface card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Image Acquisition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
viii | ARINC-429 and MIL-STD-1553 interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
ARINC 429 receive setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
ARINC 429 transmit setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
MIL-STD-1553 receive setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
MIL-STD-1553 transmit setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Storing ARINC/1553 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Processing ARINC/1553 data in MATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
CAN BUS interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-20
Setting up your channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Configuring message and channels manually. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
Arbitration IDs and CAN message rates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
J1939 support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
OBD II support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
Select messages / channels for storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
Saving DBC files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
Displaying CAN channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
Storing CAN data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
Processing CAN data in MATH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
Appendix
A-i
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-i
Documentation about your system:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-vii
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 1, Introduction | 1-1
1
Introduction
The DEWE-3000 series from Dewetron, Inc. are PCbased data acquisition instruments.
DEWE-3000 series instruments are a unqiue combination of a state-of-the-art computer which has been
ruggedized for field applications in industrial applications, plus a signal conditioning front-end system for
interfacing with sensors and interfaces, an A/D card for
digitizing the conditioned signals, and powerful data
acquisition software that allows you to set up and initiate data acquisition, as well as to analyze data that has
been replayed.
Support
DEWETRON has a team of people ready to assist you
if you have any questions or any technical difficulties
regarding the system. For any support please contact
your local distributor first or DEWETRON directly.
For North and South America, please contact:
Dewetron, Inc.
10 High Street, Suite K Wakefield, RI 02879 U.S.A.
Tel: +1 401-284-3750 Fax: +1 401-284-3755
Training
DEWETRON offers training at various offices around
the world several times each year. DEWETRON
headquaters in Austria have a very large and professional conference and seminar center, where training
classes are conducted on a regular basis starting with
sensors and signal conditioning, A/D technology and
software operation. For more information about training services, please visit: http://www.dewetron.com/
support/training
Dewetron Inc. in the USA also has a dedicated training
facility connected to its headquarters, located in Rhode
Island. For more information about training services in
the US, please visit:
http://www.dewamerica.com/support/training
[email protected]
www.dewamerica.com
For Asia and Europe, please contact:
Dewetron Ges.m.b.H.
Parkring 4 A-8074 Graz-Grambach AUSTRIA
Tel.: +43 316 3070
Fax: +43 316 307090
[email protected]
http://www.dewetron.com
1-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Calibration
Models Covered
Every measuring instrument should be calibrated
at regular intervals. The norm across nearly every
industry is annual calibration, although this can
vary according to the industry, environment, government regulations, and other regulations.
This owner’s guide covers the following model(s):
Before your Dewetron data acquisition system is
delivered, it is calibrated at our factory in the USA.
Dewetron utilizes a NIST traceable metrology system
based on the Fluke 5500 series calibrator and other
industry leading instruments. We have created numerous Met/CAL® procedures and specialized calibration
hardware and software to allow the automation of
calibration check and adjustment of nearly every signal
conditioner and A/D card that we manufacture. These
procedures are proprietary to Dewetron, although they
are available for purchase. Customers who have the
same Fluke hardware can use them to similarly automate their calibration of Dewetron instruments.
Calibration services are available directly from
Dewetron, on whatever frequency you require. We do
not subcontract calibration services, and perform it
ourselves in house.
Contact Dewetron for further information about
calibration services and calibration equipment that is
available for purchase.
Certificate included
Each system is delivered with a certificate of compliance with our published specifications.
However, if you require a traceable calibration certification with data, calibration reports are available for
purchase with each order. We retain them for at least
one year, so calibration reports can be purchased after
your system was delivered.
„„ DEWE-3210 (DAQ modules version)
„„ DEWE-3211 (MDAQ modules version)
„„ DEWE-3213 (DEWE-43 input version)
What’s in this Guide
This guide is intended to serve as the top level
reference document for the models listed above.
As such, it contains the following key information:
„„ Support and calibration contact info
„„ Safety precautions
„„ System overview and block diagram
„„ Overview of all models
„„ Detailed specs for each model
„„ Quick start guide operation
And what is not in this guide:
As a top-level reference, This manual is not meant
to replace the comprehence reference manuals
related to Dewetron sensors, signal conditioners,
A/D cards, interfaces, and software.
Please see those manuals for complete details.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 2, Safety Precautions | 2-1
2
Safety precautions
Your safety is our primary concern! Please be safe at
all times.
General safety and hazard warnings for
all Dewetron systems:
Symbols used in this manual:
♦♦ Use this system under the terms of the specifications
only to avoid any possible danger. Maintenance should be
performed by qualified personnel only.
♦♦ During the use of the system, it might be possible to in-
teract with non-Dewetron systems. Please read and follow
the safety instructions provided in the manuals of all other
components regarding warning and security advices for
using the system.
♦♦ With this product, only use the power cable delivered or
defined for the host country.
♦♦ Do not connect or disconnect sensors, probes or test
leads, as these parts are connected to a voltage supply
unit.
♦♦ The system is grounded via a protective conductor in the
Indicates hazardous voltages
WARNING
Calls attention to a procedure, practice, or condition that could cause bodily injury or death.
CAUTION
Calls attention to a procedure, practice, or condition that could possibly cause damage to equipment or permanent loss of data.
⇒⇒ These notices are sometimes indicated in this
graphical motif.
The following general safety precautions must be
observed during all phases of operation, service,
and repair of this product. Failure to comply
with these precautions or with specific warnings
elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards
of design, manufacture, and intended use of the
product. DEWETRON Elektronische Messgeraete
Ges.m.b.H. assumes no liability for the customer’s
failure to comply with these requirements.
power supply cord. To avoid electric shocks, the protective conductor must be connected with the ground of the
power network. Before connecting the input or output
connectors of the system, make sure that there is a proper
grounding to guarantee potential free usage. For countries, in which there is no proper grounding, please refere
to your local legally safety regulations for safety use.
♦♦ DC systems: Every DC system has a grounding connected
to the chassis (yellow/green safety banana plug).
♦♦ Please note the characteristics and indicators on the sys-
tem to avoid fire or electric shocks. Before connecting the
system, please carefully read the corresponding specifications in the product manual.
♦♦ The inputs are not, unless otherwise noted (CATx identi-
fication), for connecting to the main circuit of category II,
III and IV.
♦♦ The power cord separates the system from the power
supply. Do not block the power cord, since it has to be
accessible for the users.
♦♦ Do not use the system if equipment covers or shields are
removed.
♦♦ If you assume the system is damaged, get it examined by
authorized personnel only.
♦♦ Any use in wet rooms, outdoors or in adverse environ-
mental condition is not allowed! Adverse environmental
2-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
conditions are: moisture or high humidity, dust, flammable
gases, fumes or storms. et al.
♦♦ The measurement category can be adjusted depending on
module configuration.
♦♦ Any direct voltage output is protected with a fuse against
short cut and reverse-polarity, but is not galvanically isolated (except when explicitly marked on the system).
♦♦ The system must be connected and operated to a properly
grounded wall socket at the AC mains power supply only
(except for DC systems).
♦♦ Any other use than described above may damage your
system and is attended with dangers like shortcut, fire or
electric shocks.
♦♦ The whole system must not be changed, rebuilt or opened
(except for changing DAQP, HSI, PAD, CPAD2, and EPAD2
modules).
♦♦ If you believe for any reason that the system cannot be
used without risk, the system must be rendered inoperative and should be protected against inadvertant operation. You should assume that riskless operation is not
possible if the system is: visibly damaged; emits unusual
noises, smoke, or flames; if it does not function anymore;
if the system has been exposed to long storage in adverse
environmental conditions; if the system has been exposed
to heavy stresses.
♦♦ Do not touch any exposed connectors or components if
they are carrying voltage and/or current. The use of noninsulated wires with the system is never allowed. There is
a risk of short circuit and fire hazard.
♦♦ Warranty void if damages caused by disregarding this
manual. For consequential damages NO liability will be
assumed!
♦♦ Warranty void if damages to property or persons caused
by improper use or disregarding the safety instructions.
♦♦ Unauthorized changing or rebuilding the system is prohib-
ited due to safety and permission reasons (CE). Exception:
changing modules like DAQ, DAQP or PAD.
♦♦ The assembly of the system is equivalent to protection
class I. For power supply, only the correct power socket of
the public power supply must be used, except the system
is DC powered.
♦♦ Be careful with voltages >25 VAC or >35 VDC! These volt-
ages are already high enough in order to get a dangerous
electric shock by touching the wiring.
♦♦ The system heats up during operation. Make sure there is
adequate ventilation. Ventilation slots must not covered!
♦♦ Only fuses of the specified type and nominal current may
be used. The use of patched fuses is prohibited.
♦♦ Prevent using metal bare wires! Risk of short cut and fire
hazard!
♦♦ DO NOT use the system before, during or shortly after a
thunderstorm (risk of lightning and high energy overvoltage). An advanced range of application under certain
conditions is allowed with therefore designed products
only. For details please refer to the specifications.
♦♦ Make sure that your hands, shoes, clothes, the floor, the
system or measuring leads, integrated curcuits and so on,
are dry.
♦♦ DO NOT use the system in rooms with flammable gases,
fumes or dust or in adverse environmental conditions.
♦♦ Avoid operation in the immediate vicinity of high magnetic
or electromagnetic fields transmitting antennas or highfrequency generators
♦♦ For exact values please refere to enclosed specifications.
♦♦ Use measurement leads or measurement accessories
aligned to the specification of the system only. Fire hazard
in case of overload!
♦♦ Do not switch on the system after transporting it from a
cold into a warm room and vice versa. The thereby created
condensation may damage your system. Acclimate the
unpowered system to room temperature.
♦♦ Do not disassemble the system! There is a high risk of
getting a perilous electric shock. Capacitors may still be
charged, even the system has been disconnected from the
power supply.
♦♦ The electrical installations and equipments in industrial
facilities must be observed by the security regulations and
insurance institutions.
♦♦ The use of the measuring system in schools and other
training facilities must be observerd by skilled personnel.
♦♦ The measuring systems are not designed for use on human beings or animals.
♦♦ Please contact a professional if you have doubts about
the method of operation, safety or the connection of the
system.
♦♦ Please be careful with the product. Shocks, hits and dropping it from even low levels may damage the batteries,
or the whole system. For exact values please refere to
enclosed specifications.
♦♦ Please also consider the detailed technical reference
manual as well as the security advices of the connected
systems.
♦♦ This product has left the factory in safety-related proper
condition. In order to maintain this condition and guarantee safety use, the user must observe the security advice,
protocols, and warnings in this manual.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 2, Safety Precautions | 2-3
BIOS notification:
System and Components Recycling
The system BIOS is protected by password. Any change
in the BIOS may cause a system crash. When the system is booting, do not press ESC-button on keyboard.
This may clear the BIOS settings and cause system
faults.
Production of these components required the
extraction and use of natural resources. The
substances contained in the system could be
harmful to your health and to the environment if
the system is improperly handled at it’s end of life!
Please recycle this product in an appropriate way
to avoid an unnecessary pollution of the environment and to keep natural resources.
Any change in the file structure as deleting or adding
files or directories might cause a system crash.
Before installing software updates contact Dewetron
or your local distributor. Use only software packages
which are released by DEWETRON. Further informations are also available in the internet (http://www.
dewetron.com).
After power off the system wait at least 10 seconds
before switching the system on again. Otherwise the
system may not boot correct. This prolongs also the life
of all system components.
Windows updates and antivirus/security software
♦♦ Before installing Windows software updates consult with
Dewetron for compatibility guidance. Please also keep
in mind that the use of any antivirus or other security
software may slow down your system and may cause data
loss.
Problematic network stacks
♦♦ Often intrusive IT software or network processes can interfere with the primary function of the Dewetron system: to
record data. Therefore we recommend strongly against the
installation of IT/MIS software and running their processes
on any Dewetron data acquisition system, and cannot
guarantee the performance of our systems if they are so
configured.
Product End-of-Life Handling
Observe the following guidelines when recycling a
Dewetron system:
This symbol indicates that this system
complies with the European Union’s
requirements according to Directive
2002/96/EC on waste electrical and
electronic equipment (WEEE). Please find
further informations about recycling on the
DEWETRON web site www.dewetron.com
Restriction of Hazardous Substances
This product has been classified as Monitoring and
Control equipment, and is outside the scope of the
2002/95/EC RoHS Directive. This product is known to
contain lead.
2-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Model DEWE-3211 with MDAQ-SUBBNC/DSUB module
Left side, screen closed
Model DEWE-3210 with 8 DAQ modules
Left side, screen open
Model DEWE-3213
Top cover, screen open
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 3, Specifications | 3-1
3
DEWE-3210 Series Specifications
ANALOG INPUT SPECIFICATIONS
Parameter
DEWE-3210 model
DEWE-3211 model
DEWE-3213 model
Max on-board dynamic input
channels
8
16
8
Compatible modules
All DAQ, PAD, and HSI
series plug-in signal
conditioning modules
All MDAQ series modules
DEWE-43 is built in
Module configuration
Any combination of 8 DAQ,
PAD, and HSI modules can
be plugged in at any time.
(See DAQ, PAD, and HSI
tables)
One MDAQ-BASE-5 holds
any two MDAQ-SUB modules
(See MDAQ table)
DEWE-43 is built in
Modularity
DAQ, PAD, and HSI modules
can be plugged / unplugged
from the system by the user,
even when the system is
powered on. These modules
can be changed freely.
MDAQ modules are factory
installed only
DEWE-43 is built in
Input configuration
Differential, isolated (See
DAQ, PAD, and HSI tables)
Differential, not isolated (See
MDAQ tables)
Differential, not isolated
(See DEWE-43 info)
Signal / Sensor compatibility
Voltages, currents, strain,
pressure, acceleration, sound
pressure, temperature, force,
displacement, and more.
DAQ, PAD and HSI modules
are available which are
compatible with virtually all
sensors in common use today.
Voltages, currents, strain,
pressure, acceleration, sound
pressure, temperature, force,
displacement, and more.
MDAQ modules (when
combined with MSI adapters)
are available which are
compatible with virtually all
sensors in common use today.
Natively handles full bridge
gages, and voltages up
to ±10V. When MSI-BR
series adapters are added,
inputs can handle higher
voltages, currents, 1/4 and
1/2 bridge sensors, charge
and IEPE accelerometers,
thermocouples, RTDs, and
more.
Detailed input specifications
According to the installed signal conditioners and installed
A/D cards
(see tables for DAQ, MDAQ, PAD, HSI, EPAD2, CPAD2
conditioners, and ORION and AD series A/D cards)
See DEWE-43 information
Max A/D cards installable
3
DEWE-43 is built in
Channel expansion, internal
Block of 16 MDAQ channels can be installed permanently to
the bottom of the DEWE-3210/3211. This block also provides
4 more battery slots for longer running times.
3
N/A
3-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
COUNTER/ENCODER SPECIFICATIONS
Parameter
DEWE-3210 series
Number of counter channels
According to the A/D card installed (see tables)
DEWE-3211 series
DEWE-3213 series
Counter modes
ORION cards: Event counting, waveform timing, encoder, tacho, geartooth sensor
AD series cards: Event counting, waveform timing, tacho
Counter input signal level
Standard: TTL level
Optional: user adjustable trigger level (when ORION
cards whose model names end in 4 or 5 are ordered.
See A/D card tables)
Standard: TTL level
Counter input connectors
Standard: Two LEMO connectors on the left side panel,
one for each counter input
Optional: More LEMO connectors, or alternative
connectors, for the counters
Standard: Eight LEMO
connectors
Number of Digital input/outputs
According to the A/D card installed (see tables)
24 digital inputs
Digital input signal level
Standard: TTL, non-isolated
Optional: Wider range, isolated digital input
According to the A/D card installed (see tables)
TTL level, non-isolated
Digital input connector
DSUB37 connector on the left side panel, which has the
digital I/O lines, counter, and trigger line from the first
installed A/D card.
Each of the 8 LEMOs has
three digital inputs
Parameter
DEWE-3210 series
DEWE-3213 series
Number of CAN bus interfaces
According to the A/D card installed (see tables below)
Interface type
CAN 2.0B, up to 1 MBit/sec
Special protocols supported
J1939 (standard)
OBDII PLUGIN-OBDII option)
CAN output (DEWESoft-OPT-CAN option)
Isolation
not isolated, however, CAN-OPT-ISO adapters are available optionally, which will
isolated the CAN BUS interfaces.
8
CAN BUS SPECIFICATIONS
DEWE-3211 series
2 x high speed CAN ports
ADDITIONAL INTERFACES
Parameter
DEWE-3210 series
DEWE-3211 series
DEWE-3213 series
EPAD2 interface
Standard, via LEMO connector. See signal conditioner
tables below for EPAD2 details.
Video camera interfaces
Firewire (IEEE-1394), USB 2.0, and ethernet may be used for optional VIDEO
camera sensors
GPS interfaces
RS232C and USB 2.0 may be used for optional GPS interfaces/sensors
ARINC 429 / 1553
Optional ARINC 429 and MIL-STD-1553 interfaces may be added either as PCI cards
or as external USB 2.0 or ethernet-connected boxes.
Use CPAD2 modules with
either or both standard
CAN bus ports
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 3, Specifications | 3-3
COMPUTER SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Parameter
DEWE-3210 series
CPU
Intel® Core2Duo® 2 GHz CPU
DEWE-3211 series
DEWE-3213 series
RAM
2 GB RAM standard (up to 4 GB optionally)
Hard disk drive
500 GB removable S-ATA spinning drive standard, plus internal 160 GB fixed drive
for Windows OS and applications
Optional drives:
32, 64, or 128 GB removable flash drive (no moving parts)
Internal spinning or flash drive added in addition to the removable drive
Larger removable drive (up to 1 TB)
Operating System
Microsoft® Windows 7 Professional® (32-bit)
Keyboard and pointing device
Built-in Cherry brand QWERTY keyboard with touchpad
Display
Built-in 17” XGA display 1280x1024 pixels, with resistive touchscreen as stanard
Interfaces
2 x Ethernet interfaces (1 Gb/s max. transfer speed)
4 x USB 2.0 interfaces
1 x IEEE-1394 Firewire interface
1 x RS232C serial interface
1 x VGA interface
Audio and video I/O connectors
PCI slots
Three half-length 32-bit PCI slots. The first slot always
used by an A/D card. The other slots may be used for
additional A/D cards, or additional interfaces.
Power system
SideHAND® battery power system installed
2 x Lithium Ion smart batteries are included
Three battery slots are built into the left side panel
DPS-2410 external AC/DC adapter/charger is included
Built-in 2 line LCD display shows the battery status at all times
Battery running time
Approximately 2 hours of battery operation (depends on workload of the system)
AC running time
Unlimited. With the DPS-2410 connected, the system will run indefinitely. Batteries
are recharged automatically when power is connected.
Dimensions:
425 x 340 x 191 mm (16.7 x 13.4 x 7.5 in.) (with screen closed)
Weight:
Without batteries: 10 kg (22 lb.)
Battery weight: approx. 1.5 lbs each
Temperature & humidity
0 to +50 °C (-20 when pre-warmed) (10 to 80 % non cond., 5 to 95 % rel. humidity)
Shock and vibration
Shock: EN 60068-2-27, MIL-STD-810F
Vibration: EN 60068-2-6, EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2
One half length PCI slot
available for additional
cards, interfaces, etc.
ACCESSORIES INCLUDED
Carrying bag
3200-BAG, soft sided carrying bag made from ballistic nylon, black.
Pouches for accessories, cords, DPS-2410, straps and adjustable shoulder strap
System restore DVD
DVD allows the system to be reloaded to factory conditions, including Windows
configuration and Dewetron software configuration
3-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Data Acquisition Software Specifications
DEWESoft software specifications
General
Compatibility
Microsoft® Windows XP® and Windows 7® (32-bit operating systems)
Computer requirements
Recommended: Intel® Core2Duo® 2 GHz CPU with 2 GB RAM and S-ATA HDD
with 100 GB of free space
Minimum: Intel® Atom® 1.2 GHz CPU with 1 GB RAM and IDE HDD with 50 GB of
free space
Licensing requirements
A valid license is required for data acquisition operation
No license is required to use the software in analysis mode
Software name and edition
DEWESoft 7 SE (standard edition) is included with the DEWE-321x system.
Upgrades from SE to PROF or DSA or EE editions are available for purchase at any
time.
Hardware compatibility
Controls all programmable aspects of the integrated DEWE-43 acquisition module
TEDS
Supports TEDS sensors, and includes TEDS compatible sensor database
Input scaling
Channel setup screen: supports linear scaling of analog channels via 2-point method
and funtional method (y=mx+b)
Math formula and sensor database: support both linear and non-linear (polynomial)
scaling, via multi-sectional coefficients or look-up table scaling
Counter setup
Counter/encoder channel setup screen supports graphical configuration of all counter
and encoder decoding modes.
Recording setup
Recording modes
Always fast (continuous recording to disk at the dynamic sample rate)
Fast on trigger (dynamic sample rate recording when one or more trigger conditions
are true)
Always slow (reduced rate storage of min/max/ave/rms values at a user-selectable
decimation of the dynamic sample rate
Fast on trigger, slow otherwise (combination of fast triggering and slow recording in
between triggers)
Pre-trigger time
Pre-trigger time can be entered when using any triggered recording mode. Pretrigger
time limited to the amount of physical RAM available divided by the number of
samples per second being streamed across the PCI bus
Post-trigger time
Post-trigger time may be selected without limit
When one or more channels are being used to stop recording, any selected posttrigger time will be added to the end of the acquisition
File naming
Data files may be named freely within Windows file naming constraints
File protection
Files canno be over-written accidentally due to a warning screen, which provides a
way to cancel recording, continue and overwrite the existing file, or rename the new
file (preserving the existing file)
Multi-file naming
Selectable automatic numbering of files. Software will append an underscore and four
digits to the end of the user-entered filename. Subsequent recordings are increased
one digit at a time. Alternatively the date and/or time (hh:mm:ss) can be added to the
filename.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 3, Specifications | 3-5
DEWESoft software specifications
Data file size
No restrictions, however we suggest to keep files to within 8 GB for your convenience
Setup files
A setup file contains all hardware settings and all display settings that can be
configured within the software. An unlimited number of setup files may be saved for
easy loading and re-use any time in the future
Setup file format
XML data format is used with D7s extension or XML extension
Data file format
Binary file with XML header portion containing the entire setup file, with D7d
extension. A library DLL is available for adding Dewesoft 7 data file importation into
any software program under your control. Several commercially available analysis
programs have added direct reading of Dewesoft 7 data files in this way, including
Matlab®, Flexpro®, and nCode®.
Data display
Built-in screens
Scope, Overview, Recorder, FFT, Video, Power
Screen design
Every display screen can be modified by the user
Screens can be deleted, and new screens added
Subscreens may be added below main screens
Screens may be renamed and moved on the toolbar
Data display widgets (standard)
Recorder (y/t strip chart) graph, horizontal, up to 16 channels/graph
Recorder (strip chart) graph, vertical, 1 channels/graph
Scope y/t graph, up to 32 channels/graph
Digital meter with color coded alert levels, user programmable
Analog meter with color coded alert levels, user programmable
Bar graph, horizontal or vertical, with color coded alert levels, user programmable
X-Y graph, X-YYY or 4 x X-Y, linear or angle based X-Y modes supported
FFT graph, up to 4 channels/graph
2D array graph
3D array graph
Background image container
Video display container
GPS track display container, compatible with map background images
Discrete display, LED with color change, user programmable
Discrete display, Alphanumeric, user programmable messages based on discrete levels
Text container, user programmable
Line tool, for drawing connections from meters/graphs to other widgets
Data display widgets (optional)
Vectorscope, harmonic FFT for voltage and current (included with DEWESoft-OPTPOWER)
Third-octave display (included with DEWESoft-OPT-SNDLVL)
On-line and Off-line MATH
Function blocks included
Formula editor: user-programmable arithmetic, algebra, trigonometry, boolean logic,
measuring functions (time distance and ampltitude delta), and more.
Filtering: IIR, FIR, FFT, and Envelope
Integration, Double integration, Derivation and Double derivation (IIR filter module)
Polynomial / coefficient scaling (IIR filter module)
Basic statistics, array statistics, Latch math, counting functions, classification
Reference curves: Y/T, X/Y, and FFT
Constant function
3-6 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DEWESoft software specifications
Function blocks (continued)
Exact frequency calculation
CA noise (included with DEWESoft-OPT-CA combustion analyzer)
Angle sensor (user definable angle-based sensor toolkit)
FFT, SFFT, CPB
Scope trigger math function
Strain gage rosette calculator
Math channel operation modes
Math channels can be created before or after recording
Math channels created before recording may be set to not process until after
recording, or may be set to process during recording
Math functions created after recording can be processed on a subset of the data, or all
of the data
New channels resulting from math channels are saved to the data file, both before and
after recording
On-screen analysis capabilities
Cursor measurements
Recorder graphs have selectable cursors which can be used to take precise
measurements anywhere within the data, or any channels
Delta ampltidue and delta time are calculated, displayed, and printable
Cursors can be locked individually
Graph may still be zoomed/unzoomed when cursors are locked
Cursors and their readings appear on the paper when screen is printed
Data zoom in/out
Any recorder graph can be used to zoom the data in or out, as many times as
necessary
Data replay
Data can be replayed to make it look like it did when recording
Replay speed and direction
Replay can be increased or decreased in speed up to 8000x
Replay can be forward or reverse
Data export capabilities
Export file formats available
Matlab®, Flexpro, Excel®, delimited ASCII text
Diadem®, Universal 58, FAMOS®, nsoft time series, Sony log, RPC III, Comtrade®,
ATI®, Technical Data Management TDM, Impression Diadem®, Standard Data File,
WFT, Replay RPL, Wave (audio wav), Google Earth® KML
Export selection
The area zoomed using the cursors will be exported.
If no zooming has been done, the entire data file will be exported
Export channel selection
Any combination of channels may be exported, from 1 to all
Export mode
Data may be exported at the full acquisition rate, or at the reduced storage rate.
When reduced is chosen, user may select to export up to four columns per channel:
min, max, ave, rms
Export timebase
User selectable absolute time, relative time, or trigger (zero) time
Software licensing and distribution
Acquisition mode
A valid DEWESoft license is required to RECORD (acquire) data
Analysis mode
No license is required to use DEWESoft to analyze data
DEWESoft may be given to third parties for installation and use to analyze data files
Off line math, zooming, printing, and data export are all supported
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 3, Specifications | 3-7
DEWESoft software specifications
Input sensor types supported
Analog sensors
Virtually all analog type sensors are supported (see Conditioners section for
compatibility details), abbreviated list:
Strain gages, accelerometers, microphones, RTDs, thermocouples, load cells, force
sensors, voltages, currents, string potentiometers, LVDTs, resistive sensors
Digital inputs
Digital I/O “discrete” lines, position encoders, tachometers, frequency meters
Video sensors
USB and Firewire webcams which support DirectShow/DirectX under Windows7®
Gig-E ethernet video camera (DEWE-CAM-GIG-E-50 option)
Synchronized Firewire camera (DEWE-CAM-01 option)
NSTC and PAL video streams (VIDEO-FG-4 option)
Sound sensors
IEPE and charge type microphones (see analog sensors)
GPS sensors
Compatible with:
DEWE-VGPS-200C, NMEA compatible GPS stream, Leane V-SAT®, Racelogic
VBOX II® GPS, Javad® GPS, Microsat® GPS
Inertial sensors
Compatible with:
XSENS MTI® and MTI-G® series MEMS based sensors (requires PLUGIN-XSENS
software option)
Genesys ADMA® series gyro / GPS platforms (requires PLUGIN-ADMA software
option)
BUS interfaces supported
CAN BUS
CAN 2.0B, with several additional protocols, including J1939 and OBD II (optional
interface and software option DEWESoft-OPT-CAN)
Importation of Vector DBC files is included with this option
Note: CAN output is available via option DEWESoft-OPT-CAN-OUT)
This option also includes a Vector license for the export of Vector DBC files
Hardware supported:
All Dewetron CAN hardware, Softing® CAN PCI and USB, Vector® CAN, National
Instruments® PCI-CAN/2 card
ARINC 429
Internal half-length PCI card and external USB ARINC 429 interfaces optionally
available.
Requires also DEWESoft-OPT-ARINC/1553
MIL-STD-1553
Internal half-length PCI card and external USB ARINC 429 interfaces optionally
available.
Requires also DEWESoft-OPT-ARINC/1553
PCM data
Internal full-length PCI format bit-sync/decom interface optionally available
Requires also DEWESoft-OPT-PCM
Requires a model with a full length PCI slot available, or external expansion chassis
with PCI slot(s).
3-8 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
System Dimensions
334 340
6
350
408
408
420
6
164
(REAR PANEL)
Dimensions in millimeters (mm)
Divide by 25.4 for inches
8
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 3, Specifications | 3-9
Top-level call-outs
DEWE-321x, head on view, with the screen open
17” XGA display and
resistive TOUCHSCREEN
Right speaker grille
Left speaker grille
Power and
STORE/STOP buttons
Touchpad and
mouse buttons
QWERTY keyboard
Screen release
buttons (slide
inward to release)
Screen release
buttons (slide
inward to release)
Filtered air intakes
(2 fans)
Rubber corners
on all sides
Carrying handle
POWER switch and LED
HDD busy LED
Battery status LCD
Storing indicator LED
STORE / STOP buttons *
QWERTY keyboard
* STORE/STOP buttons may not be
present in all models
3-10| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Configuration guide, DEWE-3211 model
The DEWE-3211 has a 2U height space on its left side panel, which can accept either a 2U high MDAQ panel,
such as either the DSUB connector panel or half BNC/half DSUB9 panel ... or a 1.5U panel plus any of the 0.5U
accessory panels, as shown below:
MDAQ panels
Accessory panels
0.5U-AMPFLEX-POWER-4
0.5 U
0.5U-AMPFLEX-POWER-8
2U
0.5 U
Power supply for PNA-A100
current clamps
0.5U-AOUT-BNC-2
0.5 U
1U-AOUT-BNC-4
2U
MDAQ panel with BNC connectors is only 1.5U, leaving 0.5U above for any accessory panel
2U
1.5 U
Note - if your system is ordered with any 1.5U MDAQ panel (MDAQ-SUB-V200-BNC or MDAQ-SUB-ACC-BNC
are perfect examples), and you do not order a 0.5U accessory panel, we will install a blank panel in the 0.5U
space.
Configuration guide, DEWE-3210 model
The DEWE-3210 has a fixed configuration: there is a RACK-8 built into the side panel, so all you need to do is
choose any any of our DAQ, PAD, or HSI series plug-in modules to fill the slots.
Both models accept optional EPAD2 series external PAD modules for adding many channels of slower temperature signals, voltage, current, and RTD inputs.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 4, System Connectors | 4-1
4
System Connectors
System/PC connectors
Ground (earth) Connector
Connector: insulated banana jack, marked with the ground/earth symbol, yellow with green stripe
Mating connector: insulated banana plug, yellow with green stripe
Function: Depending on your electrical environment, it may be necessary to give the system an additional ground
connection. This is an international standard mini-banana jack, color coded yellow/green, located near the DC
power input.
DC Power Input
KEY PIN: (+)
LOW PIN: (–)
LEMO connector
EGJ-2B-302-CLA
DC power input
Connector: LEMO power connector, as shown in the picture above. The connector is this LEMO model: EGJ-2B302-CLA. The appropriate mating connector is LEMO FGJ.302.CLLD-XX (where XX is the cable size).
The mating cable called CBL-DPS-2410 is provided to connect the DEWE-3210 to the DPS-2410 power supply. This cable is 2 meters long. It has FGJ.302.CLLD-XX on the side that plugs into the DEWE-3210, and
FGG.2B.302-CLAD-XX on the side that plugs into the DPS-2410 AD/DC power supply.
Permissable power inputs are 18-24VDC.
⇒⇒ Important note - power input must not exceed 24VDC! System damage will occur.
4-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
RS232C interface
(com1)
XGA video output
PS/2 mouse (green)
PS/2 keyboard (violet)
IEEE-1394 firewire
USB 2.0 ports (4)
Ethernet ports (3)
Audio stack
(see description for
color codes)
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 4, System Connectors | 4-3
Fuse
The system DC power is fused using a REGULAR ATO 15A fast-acting blade fuse. Blue is the
ATO standard color code for a15 amperes fuse rating. ISO 8820-3:2002 standard.
⇒⇒ Replace this fuse only with exactly the same type, or equipment damage, injury or even
death can result.
Computer Connectors
The door on the right side of the chassis opens to allow access to a collection of computer interface connections,
as follows:
RS232C interface connector (com1)
Connector: 9-pin DSUB (male)
Mating connector: 9-pin DSUB (female)
Function: Can be used to connect devices which utilize the RS232C serial interface.
The typical interpretation of the signals in the COM ports is as follows:
The connector pin-out is defined here:
4-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
PS/2 mouse (green) and PS/2 keyboard (violet)
Connectors: Standard PS/2 green (mouse) and violet (keyboard)
Mating connectors: Standard PS/2 keyboard and mouse plugs or USB-PS/2 adapters
Function: Attachment of a keyboard or PS/2 mouse adapter via the stacked PS/2 mouse and keyboard connector
(MSE & KBD).
Description: Both interfaces utilize open-drain signaling with on-board pull-up. The PS/2 mouse and keyboard is
supplied from 5V_STB when in standby mode in order to enable keyboard or mouse activity to bring the system
out from power saving states. The supply is provided through a 1.1A resetable fuse.
Above left: Stacked PS/2 connector pinning and call-outs
Above right: view of a typical PS/2 connector, showing the pin numbering schema
-- Note: PS/2 devices should be connected before the system is powered on. PS/2 mice in particular will
typically not be recognized by Windows if connected after Windows has loaded.
IEEE-1394 Firewire interface
Connector: Standard 6-pin full size IEEE-1394b female connector
Mating connector: Standard 6-pin IEEE-1394b male plug
Function: Can be used to connect devices which utilize the IEEE-1394 firewire interface.
Description: This port is an IEEE Std 1394a-2000 fully compliant cable port which provides interfacing at 100M
bits/s, 200M bits/s, and 400M bits/s.
| 4-5
-- Note: The DEWE-CAM-01 high speed video camera from Dewetron connects via firewire. However, it is
highly recommended to add a dedicated firewire card to your system to get the best performance from
the DEWE-CAM-01 sensor. The full speed may not be achievable using the on-board interface shown
above.
Ethernet interfaces (3)
Connectors: RJ45 CAT5e standard jack
Mating connectors: RJ45 CAT5e or CAT6 plugs
Function: for connecting the DEWE-321x to a local area network (LAN), or for connecting ethernet peripherals
(printers, cameras, etc.).
Description: The DEWE-321x provides three channels of 10/100/1000Mb Ethernet RTL8111B LAN controllers.
In order to achieve the specified performance of the Ethernet port, Category 5 twisted pair cables must be used
with 10/100MB and Category 5E, 6 or 6E with 1Gb LAN networks.
The signals for the Ethernet ports are as follows:
The pinout of the RJ45 connector is as follows:
4-6 | Above right: typical mating plug, showing the pin outs
On top of Ethernet connectors there is a Green LED (to the left) turning on when a 100MHz connection is made
and it is flashing when 100MHz traffic is ongoing. The Yellow LED (to the right) turns on when a 1GHz connection is made and it is flashing when traffic is ongoing.
Please refer to the CAT5e, CAT6, and structured cabling standards for computer networks when interfacing to the
DEWE-321x.
CRT/VGA video output
Connector: three-row 15-pin DE-15 (female) connector
Mating connector: 15-pin DE-15 video (male) plug
Function: For connecting an additional display to the DEWE-321x, which will show an exact duplicate of the
built-in display.
Description: The DEWE-321x has two basic types of interfaces to a display: Analog CRT interface and a digital
interface typically used with flat panels. The digital interface to flat panels is connected internally to the built-in
flatpanel display. The CRT interface is available externally to the user.
⇒⇒ Note: The 5V supply in the CRT connector is fused by a 1.1A resetable fuse.
| 4-7
Left: typical mating cable for connecting an external VGA/XGA monitor
-- Note: the CRT output cannot be used in a “multiple monitors” setup under Windows. To support multiple
monitors with different images on them requires that a separate video card be added to the system.
-- Note: DEWE-321x’s with 15” displays (made in 2010) have a max resolution of 1024x768; DEWE-321x
(made in 2011 or later) with 17” displays have a max resolution of 1280x1024 . The CRT output is set to
the same resolution as the built-in flatpanel display.
USB 2.0 interfaces (4)
Connector: USB2.0 Standard-A receptacle
Mating connector: USB2.0 Standard-A plug
Function: For the connection of peripheral devices which utilize the USB 2.0 or USB 1.1 interface.
Description: The DEWE-321x’s mainboard contains an Enhanced Host Controller Interface (EHCI) host controller that supports USB 2.0 allowing data transfers up to 480Mb/s. There are four user-accessible Universal Host
Controller Interface (UHCI Revision 1.1) controllers that support USB full-speed and low-speed signaling. All
ports are high-speed, full-speed, and low-speed capable and USB Legacy mode is supported.
Over-current detection on all four USB ports is supported.
USB ports 0 and 2 are supplied on the combined ETHER1, USB0, USB2 connector. USB ports 4 and 5 are supplied on the combined IEEE1394_0, USB4, USB5 connector.
Note: It is recommended to use only High-/Full-Speed USB cable, specified in USB2.0 standard:
4-8 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
-- Note: USB is most often used to connect webcams for recording video in sync with the data in your Dew-
etron data acquisition system. It is also used to connect inertial sensors such as the XSENS MTI series of
sensors.
Audio stack connectors (6)
Connectors: 3.5 mm (~1/8 in.) TRS jacks, color coded
Mating connectors: 3.5 mm (!1/8 in.) TRS plugs
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 4, System Connectors | 4-9
Function: for outputting or inputting audio
Description: Audio Line-in, Line-out and Microphone are available in the stacked audio jack connector. Below is
shown audio stack configuration when configured for 8-channel audio.
⇒⇒ Note: Always use industry standard plugs and cables when connecting to any part of the DEWE-321x
Signal Input Connectors
Analog input connectors (8 or 16)
Connector: Varies according to the signal conditioning module(s) installed
See the signal conditioning tables for further details about the module(s) installed within your system.
Function: to input analog signals to the dynamic measuring inputs of the DEWE-3210 or DEWE-3211.
4-10| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Above: typical DEWE-3210 showing 8 DAQ modules plugged in
Counter/encoder connectors (2)
Connector: LEMO EGG.1B.307CLAD52
Mating connector: LEMO FGG.1B.307CLAD52
Mating cable available: CTR-CABLE-05 (includes connector)
Function: used to input tachometer, TTL level pulse train, or encoder outputs for measuring and conversion.
-- Note: see the COUNTER configuration section later in this guide.
CAN BUS interface connector (installed when you order CAN BUS option)
Connectors: LEMO EGG.1B.306.CLL
Mating connector: LEMO FGG.1B.306.CLL
Mating cable: CAN-CBL-Y
PIN
Function
Comment
1
CAN0 Lo
First CAN port
2
CAN0 Hi
First CAN port
3
D GND
4
CAN1 Lo
Second CAN port
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 4, System Connectors | 4-11
PIN
Function
Comment
5
CAN1 Hi
Second CAN port
6
GND
Function: used to connect to vehicle CAN BUS interfaces. Also can be used to read data from sensors which have
a CAN BUS output, such as Dewetron’s own CPAD2 series signal conditioning modules.
When the CAN option is installed, this single LEMO connector will contain two CAN BUS interfaces. The
CAN-CBL-Y mating cable is optionally available to split the single LEMO connector to two standard CAN DB-9
(female) connectors. Both DB-9 connectors are wired the same way, as shown below:
When you connect either CAN bus interface to your vehicle or other CAN network, it is necessary to add termination resistors (not included) at each end of the cable:
-- Note: this connector does not provide power for CPAD2 series modules.
Expansion connector (DEWE-3210 model)
ANALOG INPUT connector
4-12| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Connector: LEMO 19-pin LEMO EGG.2B.319.CLL, marked ANALOG INPUT
Mating cable: 3210-EXP8-L
Function: The DEWE-3210 can be configured with a 16 channel A/D card inside. The first eight channels are
DC Therefore,
Power & the other eight channels are brought to this ANALOG
wired to the DAQ modules on the left side panel.
control
INPUT connector on the left side panel, whereby
youcable
may connect an expansion rack such as the DEWE-30-8, in
order to address these eight channels.
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
AI 8+
2
AI 8 GND
3
AI 9+
4
AI 9 GND
5
AI 10+
6
AI 10 GND
7
AI 11+
8
AI 11 GND
9
AI 12+
10
AI 12 GND
11
AI 13+
12
AI 13 GND
13
AI 14+
14
AI 14 GND
15
AI 15+
16
AI 15 GND
17
N.C.
18
N.C.
19
N.C.
The DEWE-30-8 expansion rack needs two connections to the DEWE-3210 mainframe:
1. The analog connection as shown above via the 3210-EXP8-L cable as shown above, and
2. POWER and MODULE CONTROL are carried to the DEWE-30-8 expansion rack via the EPAD connector.
Therefore, the additional modules in the expansion rack will be controllable within the software just as if the
inputs were physically installed within the DEWE-3210 mainframe.
DEWE-30-8-EXPANSION Rack (Optional)
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 5, Operation Guidelines | 5-1
5
Operation Guidelines
System Startup Protocol
Installing the Smart Batteries
Systems are shipped with the hot-swappable batteries removed. You should install them, connect
power, and charge up the batteries. Please follow
these guidelines:
♦♦ Open the battery door on side of DEWE-321x and
insert one battery into the top slot, and the other
into the bottom slot. Leave the center slot open unless you have a third battery!
The battery door on the side of the DEWE-321x is hinged,
allowing you to access the battery compartment. Batteries can
be removed by pulling on their flexible tabs.
♦♦ When inserting the first battery you may notice that
the system LEDs and fans will turn on for a second,
this is normal when the battery module “wakes up.”
⇒⇒ Never use any battery which appears to be dam-
aged, or which is cracked, broken, hot to the
touch, or unusual in any way. Lithium batteries
can be dangerous if mistreated or improperly
charged.
Please locate the BATTERY STATUS LCD, located on
the panel just above the keyboard.
The battery status LCD keeps you informed of how many batteries are installed (2 above), the charge level (100% above),
and whether the system is charging or discharging.
♦♦ With batteries in place, the LCD screen will display
the charge level, charge/discharge state, power
consumption and total current.
♦♦ The LCD (and battery module circuit) will always
be ON, unless the batteries are removed
Please locate your DPS-2410 external power supply. This is included with each DEWE-321x system.
♦♦ Connect the included AC power cord to the DPS-
2410, and then to a 120VAC power receptable.
The DPS-2410 AC/DC converter/power supply is fused with
an automotive type power fuse. Please replace only with the
same type and rating of fuse.
5-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
♦♦ Connect the included DC power cord to the DPS-
2410 and then to the DEWE-3031’s DC power
input jack.
♦♦ Turn on the DPS-2410 power switch. A power LED
will confirm that that it is receiving AC power and
operating properly.
⇒⇒ Do not block the cooling fan of the DPS-2410!
Overheating any electrical component is dangerous.
-- NOTE: The DEWE-321x can be operated without
The DPS-2410 has a POWER SWITCH - be sure to turn it on,
otherwise, DC power will not flow from it.
batteries simply by connecting the DPS-2410.
-- This can also help you refresh batteries which
have become 100% discharged, which can happen over time. If the mainframe will not start up,
simply remove all of your batteries, then power
up the system using the DPS-2410. When the
system is up and running, insert only one battery
into the top slot. Wait 30 minutes and then insert
a second battery into the second slot.
Optional BAT-CHARGER-1 is
ideal for desktop usage.
For faster recharging, do NOT power up the DEWE3xxx mainframe, but make certain that the DPS-2410
is powered on.
-- There are also one, two, and four slot external
battery chargers optionally available. For an
easy to use desktop charger for a single battery,
please order the BAT-CHARGER-1. For a more robust four battery charger which can also be used
as a DC power source, choose the Neutrino-4.
Optional NEUTRINO-4 is
a ruggedized four battery
charger that also serves as a
DC power supply
Using the smart batteries
The “smart batteries” supplied with your Dewetron
battery powered system are equipped with an integrated circuit which stores information such as manufacturer, serial number, production date, etc., and monitors
the current battery status in terms of discharge rate,
predicted remaining capacity, temperature, voltage etc.
BATT-95WH “smart batteries” are capable of displaying their charge state even when not plugged into
anything.
With the push of a button, an LED display on the
battery pack shows the current charge state in 25%
Press the white dot on the battery and the charge percentage indicator will show the approximate remaining charge, in
25% steps.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 5, Operation Guidelines | 5-3
steps. An intelligent battery controller, integrated in
our DEWETRON systems, takes care of the charging
and discharging process in order to ensure maximum
battery performance and lifetime.
Turning on the System
Locate the power switch on the front panel above the
main screen. This is a momentary rocker type switch,
where the white dot indicates the ON direction.
♦♦ Press ON and hold for one second to power the
system on.
♦♦ Press ON and hold for 3 seconds to power OFF.
♦♦ Green POWER LED: lit when the system is pow-
ered on
-- The LCD battery display is ALWAYS on when any
batteries are installed. This does not indicate
that the system is powered on! Only the green
POWER LED indicates system power on/off
status.
♦♦ Red HDD LED: lit when there is hard disk activity.
You will notice that the main screen’s backlight will
come on when power is applied. After a few moments
the BIOS and Windows operating system messages and
graphics will appear.
⇒⇒ If the system does not power on, ensure that you
have batteries with at least 30% charge, or that
the DPS-2410 is properly connected and TURNED
ON.
Hardware Protocols
Using the removable hard disk drive
The right side of the DEWE-321x has a 2.5” removable drive bay. This single bay has two separate hard
drives inside it: a C drive for Windows and applications,
and a D drive for data.
The DEWE-321x power switch is a momentary type, located
on the front panel near the LED battery status display. To its
right are LEDs for system power (green) and HDD activity
(red).
5-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
⇒⇒ If this is the only hard drive in the system, do
NOT remove it when the system is powered on!
This will cause Windows to crash very badly. If
you have an internal hard drive which has the
Windows operating system, then removing the
external drive is permitted when power is on,
because you are not writing to it at that time.
To remove the hard drive, you must have access to the
keylock. Turn the key into the lock and then press the
large button beside the lock to eject the drive. To insert
another drive, reverse these steps.
Using the Optical read/write drive
The DEWE-321x right side panel contains the removable
HDD and the optical media drive as standard.
Directly above the removable HDD is an optical drive
which can read and write many formats of DVD and CD
media. Note that DVD and CD authoring tools which
are standard within the installed Windows operating
system are available. No additional authorizing tools
are included as standard.
A standard slimline optical drive, you open it by pressing the single button on the drive door beside the LED.
Gently press-fit a compatible disk onto the spindle and
then close the door.
If your system has Windows XP operating system
installed, CD authoring software is built into Windows
already. However, Windows XP does not include a DVD
authoring utility, so you must purchase one separately
However, if your system has Windows 7 operating
system installed, authoring capability for both CD and
DVD media are included with the operating system.
Of course, in all cases, you are free to install whatever
authoring software you prefer. There are some very
nice third party utilities which are superior to the ones
built into Windows.
-- Windows 7 Professional, 32-bit mode, was
installed on these models starting in December
2010.
The optical drive is located above the computer access door.
Press the EJECT button to open the optical drive.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 6, Connecting Your Signals | 6-1
6
Connecting your Signals
Analog input connections
Because your DEWE-3210 and DEWE-3211 are compatible with so many different DAQ, MDAQ, PAD, EPAD, CPAD, and other
Dewetron modules, please refer to those signal conditioners in the Appendix for complete details about how to connect your
signals to them.
Counter/Encoder input connections
The DEWE-321x is suited with synchronous 32-bit advanced counter and digital inputs. In addition to the basic
counter function like simple event counting, up/down counting and gated event counting also period time, pulse
width, two-edge separation, frequency and all encoder measurements are supported.
All counter inputs can also be used as digital inputs. In addition to the basic counter input selections, the ADC
clock can also be used as counter source. The figure below shows the block diagram of the counter and input
overvoltage protection.
1) Pull-up resistors 2) Over-voltage protection 3) Buffers
6-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Counter Applications
each counter block is equipped with three inputs. With this three inputs the following applications can be done:
„„ Event Counting
„„ Gated Event Counting
„„ Up/Down Counter
„„ Frequency Measurement
„„ Period Time Measurement / Pulse Width Measurement
„„ Two Pulse Edge Separation
„„ Quadrature Encoder (X1, X2, X4, A-Up/B-Down)
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 6, Connecting Your Signals | 6-3
Event Counting
In Event Counting the counter counts the number of pulses that occur on counter source. At each sample clock
the counter value is read without disturbing the counting process. The figure below shows an example of event
counting where the counter counts eight events on Counter Source. The synchronized value is the value read at the
sample clock (see the encircled numbers in the figure, e.g. (1), (2), (3)... ).
Event counting figure :
Software setup:
-- If counting the falling edges is necessary, the input signal can be inverted.
6-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Gated Event Counting
Gated Event Counting is similar to Event Counting except that the counting process is gated. When the counter
gate is active, the counter counts pulses which occur at the counter source. When the counter gate is inactive the
counter retains the current count value. At each sample clock interval the current value is read.
The figure below shows an example of gated event counting where the counter counts three events on the counter
source. At (1) and (2) the counter value is zero, because the gate signal is inactive. At sample clock (3), (4) and
(5) the actual counter value is read out. At (6) the same value as at (5) is output.
Gated event counting figure:
Software setup:
-- If counting the falling edges is necessary, the input signal can be inverted.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 6, Connecting Your Signals | 6-5
Up/Down Counter
The Up/Down Counter counts the rising edges on the counter source. The direction of the counting depends on the
signal state on the counter aux pin. If counter aux is active (high level), the counter value increases; if counter
aux is inactive (low level), the counter value decreases.
Up/Down counting figure:
Software setup:
6-6 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Period Time Measurement
In Period Time Measurement the counter uses the internal time base to measure the period time of the signal
present on Counter Source. The counter counts the rising edges of the internal time base which occurs between
two rising edges on Counter Source. At the completion of the period interval the counter value is stored in a
register and the counter starts counting from zero. At every Sample Clock ((1), (2), ... (6)) the register value is
read out.
Period time measurement figure:
Software setup:
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 6, Connecting Your Signals | 6-7
Pulse Width Measurement
In Pulse Width Measurement the counter uses the internal time base to measure the pulse width of the signal
present on Counter Source. The counter counts the rising edges of the internal time base after a rising edge occurs
on counter source. At the falling edge on Counter Source the counter value is stored in a reg- ister and the counter
is set to zero. With the next rising edge on Counter Source the counter starts counting again. At every Sample
Clock ((1), (2), ... (6) ) the register value is read out.
Pulse width measurement figure:
Software setup:
-- Note: to measure the LOW time of the signal, invert the input.
6-8 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Two Pulse Edge Separation Measurement
The two pulse edge separation measurement is similar to the pulse width measurement, except that there are
two input signals: Counter Start and Counter Stop. After a rising edge has occurred on Counter Start the counter
counts rising edges of the internal time base. Additional edges on signal start are ignored. After a rising edge has
occurred on Counter Stop the counter stops counting and the value is stored in a register. At the next rising edge
on Counter Start the counter starts counting from zero again. At every Sample Clock ((1), (2), ... (6)) the register
value is read out.
Two Pulse Edge Separation Measurement figure:
Software setup:
-- If the input signals are inverted, the falling edges will be used for counting.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 6, Connecting Your Signals | 6-9
Motion Encoders
Motion encoders have usually three channels: channel A, B and Z. Channel A and channel B provide the square
signals for the counter, and have a phase shift of 90°. From this phase shift the decoder is able to recognize the rotation direction of the motion encoder. The third channel outputs one pulse at a certain position at each revolution.
This pulse is used to set the counter to zero. The number of counts per cycle at a given motion encoder depends
on the type of decoding: X1, X2, or X4. Some motion encoders have two outputs, which work in a different way.
Either channel A or channel B provides the square signal, depending on the direction of the rotation.
The next sections illustrate the basic encoder modes that are supported:
Quadrature Encoder
In the first case, X1 decoding is explained. When Input A leads Input B in a quadrature cycle, the counter increments on rising edges of Input A. When Input B leads Input A in a quadrature cycle, the counter decre- ments on
the falling edges of Input A. At every Sample Clock ((1), (2), ... (9)) the counter value is read out.
Quadrature Encoder X1 Mode figure:
6-10| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
For X2 encoding the rising edges and the falling edges of Input A are used to increment or decrement. The counter increments if Input A leads Input B and decrements if Input B leads Input A.
Quadrature Encoder X2 Mode figure:
Similarly, the counter increments or decrements on each edge of Input A and Input B for X4 decoding. The condition for increment and decrement is the same as for X1 and X2.
Quadrature encoder X4 figure:
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 6, Connecting Your Signals | 6-11
The third channel Input Z, which is also referred as the index channel, causes the counter to be reloaded with zero
in a specific phase of the quadrature cycle. The figure below shows the results for X1 encoding with input Z.
Quadrature Encoder with channel Z figure:
Software setup:
6-12| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
A-Up/B-Down Encoder
The A-Up/B-Down Encoder supports two inputs, A and B. A pulse on Input A increments the counter on its rising
edges. A pulse on Input B decrements the counter on its rising edges. At every Sample Clock ((1), (2), ... (9)) the
counter value is read out.
A-up/B-down Encoder figure:
Software setup:
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 6, Connecting Your Signals | 6-13
Frequency Measurement
In general it is possible to take the inverse of a period measurement to get the frequency of the input signal. If
the period time measurement is done an inaccuracy of counted internal time base cycles of ±1 cycle ap- pears,
because the counted cycles of the internal time base depends on the phase of the input signal with re- spect to
the internal time base. For long period times, and therewith low frequencies, the measurement error is negligible.
At high frequencies, and therewith short period times, few cycles are counted. In this case the error of ±1 cycle
becomes significant.
Accuracy at period time measurement figure:
For higher precision result the frequency measurement is done with two counters. In each case two counters are
paired, i.e. it have to be used counter 0 and counter 1 or counter 2 and counter 3 or counter 4 and counter 5 or
counter 6 and 7 for the frequency measurement. The first coun- ter counts the rising edges on Counter Source.
The second counter counts the rising edges of the internal time base. At every rising edge on Counter Source the
counter value of the second counter is stored in a register. At every Sample Clock ((1), (2), ... (6)) the values of
both counters are read out.
Frequency measurement figure:
With these both measurement results not only the frequency can be calculated in a precise way. Also the event
counter result can be show in fractions because the exact time when the event occurs at the input is known. The
event counting result is recalculated with interpolation to the exact sample point like shown in the diagram above.
In the next figure, the difference of the measurement result is shown. While a standard counter input shows the
value up to one sample delayed, the counter input of the counter calculates the counter result at the exact sample
6-14| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
point:
-- For low frequency input signals the frequency also can be obtained by measure the period time and take
its inverse without more inaccuracy.
Period, pulsewidth, and duty cycle
Software setup:
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 6, Connecting Your Signals | 6-15
Miscellaneous counter functions
Filters
Each counter input has a digital filter, which can be set to various gate times. If the gate time is set to “Off”,
no filter is on the input signal. The purpose of filtering is to eliminate unstable states, e.g. glitches, chatter,et al,
which may appear on the input signal. Noise can be mis-counted, and should therefore be eliminated.
The filter circuit samples the input signal on each rising edge of the internal time base. If the input signal maintains his state for at least the gate time, the new state is propagated. As an effect the signal transition is shifted
by the gate time.
The figure demonstrates the function of the filter:
Below, input signal with chatter, before and after filtering:
The filter can be chosen between eight filter settings:
Off, 100 ns, 200 ns, 500 ns, 1 μs, 2 μs, 4 μs and 5 μs.
6-16| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Two examples of filter settings:
The 100 ns filter will pass all pulse widths (high and low) that are 100 ns or longer. It will block all pulse widths
that are 75 ns or shorter. The 5 μs filter will pass all pulse widths (high and low) that are 5 μs or longer and will
block all pulse widths that are 4.975 μs or shorter.
The internal sampling clock (time base) is 80 MHz, so the period time amounts 12.5 ns. Pulse widths be- tween
gate time minus two internal time base period times may or may not pass, depending on the phase of the input
signal with respect to the internal time base.
Properties of all filter settings:
Reset on start measure
Usually all counters are reset at the start of data acquisition, i.e., the counter value is set to zero at the start of
data acquisition. In some applications this is not required. For example, an angle encoder is adjusted to the physical zero position at the beginning of a test procedure. By resetting the counter at every start of the measurement
this adjustment will be lost. Without this reset the counter is also active if the acquisition is interrupted between
the test cycles. As a result the counter types out the absolute angle position at the measurement output all the
time.
Count Direction
As default setting the count direction is in up-counting mode. Every rising edge at the input will increase the
counter value. The DEWE-ORION-1616-10x supports also down counting without the need of an additional input
like in the up/down counting mode.
No new value available
Especially in every kind of input period time measurement mode (also pulse width or two pulse edge separation measurement) there may be new information between two samples. Also measuring the line frequency of
about 50 Hz with a sample rate of 10 kSamples/sec means, that only after every 200th measurement new input
frequency information is available. Another example is the measurement on rotating machines if the sensor output
frequency is lower than the sample rate. Depending on the application you can choose between two different
output data settings:
„„ Repeat last value: last measured cycle time is taken until a new measured cycle time is available
„„ Make zero value: as soon as no input information is available the output is set to zero
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-1
7
Quick start guide to operation
Using DEWESOFT data acquisition software to record and analyze data.
Part 1: Acquisition and Analysis
Where to Start?
Turn on your Dewetron system. When Windows is loaded, find the DEWESoft icon on the desktop. It looks like
this:
Double-click it. When DEWESoft loads, it will be in the ACQUISITION mode by default, showing any existing
SETUP FILES that you have created. It should look like this:

The files might also look like icons. This is selectable near the top right corner of the window using these buttons:
7-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
You can load any setup file by simply double-clicking it from this page. But don’t do that yet: let’s make a new
setup file. Before doing anything, we need to cover some questions that you might have already:
What kind of files are these?
These are SETUP files. In the ACQUISITION mode you create a system setup, which is used to record a DATA
file.
Are these my data files?
No, these are not data files. You cannot see or load your data files in the ACQUISITION mode!
Why can’t I see my data files?
You can if you change to the ANALYSIS mode. But DEWESoft starts up in the ACQUISITION mode by default.
What is the difference between ACQUISITION and ANALYSIS modes? Why do I need them?
ACQUISITION - in this mode you set up the system and store (record) your data
ANALYSIS - in this mode you can see your stored data, print it out, export it, and analyze it further
Where is my data stored? How do I get to it?
It’s stored on the hard drive. And don’t worry, we will be loading and replaying captured data files in a few minutes!
Start with a Blank Setup
Click [Ch. Setup] in the ribbon:

When you do this, you will be on the ANALOG setup screen first. This is where you set up the analog inputs of your
system. You might have other setup screens for DIGITAL, COUNTER, CAN, VIDEO and more inputs… but let’s
focus on the analog inputs in this QuickStart. Notice that the Analog screen is highlighted in yellow when selected.
Below it you will see your channels. How this looks will vary according to which kinds of signal conditioners your
system has, and how many channels. Here is a system with eight DAQ modules:
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-3

otice that DEWESoft automatically activates the first channel for you. You need to activate the ones that you
N
want to store when you record data.
Each channel is shown on one row which has these fields: Slot, On/Off, (Color), Name, Amplifier, Physical Values,
CAL, and SETUP:
7-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Activate the Channels
All channels that are set to USED will be stored when you press STORE. It does not matter whether the channel
is shown on the display screen or not! If it is activated here as USED, it will be stored. It is possible to activate a
channel but not store it - this is an advanced feature not covered here.
To turn on more channels, simply press their [Unused] buttons, and they will change to [Used].
-- HINT: to turn on (or off) all channels at once, click the top of the column and select from the menu that
will appear:

“Select all” will turn ON all channels, while “Deselect all” will turn them all OFF.
Set Up Your Channels
The easiest and most direct way to configure a channel is to click the “Set ch. #” button all the way to the right:
To configure channel 0, for example, click the [Set ch. 0] button.
The channel setup dialog will appear. This is a critical screen to learn about, so let’s take a close look at what it
does and how to use it.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-5
Channel Setup Dialog
This dialog seems complex at first, but it’s really quite simple once you understand what it contains and how to use
it. There are four sections:
7-6 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
PART 1: signal conditioner hardware control (top-right quadrant)
It is best to configure this section first, because this actually controls the signal
conditioning HARDWARE. In the example above, we have a DAQP-LV low voltage module, which has two basic input types: voltage and current.
Assuming we want to measure voltage, simply set the RANGE using the selector:
Now set the filter (if you have an MDAQ system, you may or may not have the filter option). Different signal
conditioners have different settings, so please refer to the details about them. In this quick start we will just use
voltage modules and keep it simple.
In our example we set the range to 50V. Have a look at the reference section and you will see this on the LEFT
SIDE of the bar graph. Note that if you change the range, this will change directly below on the bar graph:
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-7
PART 2: channel name, units, color… (top-left quadrant)
Now enter a short name for this input channel, any additional info you want into the
next field, and then the UNIT OF MEASURE. This is important to do before moving
to the next section.
In the example above, we are configuring a channel which will be used to measure air pressure in PSI.
You can also set the color here. The “Min value” and “Max value” and “Sample rate divider” fields will be explained later. These are more advanced, so please ignore them for now.
7-8 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
PART 3: Scale/CAL your channel (bottom-left quadrant)
In this section you enter whatever scaling your input needs.
-- NOTE : If you are simply measuring voltage from a voltage module, you don’t
need to do any scaling (unless the voltage has been stepped down before
being input to the Dewetron system).
Let’s say that your transducer outputs 1V for 500 PSI. All you need to do is enter
these values into the “by two points” fields, as shown here:
In other words, when your sensor outputs 0V, this represents 0 PSI. But when it outputs 1V, that represents 500
PSI.
This simply establishes the slope of the scaling. In this case it is a linear function which multiplies the input by
500 and changes the UM from V to PSI. You can click the [by function] button and see this algebraically:
This slope is the famous y = mx + b equation from high school. The scaling is created by a multiplier and an offset.
In our example, the offset is zero (none). But there are times when the offset is not zero. For example, if you are
scaling from Celcius to Fahrenheit. These two temperature measurement systems have placed ZERO at different
places: 0° C = 32° F. So to scale from C to F you would set it up like this:
or…
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-9
It doesn’t matter whether you use the 2-point scaling method or the function scaling method to scale your channel! Use whichever one is more comfortable to you and the scaling factor that you prefer. Both of the methods
above are the same. They both express the equation C x 1.8 + 32 = F
Reference Check (bottom-right quadrant)
This fourth quadrant of the channel setup screen provides a handy reference,
where the ACTUAL input scale is shown on the left side of the bar graph, and the
result of your scaling is shown on the right side of the bar graph:
or …
-- NOTE : DEWESoft will show the data in your scaled units of measurement from this point forward! Of
course, the data are really stored unscaled, to preserve all of their resolution, but they are always shown
scaled according to what you do here, during and after recording. They are also exported in scaled engineering units.
Look at the channel above on the right, our PSI channel. It shows ±25,000 PSI. But this is too much: your sensor
will output only 8 volts max, so the 50V range is too much. No problem! Change the ACTUAL measuring range
from 50 to 10V, and look what happens:
>> results in >>

Now the measurement range of 10V yields a scaled measurement range of ±5000 PSI, which is what you were
looking for. In this way you can see the relationship between the ACTUAL hardware measuring range and the
SCALED measuring range.
7-10| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
If everything looks good, then you are ready to move on to the next channel. You can either click [OK] at the bottom of the setup dialog, or click the [ > > ] button to move to the next channel:

Change the Display Scale
One very important thing to note is that the scaled range shown on the right side of the bar graph on the setup
screen sets the DEFAULT DISPLAY RANGE for this channel. Therefore, if you were to put this channel into a
strip chart, scope, or analog meter gauge on the display screens, the scale will be taken from this bar graph.
Let’s take the example of the thermocouple channel, which is scaled like this:
So, if we put this channel into a strip chart, DEWESoft will set the scale to match the right side of the bar graph,
like this:
Note that DEWESoft set the channel’s display scale from -4.5e2 (-454°F) to 2.5e3 (+2498°F).
But what if this range is too much? Let’s say that you expect to only really measure from -100°F to +400°F?
You can change it right here on the graph, which we will cover later. But even better would be to PRE-set the
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-11
display scale of this channel, so that when you put it into a graph or meter which has a scale, it will automatically
be set to the desired span. How to preset this default display scale? It is back on the channel’s setup screen, in
section 2:
Setting the Default Display Range
If you refer back to PART 2: channel name, units, color..., you will find two fields that we skipped over before.
They are labeled “Min value” and “Max value”. By default they say “Auto” in them, which means that the display
range of this channel will be set to the same min and max values of the reference bar graph. But you can override
that by entering numbers into either or both of these fields!
So in our example, we want the temperature channel’s default range to be -100°F to ±400°F, therefore we would
enter that like this:
Note that making this change will not CHANGE the range of any existing graph, but you can coax them to defer to
these settings by right-clicking on the channel name within the graph:
7-12| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
after right-clicking on the channel name inside the graph:

And when you add this channel into graphs for the first time, they will be scaled at -100°F to ±400°F automatically!
Above, the same temperature channel shown in several different kinds of graphs and meters, they all have the
default -100°F to +400°F display scale, because you have preset the display scale back on the setup screen for
that channel.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-13
Copying Channel Settings
You just learned a lot in setting up that channel. You set the actual hardware range/filter, then moved left to the
channel name, description, units, and possibly set the display range, then moved down to do the scaling… all the
while keeping an eye on the reference bar graph to ensure that this channel was set correctly. At this point you
might be worrying that this is a lot of work to do on every single analog channel. Is there a shortcut you can take
to speed up the process?
Yes! Normally you will have several channels whose configurations are very similar. Here is our set up screen:
OK, you just set the first channel up … and the next three channels are going to be very similar. Their hardware
settings will be the same, and possibly even their scaling, display scale settings, etc. How do you copy those settings from channel 0 to the next three channels?
Easy. Click the first box in the SLOT column of the channel that you want to copy:
When you click the SLOT box of any channel, it pops up the Copy/Paste menu. Only Copy is active, since there is
nothing to paste yet. Click Copy.
Now click on the SLOT box of channel 1, the next channel down. Suddenly the Paste menu item is active, so click
it to paste the settings from Channel 0 to Channel 1:
Now you get some very nice choices, which make the copy/paste process very flexible. Here is what each of the
three sub choices under Paste source (<module type> : <channel>) means:
7-14| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
„„ Paste - it will simply paste the settings from the channel you copied to this channel, EXCEPT that it will not
paste the channel name, channel color, or the Used/Unused status to this channel.
„„ Paste to all - it will paste the settings from the channel you copied to ALL channels, EXCEPT that it will not
paste the channel name, channel color, or the Used/Unused status to the other channels.
„„ Paste special… - here you can choose exactly which parameters it will paste from the channel you copied to
this channel, or even a range of channels. So if you wanted to really make them all the same color, or paste to
a range of channels (example: copy channel 14 and then paste it to channels 23 to 31).
If you select the Paste special... option, you get this screen where you can control what gets pasted, and to which
range of channels:
You can click the boxes in the PASTE column to toggle whether this parameter gets pasted or not. As mentioned,
the Used/Unused status is not normally pasted from one channel to another, but here we can override that and
paste that, too, as well as the channel name, etc. At the top we told it to paste from Slot 1 to Slot 3, so that channels 1, 2, and 3 will receive this paste simultaneously. Click OK to execute the paste, and see what happens:
The Paste Special function turned those three channels on and pasted every parameter except the channel names
and colors from channel 0 to channels 1, 2, and 3. Now you can just modify the channel names right here, and
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-15
you’re ready to go.
Just double-click in the white field under the Name column to directly edit any channels’ name. You don’t need to
open up the [Set ch. #] dialog box to enter a name or pick a color.
OK, our analog channels are all set up - let’s make the final adjustments and then record some data.
7-16| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Set the Data File Name
You need to tell DEWESoft what to NAME your captured data file. In other words, you need to set the file name.
For this function, please click the File details button in the toolbar:
By default, DEWESoft will put a name like Data into this field. Type in whatever you want, avoiding characters
that are illegal to use in Windows filenames, such as $ <> {} [] / \ | ; : , -- you know the list! If you stick with numbers, letters, underscores and hyphens you will be OK.
Automatic Recording STOP function
Let’s say that you want to start storing, and then have DEWESoft record for one hour automatically. Or stop after
a certain file size is reached. These functions are easy to control using the Stop storing after checkbox that you
can see here. Check it, and some settings controls will appear automatically for you:
With Stop storing after checked, you can set DEWESoft to stop storing automatically based on time (hours, minutes, or seconds), or file size (in MB), or number of triggers within the file.
Automatic File Numbering
Notice the checkbox called Create a Multifile. This means that DEWESoft will automatically name your files for
you, so you don’t have to keep entering a new name each time you want to record data.
If you don’t use multifile, and you stored data right now, it would be stored to the filename Data.d7d.
If you come back here, this screen would look different. Do you notice the difference?
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-17

If you saw that the filename “Data” is now written in RED, then you were correct. DEWESoft shows a filename in
RED here if this file already exists! So if you were to try and store again, DEWESoft would stop and tell you that
this file exists, and give you the chance to either overwrite it with new data, or enter a new name.
To avoid this, check the Multifile box, and then use the setup button that will appear to pre-configure how DEWESoft will automatically name your files, like so:
The way it is set above, the base part of the filename will be Data, and each time you store data, DEWESoft will
add an underscore and then four digits, starting at zero. So you will get a series of data files called:
Data_0000.d7d
Data_0001.d7d
Data_0002.d7d
Data_0003.d7d
Data_0004.d7d
…
and so on.
7-18| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Notice also that you could elect to start numbering the files at something higher than 0000. Simply select or enter
a starting file number.
Of course, you can change the base part of the filename to anything supported by the Windows OS. In the example
below we entered Gear_check as the base part of our filename.
You may also turn on the DATE to be added to the filename. You could also turn on the TIME, which will disable
the number at the end (you cannot have both).
In the gray example area, you will see a preview of how your files will be named (as shown above).
Automatic file SWITCHING function
When multifile is not checked, the box below it is called Stop storing after, and as we saw, it allows you to set
DEWESoft to stop storing according to how big the file is, or when a certain amount of time has elapsed.
But when multifile is checked, the Stop storing after function changes slightly to be called Make new file after. In
this case, DEWESoft will not stop recording per se, but it will close the current data file and immediately open
a new one, which will be named according to the active multifile settings. In other words, instead of STOPPING
storage outright, DEWESoft will switch to the next file in the series automatically.
Check the box and you will get similar configuration controls as before:
As before, DEWESoft can switch files automatically based on time (absolute or relative), file size, or trigger
count. If you want one triggered event per data file, this is the way to do it, for example. Set it to triggers and set
the quantity to 1.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-19
Set the Sample Rate
You need to select a sample rate. This is the number of samples per second that DEWESoft will store for each of
your active analog channels. If you have four channels active, and you select a sample rate of 10 kS/s for example,
DEWESoft will stored 10 thousand samples per second for each of the four channels. This means that 40,000
samples will be stored each second. In a 16-bit system that means 80,000 bytes of data per second. In a 22 or 24bit system, it is 160,000 bytes of data per second.
-- Note : Typically you should select a sample rate which is at least twice as high as the highest frequency
that you want to measure. The higher the rate, the more time axis resolution you will get, but the bigger
the file will get!
You set the rate right here on the ANALOG setup screen, just above the channel list:
Use the Dynamic acquisition rate to set the sample rate. Using the small triangle at the bottom of the field you
can change the units of the sample rate, as shown here. So if you think in kiloHertz, for example (kSamples per
second per channel), you can select that instead of Hz/ch). You can work in Hz, kHz, or even MHz if you have a
really fast system. When you change sample rate units, the value shown in the box will also change accordingly.
To select a rate, either choose one from the list that drops down from the little triangle, or simply type one into
the field and press ENTER on the keyboard. If DEWESoft cannot do this range, it will correct it and show you
what it can do:
There are several storing modes in DEWESoft, but in this first example we are simply going to store manually, by
pressing STORE then STOP. Later in this QuickStart guide we will come back and learn how to use reduced storage mode and the triggered modes.
7-20| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Save Your Setup
Everything that you can set up in DEWESoft is saved to a setup file that you can name freely (according to Windows file naming restrictions of course). It is ALWAYS a good idea to save your setup before moving on from here.
You need to be in the SETUP mode (as we have been for many pages now). On the left side of the toolbar are
large buttons for [Save] and [Save as]. If you have not yet named this setup file and you click [Save], DEWESoft
treat this the same as if you had clicked [Save as].
Use [Save as] to save the current setup configuration to a new name. So you can open an existing setup that you
like, use [Save as] to make a copy of it under a new name, then change it freely! No need to start from the beginning each time.
WHAT’S NEXT?
Yes, there are many other kinds of channels that Dewetron systems typically have, such as digital inputs,
counter/encoders, video cameras, CAN BUS interfaces, and more… but this is a quickstart guide and we will focus
on making simple analog input recordings.
There are also several storing methods, such as triggering and reduced data. But for the quickstart we will focus
on the ALWAYS FAST mode, which is like a tape recorder: you manually press STORE and DEWESoft records
your active input channels at the selected dynamic acquisition rate, until you press STOP.
Are you ready to record some data?
It is better if you have some real signals connected
to your channels. Even a simple 9VDC transistor
battery, or a function generator that can output a
sine wave, is a great way to input signals. If you
have nothing but straight lines on the screen, it is
impossible to learn how to zoom in, for example.
So please take a moment and connect at least one
real signal to your dewetron system, and then let’s
move forward to the MEASURE screen, where we
will use the default displays and STORE some data.
After that we will learn how to replay it.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-21
Using the Acquisition Screens
When you click ACQUISITION from the ribbon at the top of the DEWESoft window, the default displays will appear: Overview, Scope, Recorder, and FFT:
If this is your first visit to Overview, there will be a digital meter group containing any channels that are set to
USED back on the analog setup screen.
In the example above, just one channel is active.
-- Note : going back and activating more channels will not automatically add them to this screen - you have
to do that manually.
7-22| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Elements of the Acquisition screen
What exactly do the Acquisition screens contain? It might seem complex at first, but there are really just four
main functional groups of objects, as shown here:
Notice that four screens are created for you by default. click on the Scope, Recorder, and FFT screens and see
how they are set up by default. You can change everything about these screens as mentioned earlier, but for now
let’s use them as they are, and then come back to the design functions later.
1. RIBBON AND TOOLBAR - contains the DEWESoft ribbon, where you can navigate among the setup screens,
display screens, and design mode. Also contains the toolbar, which has buttons to start and stop storing data, and
select which screen to display.
2. PROPERTIES BAR - where you can set the properties of any display widget in the Data display area, as well
as the properties of each display screen
3. DATA DISPLAY AREA - where your signals are shown, according to which display screen has been selected
from the toolbar
4. CHANNEL LIST - shows your channels, and allows you to assign them into graphs and widgets.

OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-23
Please click on the Recorder button in the toolbar to activate that display:
The recorder shows you one big graph by default. Or perhaps more graphs depending on how many channels were
set to USED when you first come here after leaving the setup screen. We had only one channel USED, so DEWESoft gave us one graph with our one channel on it. Common questions at this point:
Is my data being stored already? I see it moving on the screen!
No. It is being monitored but not yet stored, because we did not click the STORE button yet.
I see some data that just went by, but I want to save it to disk. Is this possible?
No, data being monitored is not stored. It is not possible to capture it now.
Can I freeze this display right now? What about when I am storing data?
7-24| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
To freeze the display when just monitoring data (not storing), press the STOP button. It will change to say START
when you do that, so that you can re-start it moving on the screen.
If you are STORING data, and you press STOP, the recording will STOP and the screen will stop moving.
If you want to freeze the display while DEWESoft continues to store data in the background, use the FREEZE
button instead! This is limited by a RAM buffer, so you cannot freeze the display and look back in time beyond the
amount of RAM that is available for this function.
Speed up/Slow down the recorder graph
If the data are scrolling past too slowly or too fast, use the blue [+] and [-]
 STORE SOME DATA
Let’s get down to business and record some data. Press the STORE button and the screen will be cleared. A red
vertical line appears and your data is now storing to disk. This is also indicated in the LOG in the toolbar area:
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-25
Close-up view of the recording log:
Marking your recordings with EVENTS
During recording, you can mark your data in three ways:
„„ Notice event - just hit the spacebar on the keyboard, and a gray line will be time-stamped and added to the
recorder graph. This is like the simple event marker of an old fashioned chart recorder.
„„ Text event - press the N key on the keyboard. Click on the log area if necessary to open the log for typing. Just
type in whatever you like. The text event will be time-stamped according to when you pressed N, not when you
finish typing, so there is no rush!
„„ Voice event - (requires that sound events be activated in the project configuration, and that your Dewetron
system has a usable sound card installed) press and hold V on the keyboard, and talk into your PC mic (not
included by Dewetron). A short voice message will be added to the data file.
You will see all of these events later when you reload this captured data to the screen. More about that later.
Each event type is indicated on the screen with a vertical line of a different color. You can also activate them using
the little icons near the log area instead of the keyboard shortcuts, as shown here.
Stop storing...
Press the STOP button and the recording will be closed. The screen will freeze.
-- Note: there are also hardware STORE and STOP buttons on the front panel of the DEWE-3210 and DEWE-
3211 models, with an adjacent LED STORING DATA indicator. It doesn’t matter whether you use the
hardware or software buttons.
7-26| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Reloading your Data Files
This is as simple as pressing the ANALYSIS button near the top-left of the screen! If you have not gone to any
other screen since stopping the recording, DEWESoft will automatically load the last data file that you recorded.
Here it is!
Replay reference strip
Across the top of the DISPLAY AREA is something new: the display reference bar. By default, DEWESoft puts
the first channel into this reference strip. When you load a data file, the entire file is displayed.
The beginning of the data is on the left, and the end is on the right.
This reference strip will become very useful when you ZOOM IN on the data. Let’s learn how to do that now.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-27
Zooming in and zooming out
It is important to know how to zoom in and out on various parts of your data, to look closer and make measurements. Notice that when you are in the Analysis mode, there are two grey cursors and one yellow cursor on the
screen. The yellow cursor is also shown in the reference strip at the top.
But let’s use the gray cursors to zoom. Simply drag them into position around the area that you want to zoom. Or,
you can simply click and drag to the right, then release, to set the cursors.

Now move the pointer between them, and you will notice that it changes to a pointer with a small PLUS symbol
below it:
To zoom this area, simply CLICK with your mouse (or touch with your finger, if you have a touchscreen) between
these cursors!
7-28| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Notice what the screen looks like now:
See how the area that you zoomed has been highlighted into a little box? This is done to show you WHERE in the
data file you are looking on the recorder, and roughly how much of the data is being shown. This is a great reference, and is needed once you start zooming in.
Zoom in again and again!
You can zoom in as many times as you like.
How to unzoom?
There are two ways:
1. Simply RIGHT-CLICK onto the recorder graph, and each zoom that you have done will be un-zoomed in reverse
order. So you can step backward through your zooms perfectly.
2. Use the blue MINUS button at the bottom right corner of the recorder graph to reduce the amount of time
shown on the graph.
Move the zoom box
The small zoom box shown in the reference strip can be directly moved. Use the mouse and drag it left or right.
Or, use the PAGE+UP and PAGE+DOWN buttons on your keyboard to move it in whole steps. You can also move it
in half steps by using the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-29
Make direct measurements on any channel
Simply by moving the pointer along any waveform, DEWESoft will show you a color-coded X and Y values in
engineering units in the top-left corner of the recorder graph. The pointer turns into a crosshairs when you move it
along a waveform. Notice the values shown at the top of the graph:
Using the Cursors
DEWESoft uses these cursors in two ways: to zoom as shown above, and to make measurements on the signals. To
make full use of them, activate the cursor checkbox in the properties panel on the left, when your recorder graph
is active:
Before you check the box Show cursor values, the delta-T is already shown here. In the screen shot above, notice
the label:
dt = 6.7 ms f = 149 Hz
Therefore, the delta time between the cursors is less than 7 ms (<0.007 s), and the reciprocal of that time interval is 149 Hz.
Now check the Show cursor values box, and notice that the recorder graph will get a new panel on its right side,
which shows the cursor I and cursor II values in a table:
7-30| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
So we see the value of the channel called Master Cylinder at cursor I, cursor II, and then the calculated delta
amplitude value.
If a recorder graph has more than one channel in it, cursor readings for the other channels will also be shown
here, like in this example:
You can also move the cursors and take readings at exact locations. Simply drag each cursor into position. To prevent accidentally zooming because you clicked in between them, you can LOCK each cursor using the little padlock
icons on the properties panel.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-31
Print Out Your Data
You might want to make a print out on paper after recording data. To do this, make the screen look how you want
it to appear on the paper by zooming and using the cursor controls. Next, click the PRINT item from the ribbon
along the top of the DEWESoft window.
You can turn the page to portrait or landscape orientation using the buttons in the toolbar.
Want to add some text to the page? Simply type it into the text field in the toolbar, and it will appear on the
header of the printed page.
7-32| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Add your company logo to printouts
You can associate a BMP image to DEWESoft, so that it will be printed in the header when you print your data.
Click the Settings menu near the top right corner of the DEWESoft screen. Click on Global setup... to open the
dialog box.
When the dialog opens, click on the Print tab to see those settings:
Click on the ellipsis […] button and then choose the bitmap (*.bmp) image that you want to appear on your
printed output.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-33
Next time you print something, it will have your logo at the top-left.
Export Your Data
You might need to convert the DEWESoft data file to another format, so that you can open it in a different analysis program. You can do this from the Analysis mode. Open a data file, and then zoom in if you want to export only
a certain portion of the data file. If you want to export it all, do not zoom in.
After opening a data file, click the EXPORT item from the ribbon near the top of the DEWESoft screen:
Now click the File export button from the toolbar. When you do, you will see a list of file formats that you can
convert this data file to. Select any one of them. DEWESoft will put the name of this data file into the Export file
name field automatically - however, you can change it to whatever you like. But please do not add the file extension, because DEWESoft will add it automatically.
-- NOTE : to export to either Excel or Flexpro formats, you need to have these applications on this com-
puter! Otherwise, exporting will not work! This is because DEWESoft needs to communicate with these
programs to export to them properly.
7-34| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Modify the Screens
It is not possible to do this subject justice in such a short manual. But you should know that you can enter the
Design mode by clicking the Design button in the ribbon near the top of the DEWESoft screen, and then change
virtually every aspect of each screen. This is one of the most powerful and popular features of DEWESoft. Have a
look at just a few of the screens that you can make in a matter of moments:
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-35


Use the hardware STORE and STOP buttons
Unlike most Dewetron instruments, the DEWE-3210 and DEWE-3211 include hardware buttons for starting and
stopping recording. You may use them just like you use the on-screen buttons labeled the same: STORE and STOP.
These hardware buttons are active at the same time that the software buttons are active.
The built-in LED will illuminate when data is storing. When you press STOP, the LED will go dark, and the storing
will stop.
7-36| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-37
Part 2 - Projects and Global settings
This is part 2 of our QuickStart Guide to DEWESoft 7! It was written at the time of DEWESoft version 7.0.1,
however it will remain largely compatible with higher versions of the software. It is meant to help you reach
the next level of knowledge with DEWESoft. Part 1 focused 100% on the analog inputs, and using the measure
screens as they are. In Part 2, you will see how to configure DEWESoft the way that you like it both at the highest possible level (Global level) as well as at the Project level -- and explain the difference. The Project level is
especially important to learn about, since it never existed before DEWESoft7.
NOTE : In this manual we will refer to DEWESoft as “DEWESoft” as shorthand.
What is a Dewesoft Project?
You can consider a Project to be like a “hardware profile,” in that it defines the hardware that you will be using
with DEWESoft. It also contains flexible settings that control how the system behaves. Let’s say that you have a
computer that you sometimes use a DEWE-43-V (USB connection), and other times you connect a DEWESoftNET ethernet based system, or other times yet, you use an ORION A/D card and rack of DAQ modules outside your
computer.
In DEWESoft6, there was only one global hardware setup, which you would have to change each time you wanted
to connect these different pieces of hardware to. But now with “Projects,” you can make and name a hardware
profile for each possibility. But a project defines more than just the hardware setup, as we will learn in this QuickStart Guide.
To see your Projects, click the [Settings] button near the top-right corner of the DEWESoft window:
The first item is called Project >
Click it to open the submenu, where you can see your existing Projects, and then some controls below them for
adding a new Project, renaming the active Project, removing a Project, etc.
If you have not visited here before, you probably have a single Project called Default (you always need to have at
least one Project, otherwise you would have no hardware setup!).
7-38| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
In our case, we have a Project called “DEMO,” in which there is no data acquisition hardware defined, and
DEWESoft creates waveforms for demo and training purposes. The checkbox tells us that this is the currently
active Project. There is also another project called “DEWE43,” which is used when we connect our DEWE-43-V
unit, and a third Project called “Sound card,” in which we use the computer’s sound card as a two channel sound
recorder.
Hardware setup screen
Let’s check the hardware settings of the active Project. Simply click the Hardware setup… menu item. This menu
will close and the hardware setup dialog will open.
Hardware setup is where you control all of the hardware connected to your system, as well as the options that you
might have purchased for DEWESoft. Your license info is also stored here. There are several screens, starting with
ANALOG.
You can see that we have selected No A/D Hardware, since we want this project to be purely for demo and training purposes, even when there is no hardware connected. But we have selected the Amplifiers to be COM port or
offline, so that we can use them in the setup mode for training.
In our other Project where we connect the DEWE-43-V and DAQ modules to make real measurements, the hardware setup screen looks different, of course:
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-39
There are other tabs for setting up other input types, such as CAN, GPS, VIDEO...and more. The Plugins tab is
where you activate software plugins that you have purchased for DEWESoft (some plugins are free). Registration
is where you enter your license information.
One source of potential confusion is the Math tab, so it is worth mentioning here:
MATH Options
It is important to note that the Basic functions (Filter, Formula, Statistics…) box can be checked. These functions
are included with all versions of DEWESoft. It should be checked for you already, but if it isn’t, go ahead and
check it.
However, the additional features below that are OPTIONAL - i.e., they have to be paid for. If you check their
boxes, and you do not have a license, you will not be able to click OK and use DEWESoft!
7-40| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
-- Note : The DEWESoft-DEWESoftA version includes most of these options. However, Power requires the
additional option called DEWESoft-OPT-POWER.
BUT if you want to try them before buying them, the solution is simple: create a new project called DEMO and
then set it up with NO A/D HARDWARE like we did, and then you can turn on every option in the world! No
license is needed for the demo mode! In demo mode, DEWESoft will generate sinusoidal waveforms that you can
use to test any function that you want, without any license.
And now with the ability to have different projects, you don’t have to take a risk by changing your “real” hardware setup -- just make a project called DEMO and then set up the hardware for this demo/testing mode, where
every option is turned on. The only thing you cannot do is try these functions with real data coming in (unless you
purchase the option of course).
These options are called “built-ins” because they are included already in the DEWESoft source code - they simply
require a valid license to be used for real.
DEWESoft Plugins
Then there are options which can be added in to DEWESoft as little snippets of code, or quick large chunks, called
PLUGINS. These plugins are easy to install - you simply copy them into the \addons directory under the DEWESoft program file location on the hard disk. Then restart DEWESoft, and all installed plugins will be shown in the
Plugins tab here on hardware setup. For example:
Above you can see that we have a bunch of plugins installed. Some of them are free of charge, while others are
included with the hardware option that you have purchased from us, or are an extra cost option.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-41
To activate a plugin you need to toggle it to Used, as you can see we have done above with the DEWESoft-NET
plugin. When you click some plugins, they may have some additional features or configuration selections that will
appear in the Plugin properties area at the bottom of the dialog box. Not all plugins have this.
Please consult with your Dewetron sales person to learn more about which plugins are available for DEWESoft.
More Project Properties
In addition to the hardware and licensing configuration that you set up on the Hardware setup dialog, each project
also contains several other properties that you can configure according to your needs. Click again on the [Settings] button near the top-right corner of the DEWESoft window:
Notice now the item called “Project setup…”. Please click it to open the dialog box:
7-42| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
This dialog has several subsections, including:
„„ Project folders - where you can set your default folders for setup files, data files, and exported data files
„„ Starting setup - where you can force DEWESoft to load a particular setup and screen when it loads
„„ Security - where you can establish password protection of the setup mode
„„ Internal variables - where you can define project level variables which can be used in Math channels, dis-
played on the screen, etc. These can be text or numeric variables.
„„ Data header - where you can set up a data entry box that will appear automatically before or after data stor-
age, to force the operator to enter whichever test parameters you want added to the data file
„„ Memory - top level control of DEWESoft’s use of physical RAM
The settings that you make here will apply to only the active Project! This is a lot of flexibility.
Most of the project subsections are obvious how to use, so we won’t get into them here in the QuickStart. But
there are two subsections worth a closer look: Internal Variables and Data Header, so we will do that now!
Internal Variables
Here you can define variables which will exist at the Project level. That means that they will be available to all
setups which are created when this project is active. Variables can be in the form of TEXT or NUMERIC values.
To create a variable, click the [+] symbol, and a default channel will be added, which you can directly edit.
You can rename the variable’s ID, channel name, and even give it a unit of measurement and color, if it will be
used as a channel. Next you can set the TYPE of data that it should contain: whether a floating, integer, or text
value.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-43
If it is a numeric type, you can set the channel type to single or async. This does not apply to text data types.
„„ A “single” value means that it is treated like a static number in DEWESoft.
„„ An “Async” value is treated more like a channel in DEWESoft. This means that it could be processed in a se-
ries of calculations, like a filter. But there is no way to filter a static value. As a result of this distinction, both
async and single value numeric variables can be used within the FORMULA kind of math channel. However,
only an async value could be processed by a FILTER math channel. Do you see the difference?
Finally, you can set the default value. This field is quite wide, which is useful when this variable will hold some
text.
Above we have created four variables - one of each basic type: text, floating number, and integer number. In addition, there are two versions of floating numbers: one which is async and another which is a single value.
So now what can we do with these variables? Well basically, we can use them in MATH channels, and we can also
simply put them on the screen in any setup that is active when this Project is active! These values will be stored
with any data files that are created when this project is active.
7-44| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Using variables in Math channels
Numeric variables can be used within your MATH channels, which is their primary purpose after all. You can use
these variables to hold constants, for example, which are needed in your calculations.
If you create a new FORMULA math channel, you will see how you can use them:
Above you can see that in the formula math setup, there is a tab called Variables, which will appear as soon as
there is at least one variable created for the current Project! So you can use these values within your MATH
formulas, as shown above… we are dividing the real analog signal called ‘Oil’ by the variable called ‘Oil_Temp.”
This formula creates a new virtual channel called ‘Oil_calc’ with the units ‘C’ (notice how we entered those parameters near the top-left corner of the screen above).
So now this new math channel is available to be placed on the screen. Let’s take a look at that by clicking the
Measure button near the top of the DEWESoft window:
Click Measure from the ribbon...
After clicking Measure you will see the first display screen, called Overview. If this is the first time you have visited the Overview screen with this setup, DEWESoft will automatically put your USED channels onto the screen
in the form of digital meters, like this:
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-45
Looking at the right side of the display, you can see a list of channels shown in the grey, vertical task bar. By
default these channels are GROUPED according to type.
In this setup we have analog channels, then the one Math channel, then our Variables.
Each channel is shown within its group. Each group is collapsible.
In the first DEWESoft QuickStart Guide we showed you the channel list, but we did not show you how to get the
most from it. We will do that in a future QuickStart Guide.
For now just have a look at the screen -- and notice how your channels appear within the digital meters:
Even your text variable can be shown in a digital meter! Basically every kind of channel can be displayed in this
meter (there are very few exceptions, and not worth mentioning at this point).
7-46| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Data header
In this subsection of the Project setup, you can define a form that will appear when you record data, in order to
collect some additional information from the operator about the test.
When you first come to this subsection, it will look like the screen shot above. The main part of the dialog box will
be completely empty, as shown here. This is your workspace, where you can create data input fields that the test
operator will use later. There are three things that you can add to this workspace:
„„ Info - This is basically just a section header, which you can freely name.
„„ Input - A field which will collect alphanumeric input from the user
„„ Selection - A control that allows the user to pick from a list that you have predefined
OK, let’s see how all these work. It is normally a good idea to start by writing down on paper what you want to
collect from the user. Just use a piece of paper, and then refer to it as you duplicate it in the software. Let’s say
that you want to collect this information, arranged in these groups:
Test operator info:
name
ID number
Test article info:
model name (could be model A, model B, or model C)
serial number
lot number
Test procedure info:
ATP number (could be 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, or 22a)
ATP step (could be any number from 1 to 100)
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-47
How would you create this? It’s quite simple. Let’s start with the first group of info:
Test operator info:
name
ID number
First we create the group, by clicking the
icon, then editing its label below, like this:
Now we have a section, and we can add the fields below it. The first field we want to collect is the operator’s
name. If you have a lot of operators and it is not practical to predefine them all, just use an Input field, so that the
user can type his or her name freely.
Click the
icon, then edit the label, as shown here:
Now we want to add the ID number field. Repeat the same step: click the
icon, then edit the label:
7-48| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Great! Section 1 is done. We have created a category, and then defined two input fields that the operator can type
into when data is recorded. Let’s move on and create the next section, and learn how to create a selection field. As
a reminder, here is what we need to create:
Test article info:
model name (could be model A, model B, or model C)
serial number
lot number
So first we create the category header by clicking the
icon, then editing its label below:
Easy enough. But now we need to create a selector so that the operator can simply choose from model A, model
B, or model C (and nothing else). To do that, you click the
icon, and then edit its label:
But this field looks different than the simpler Input fields that we created before. A selector control requires that
you define the selections right now. To do that, click the
(ellipsis) button:
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-49
The selection list dialog opens, where you can add new items to the list. Above we have typed “model A” into the
new item field, then clicked the Add item button below, to move it into the list. Do the same for “model B” and
“model C,” then click OK.
At this point you have the idea, right? Please continue along and add the rest of the items from our checklist, until
it looks like this:
If you change your mind and want to delete a field, or rearrange the order of them, there are controls exactly for
those functions:
To move a field up or down, use the icons shown here. Also, you can use the Delete icon to remove a field completely. To select WHICH FIELD to move or delete, simply click on the field, and it will get a darker color field
behind it, like the one called “Rabbits” here:
7-50| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
With this field selected, click the
icon and it will go away. There is no UNDO, so be careful.
If your form is ready, there is still one very important step left: you must tell DEWESoft WHEN to show this form
to the operator! There are checkboxes near the bottom, where you can tell DEWESoft to pop up this form at the
start of acquisition, or at the end, or both.

It is critical to check at least ONE of these boxes, otherwise the form will never appear! Remember that this data
header exists at the PROJECT LEVEL. Therefore, it does not matter which setup you use when storing data:
when this project is active, the data header and internal variable settings that you establish here will be applied
during recording.
Let’s see how this works.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-51
OK, we have our system set up and ready to record. Using the info in DEWESoft QuickStart-1 you learned how to
set up and scale your channels, and in QuickStart-2 you have learned how to create internal variables and a data
header. You have combined variables and real data in the MATH section to create virtual channels, which will be
displayed and recorded, too. The sample rate is set up and you have a nice screen to look at.
Press STORE and watch what happens:
7-52| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Congratulations! When you press STORE, the Data Header dialog will instantly appear, and your operator can fill
in the fields and then click OK to continue.
Selectors that you have predefined will show their first value by default, so if you want to force the operator to
make a choice, you can create a first selection like “--” or “choose” when you define the selection.
If you think that your operators will be annoyed by this data header and will skip over it, you could also check the
box to have it appear at the end of storing, when they have more time to fill it out.
Data headers can be as long as you like. If you create many fields, the screen will automatically create NEXT and
PREV buttons to navigate through multiple pages of fields. But take care: few people want to fill out so many
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-53
fields, and will quickly grow tired of it.
If you store data, stop, and then store again, the data header will appear again -- with the fields already filled in
from the first run. So the operator just needs to change any fields which might have a different value now… the
other fields can be left alone.
Looking at the data header information later
Data header values, and all variables from the project that was active when a given data file was created, are
stored within the header of the data file. This is crucial for documentation purposes! How can you see this info?
In the Analyze mode, click ONCE on any data file. In our case, we just captured some data called Test.d7d, so let’s
have a look:
When you click on the name of a data file here, you will see the header information from this file below, in several
tabbed areas:
7-54| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
„„ Settings - shows the basic settings of the data file (sample rate, date and time of storing, duration, and many
more elements about each of the captured channels)
„„ Events - there are always at least two events in any data file: the date and time storing started, and the date
and time when it stopped.
„„ Data header - what we just created! The fields are captured here
„„ File locking - whether this file is protected against post-processing or not
„„ Preview - a simple look at one of the display screens
We cover all of this in more detail in the manual, but for now click the Data header tab and see what is captured
here:
Yes, your inputs are safely stored within the data file, for documentation purposes! What else can you do with
these values? Can you print them out or show them on the screens?
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-55
To print out the data header info:
First, load the data file by double-clicking its name from the list. Then click the SETUP button in the ribbon:
At this point you can review the various elements contained within the header by clicking their icons: Channels,
Events, Data header, File locking, etc. But if you just want to make a print-out, click the PRINT button in the ribbon, and you will get a preview of what the paper will look like:
When you do a print preview from captured data, with the SETUP clicked in the ribbon, you will see a preview of
the entire header section of the data file.
To get a preview of the DATA itself, i.e., any of your display screens, simply click REVIEW from the ribbon, then
click PRINT in the ribbon:
7-56| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Variables within the data header
You might have noticed that DEWESoft creates a variable from each of the fields that you create in your data
header. These variables can be displayed and used in processes, just like the internal variables that you created
earlier!
For example, let’s say that each time you run a test you need to input a variable that will be used in a math channel. Like doing repetitive valve tests, where different valve diameters are used all the time, as one example. You
could ask the operator to simply enter the valve diameter using the Data header pop-up, and then this value will
be processed mathematically in whatever way you want!
Imagine a situation where a tolerance is calculated by multiplying a constant value by another value which might
change from test to test? This is not a problem: you can use the Internal Variables that we learned about earlier
to hold a constant value, and use the Data header field to collect a second value at run time from the operator….
then put them together in a math channel.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-57
Above - we add an internal variable to hold the valve circumference, which will not change from test to test...
Above - then we create a data header question that the operator needs to respond to at the beginning of each
recording, called Valve diameter. DEWESoft automatically assigns it a unique ID - but let’s change it to “ValveDiam” to make it easier to identify this parameter later. Now you should also define the TYPE of data that can
be entered: text, integer, or floating number. Since a number is absolutely required here, you should not allow the
operator to enter text, for example! You may also define the units and color of this channel.
Above - we create a MATH channel that we named ‘Valve_calc’ which will combine these two values and give you
the output that you need to test against!
This particular math channel doesn’t really make any sense: it is just one hypothetical example of how you can use
these variables in DEWESoft.
7-58| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Displaying variables on the screen
So now you can see that project variables - whether they are predefined or collected from the operator at run
time, can be quite powerful. Importantly, they are captured within the header of the data file, and are thus a permanent part of the documentation.
You can use them mathematically, or simply show them on the screen. How to do that? Let’s see:
Did you notice that in the channel list, ALL VARIABLES are shown? If your variables are not showing, then perhaps you are clicked on a display object which cannot hold them, like a scope or FFT graph. To reveal all of them,
click on a digital meter … then look at the channel list. You can see in the example above that there is a group
of variables, and within it, there are now two sub-groups, labeled ‘Data Header’ and ‘Internal Variables’, and they
contain exactly the variable names that we defined above.
In the screen above we have simply put these variables, as well as the real and math channels into meters.
Note that the data header variable is unknown until you press STORE and then the operator enters a number!
Then that value will be known to DEWESoft, and also will be used in the MATH channel that calls for it. This is
what has happened above.
Projects Summary
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-59
You can make as many Projects as you require. This is a handy way to quickly configure the system for different
test scenarios, and different hardware configurations. A great example is when you have a channel expansion box:
sometimes you need it, and sometimes you don’t You can therefore make a different Project for each configuration.
But that’s only the beginning: you might have only one hardware configuration, but you can use Projects for different test scenarios, since the data header and internal variables exist at the project level, and they are a great
source of automation and documentation, as you have seen above.
We suggest that you make a Project called DEMO that you can use for training, as well as to try all of the options
that are available as built-ins and plug-ins.
7-60| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Global Setup
In the previous section you learned how to create Projects, which will set up the system in a certain configuration.
But then there are some configuration parameters that you can at the highest level, i.e., above the level of any
particular Project. This is the Global setup, and by definition there can be only one.
Referring again to the [Settings] button, click it and then select the “Global setup…” item.
When you select this item you will get the Global setup dialog box:
There are several tabs on this dialog, which allow you to configure these parameters:
„„ General - where you can set the language, character set, default sample rate, and similar
„„ Displays - where you can control which screens are active by default, and set the display background color
„„ Sound - where you can active VOICE EVENTS for data storing, and trigger sounds from the PC sound card
„„ Print - where you can define several aspects of printing, and link to your company’s logo to print on reports
„„ Folders - where you can set up the default folders for top level settings and the sensor database
„„ Amplifier - (Infrequently used) top level Amplifier setting. Please leave this alone unless instructed otherwise
The most often-used features at this top level are: Changing the DEWESoft background color
The default background color is dark blue. However, if you plan on printing reports frequently directly from
DEWESoft, you might want to change the background to WHITE, because then the screen and paper output will
match. Also, this will prevent you from using really light colors like yellow (or white), which look great against
dark blue, but which are impossible to see when printed on white paper.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-61
To change the background color to white, click the [Displays] button on the Global settings dialog box:
Here you can simply set the color to white using the selector.
Here is the difference:
Adding a logo to your printouts
7-62| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
To add a logo, click the [Print] button on the Global settings dialog box:
Now click the […] button and then choose a BMP logo file that will be printed when you print stored data onto
paper.
Summary
This concludes Part 2 of the DEWESoft QuickStart Guide. We have still only scratched the surface of this amazing data acquisition software program. There are more input types, more math functions, and … well, it’s a long
list.
Please refer to the DEWESoft 7 Manual and DEWESoft 7 Tutorials for further information about how to use
these advanced capabilities, or make arrangements to attend a Dewetron training class, where you can really
learn a lot.
Finally, please experiment with DEWESoft and try everything. The software is quite intuitive once you get
started.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 7, Quickstart Guide to Operation | 7-63
7-64| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
100~250 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
AC Mains input
Standard 3-pin power connector
When the power switch is in
the OFF position, no power will
be output from the DPS-2410.
If you plug the DPS-2410 into
your DEWE-321x to recharge
its batteries, or to power the
DEWE-321x, the DPS-2410
power switch must be in the ON
position.
⇒⇒ Filtered air intake
⇒⇒ DO NOT BLOCK THE FAN
PORT! Blocked or dirty
fans can cause the DPS2410 to overheat and
shut down, or become
damaged.
24 VDC output
LEMO EGG.2B.302.CLL
(mate FGG.2B.302.CLAD82)
-- A mating cable is included
with the DPS-2410, to
connect it to the DEWE321x power input
DPS-2410 AC/DC
power supply
Yellow/green ground connector
-- Note - It is considered a
“best practice” to connect
the ground point to the test
stand and to the DEWE321x, to prevent ground
loops.
LED green POWER
ON indicator
Fuse: standard ATO “regular” fuse,
10A (red color code), reference
ISO 8820-3
⇒⇒ Always replace the fuse
with the same exact kind as
provided from the factory!
Damage to the DPS-2410, or
personal injury or even death
can result from using the
wrong fuse value or type. Replacement fuses are available
from Dewetron if you have
any questions or concerns.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 8, Power Related Accessories | 8-1
8
Power Related Accessories
DPS-2410 external AC/DC power supply
The DEWE-3210 and DEWE-3211 include a Dewetron Power Supply (DPS) which outputs 24VDC at 10 amps
(2410). Thus, the model name is DPS-2410. The DPS-2410 is used to power your system from 120/240VAC.
When connected and powered on, it will also recharge any batteries which are installed within the system at the
same time.
Here are the relevant specifications for this power supply:
Parameter
DSP-2410
Power input:
100~250 VAC, 50/60 Hz standard worldwide power from AC mains
Power output:
24 VDC nominal level, up to 10.5A absolute max (10A nominal and fused)
Ground:
yellow/green stripe color coded mini banana jack referenced to ground.
Switch:
AC mains power switch, turns off the DPS-2410 completely (there is no hot
standby mode)
Indicator:
Green LED indicates that the DPS-2410 is connected to power and turned
ON.
Fan:
Built into the top cover. Series 1 models: black plastic fan bezel. Series 2
models: flush metal fan grille.
Construction:
Aluminum with rubber shock protection corners
DPS-2410 Dimensions
124
111
213
78
Dimensions in millimeters (mm)
136
225
Divide by 25.4 for inches
8-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Neutrino-4
The Neutrino-4 is an optional external battery charger and additional DC power supply unit. It can recharge four
Dewetron standard batteries (model BATT-95WH) simultaneously when powered from 120/240 VAC. The Neutrino-4 has a built-in LCD display exactly like the one which is on the DEWE-321x mainframe, so it will show you
the number of batteries inside and their aggregate charge status.
Using a special power cable, the Neutrino-4 can also be unplugged from AC and plugged into the DC input of the
DEWE-321x to provide an additional power source. With a full loaded and charged Neutrino-4 plus the two batteries already within the DEWE-321x, you then have the power of six Dewetron BATT-95WH batteries. Since a
rule of thumb is that you typically get one hour of data acquisition time per battery, this means your system can
run practically an entire work day without being connected to external power.
Above left: with the door open and batteries partially or completely removed
Above right: with the door closed
Like the DEWE-321x mainframe itself, the Neutrino also supports hot-swapping of its batteries, so you can feed
in fresh batteries at regular intervals, to keep it supplying DC power indefinitely.
What’s included with the Neutrino-4, when ordered with your DEWE-321x:
„„ The Neutrino-4 mainframe
„„ AC mains input power cord
„„ DC - DC power cord, to connect the Neutrino-4 to your DEWE-321x
„„ One (1) BATT-95WH smart battery (please order additional batteries separately if you require them)
The Neutrino-4 has the CE Mark
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 8, Power Related Accessories | 8-3
DEWE-DCDC-24-300-ISO
This is an isolated DC-DC converter that will power your Dewetron battery powered instrument from a wide ranging DC input power source, and also isolate it from that source.
This option is very popular in automotive applications, due to its isolation. And of course, it runs from such a wide
range of DC input power: 10 VDC to 36 VDC, that it is very convenient for use in cars, trucks, busses, and even
aircraft.
You can order the DEWE-DCDC-24-300-ISO as an accessory for any Dewetron instrument which runs from DC
power, as long as that instrument accepts 24 VDC.
Parameter
DEWE-DCDC-24-300-ISO
Input:
Input voltage:
Max. input current:
Input connector:
10 to 36 VDC (the input is protected against wrong polarity)
36 A @ 10 VDC input voltage (15 A @ 24 VDC)
2-pin LEMO connector male, type: EGJ.3B.302
Output: Output voltages: Output power: Output
current: Output connector:
24 V 300 W 12.5 A 2-pin LEMO connector female, type: EGG.2B.302
Operating temperature: Derating above 45 °C:
-20 °C to 60 °C 8 Watt/°C
Isolation voltage:
500 VDC
Status LED:
Green LED indicates an output voltage > 21 VDC
Dimensions: (W x D x H):
~219 x 122 x 50 mm (8.6 x 4.8 x 2 in.)
Weight:
1.3 kg (2.9 lbs)
Power on sequence:
First: Connect the system and the DCDC! Followed by the DCDC and the power supply connection.
The DEWE-DCDC-24-300-ISO has the CE Mark
8-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
MSI Compatibility chart
MSI Modular Smart Interfaces for MDAQ and DAQ series modules
MSI-BR-ACC
MDAQ-SUBSTG-D
MDAQ-SUBBRIDGE-D
MDAQ-SUBV200-D
DAQP-STG
DAQPBRIDGE-A*
DAQPBRIDGE-B
DAQP-LV-D
√
√
--
√
--
--
--
Isotron (constant current powered) adapter for MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE / -STG modules with DB9 connector Excitation current 4 mA at 21 V,
High pass filter 1.5 Hz, BNC connector
Bandwidth and ranges are defined by connected amplifier
Automatic identification via TEDS
MSI-BR-V-200
√
√
--
√
--
--
--
200 V input adapter for MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE / -STG modules with DB9 connector Differential input configuration, BNC connector
Bandwidth and ranges are defined by connected amplifier
Automatic identification via TEDS
MSI-BR-RTD
√
√
--
not needed
--
--
--
Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 and Pt2000 adapter for MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE / -STG modules with DB9 connector
2, 3 and 4 wire connection methods, 5-pin Binder 710 series connector
Automatic identification via TEDS
MSI-BR-CH-50
√
√
--
√
--
--
--
Charge input interface for DAQP-STG and MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE / -STG with DB9 connector Range up to 50000 pC, AC coupled with 0.07
Hz, BNC signal connection
Max. 100 kHz bandwidth (dependent on the max. bandwidth of the amplifier)
Automatic identification via TEDS
MSI-BR-TH-X
√
√
--
√
√
√
--
Thermocouple type K / J / T adapter for DAQP-BRIDGE-x and MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE / -STG modules
For use with isolated thermocouple sensors only ! (except in combination with DAQP-STG-D or DAQP-BRIDGE-A*, which are isolated)
High accuracy cold junction reference measurement, 1 m thermo cable with Mini TC connector
Automatic identification via TEDS*
MSI-V-ACC
--
--
√
--
--
--
√
Isotron (constant current powered) adapter for DAQP-V-D and MDAQ-SUB-V200-D
Excitation current 4 mA at 21 V, High pass filter 1.5 Hz, BNC connector
Bandwidth and ranges are defined by connected amplifier
Automatic identification via TEDS
MSI-V-RTD
--
--
√
--
--
--
√
Pt100, Pt200, Pt500 and Pt1000 adapter for DAQP-V-D and MDAQ-SUB-V200-D
2, 3 and 4 wire connection methods, 5-pin Binder 710 series connector
Automatic identification via TEDS
MSI-V-CH-50
--
--
√
--
--
Charge input interface for DAQP-LV-D and MDAQ-SUB-V200-D
Range up to 50000 pC, AC coupled with 0.07 Hz, BNC signal connection
Max. 100 kHz bandwidth (dependent on the max. bandwidth of the amplifier)
Automatic identification via TEDS
* DAQP-BRIDGE-A does not have TEDS, therefore it cannot recognize MSI interfaces
--
√
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 9, Options & Interfaces | 9-1
9
Options and Interfaces
MSI series interfaces
The DEWE-321x is compatible with MSI series intelligent sensor interfaces. Exactly which MSI interfaces can
be used depends entirely on which signal conditioners are installed within your system. The table on the opposite
page cross references the compatibility of each MSI with various Dewetron DAQ and MDAQ series signal conditioners, so please refer to that table when choosing MSIs for your system.
Several MSIs are available for both bridge series modules and voltage input modules, namely the ACC, V200, and
charge adapters.
When you plug in an MSI interface to any of the analog inputs, it should show up automatically on the SETUP
screen within DEWESoft, within the AMPLIFIER column.
-- Note - if your MSI interfaces are NOT showing up on the screen as shown above, then there are two pos-
sible explanations:
1. You have not upgraded your software to DEWESoft 7.0 or higher
2. Perhaps MSIs are not activated at the hardware setup level. To remedy this, please click the SETTINGS
menu then select HARDWARE SETUP. On the analog page, ensure that the checkbox for MSIs is checked,
then click OK to save this setting.
-- Note - please make sure that any conditioners that you have are checkmarked on this screen.
If you are using DEWESoft 7 and have activated MSI interface as described above, and MSI interfaces are still
not showing up when plugged into your analog inputs, please contact us for technical support. Be sure to try more
than one MSI interface, to rule out a defective MSI interface being the cause of this problem.
9-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
MSI Compatibility
When you plug any one of them into the analog inputs, the software will detect it and show its name and serial
number on the main channel setup screen, as shown here:
⇒⇒ The only exception to automatic identification within DEWESoft is the DAQP-BRIDGE-A module, which
does not have TEDS interface. Therefore, although they will literally work, it is not convenient to use MSI
adapters with that signal conditioner. The DAQP-STG-D is a much better choice.
Adapters
ADAP series interfaces are passive adapters, available for various types of signal inputs. Unlike MSI interfaces,
they are not controlled under the software, nor do they have a TEDS interface inside. They are strictly passive
adapters. A popular one, for example, has a precision 50Ω resistor inside it, wired across the inputs, which serves
as a current shunt for 0-20 mA applications.
Following these single function adapters is a table with the most popular adapters for wider applications.
ADAP-BNC-MICRODOT
The DAQP-CHARGE-A module comes with an adapter from microdot connector to BNC, allowing
you to connect charge sensors with the small 10-32 microdot connectors to the BNC input. This
adapter is also available for purchase for the DAQP-CHARGE-A, or to be used in conjunction with the MSI-BRCH-50 and MSI-V-CH-50 charge interfaces.
ADAP-CAN-OPT-ISO
Isolation adapter for one CAN BUS interface. This small interface plugs into a standard DSUB9 CAN BUS
interface connector, and provides real isolation between the vehicle CAN bus and
the Dewetron CAN interface. This is very often needed in electrically noisy environments, and on military vehicles.
-- Being passive, ADAP series adapters do not show up on the DEWESoft setup
screen. However, you can select them manually in many cases, as we will
show below.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 9, Options & Interfaces | 9-3
Adapters for various MDAQ and DAQ series modules
DAQ-SHUNT-1
MDAQ-SUBSTG-D
MDAQ-SUBBRIDGE-D
MDAQ-SUBV200-D
MDAQ-SUBV200-BNC
DAQP-LV-B
DAQP-LVBNC
DAQP-LV-D
DAQP-STG-D
--
--
--
--
√
--
--
--
Shunt adapter for 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA measurements, internal precision 50Ω shunt resistor
100 mA input range, 1 W maximum, 1% accuracy
banana plug to Dewetron module / banana jacks on sensor side
DAQ-SHUNT-1-BNC
√
√
√
--
--
--
√
√
Shunt adapter for 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA measurements, internal precision 50Ω shunt resistor
100 mA input range, 1 W maximum, 1% accuracy
9-pin DSUB to Dewetron module / BNC jack on sensor side
DAQ-SHUNT-3
--
--
--
--
√
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
√
√
--
--
Shunt box for measurements up to 5A (0.1 Ω, ±0.1%, 3W)
Current input via 2 x 0.3 meter cables with banana plugs
Voltage output via 2 x 0.3 meter cable with banana plugs
DAQ-SHUNT-4
--
--
--
√
--
Shunt box for measurements up to 5A (0.1 Ω, ±0.1%, 3W)
Current input via 2 x safety banana jacks
Voltage output via 2 x 0.3 meter cable with banana plugs
DAQ-SHUNT-5
--
--
--
√
--
Shunt box for measurements up to 5A (0.1 Ω, ±0.1%, 3W)
Current input via 2 x safety banana jacks
Voltage output via 2 x safety banana jacks
CONN-DSUB-9
√
√
√
--
--
--
Mating connector for 9-pin DSUB connectors with convenient screw terminals inside
Eliminates soldering/desoldering
ADAP-MDAQ-BNC
√
√
√
--
--
--
Converter from 9-pin DSUB to BNC input connector, for MDAQ series modules
(pin-outs are the same as ADAP-DAQ-BNC, but there is an additional isolation resistor in this adapter to improve noise performance of
differential MDAQ series modules)
ADAP-DAQ-BNC
--
--
--
--
--
--
Converter from 9-pin DSUB to BNC input connector, for DAQ series modules
√
√
9-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Adapters for various MDAQ and DAQ series modules
ADAP-BAN-BNC
MDAQ-SUBSTG-D
MDAQ-SUBBRIDGE-D
MDAQ-SUBV200-D
MDAQ-SUBV200-BNC
DAQP-LV-B
DAQP-LVBNC
DAQP-LV-D
DAQP-STG-D
--
--
--
√
not needed
√
--
--
Adapter from banana jack to BNC.
Allows you to connect your cables with banana plugs into Dewetron modules which have BNC input connectors.
ADAP-MIC-BNCCBL
--
--
--
√
--
√
--
--
Microphone adapter and 6 ft BNC cable. Allows the use of standard unpowered mics with your Dewetron system.
Adapter: 3 Pin XLR Male to BNC Female Audio Adapter
Contacts (XLR) : 3 Genders: BNC (Female) / XLR (Male) Wired: Pin 1 & 3 = Ground / Pin 2 = Hot
Includes 6 ft BNC-BNC cable (not shown in picture here)
ADAP-BR-1/4-120
not needed
√
--
--
--
--
--
not needed
--
--
not needed
Bridge completion terminal, 1/4 bridge @ 120 Ω
DSUB9 input and output connectors
ADAP-BR-1/4-350
not needed
√
--
--
--
Bridge completion terminal, 1/4 bridge @ 350 Ω
DSUB9 input and output connectors
Using Adapters in DEWESoft
Since ADAP adapters do not have any kind of electronic interface, they do not show up in the software automatically - you have to set them up yourself. But DEWESoft makes this easy. Simply access the SETUP screen for any
channel that you have an adapter plugged into, and enter the appropriate settings and scaling information there.
In the next section we will look at setting up a few popular adapters in the most commonly requested scenarios.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 9, Options & Interfaces | 9-5
Using the DAQ-SHUNT-1 adapter
Let’s take the case of the DAQ-SHUNT-1, which is a 50Ω shunt adapter for making 4-20 mA current measurements. Let’s see how to set it up within a DAQP-LV-B module. When you first open the SETUP dialog for this
channel, by default it will be set to the VOLTAGE measurement mode, like this:
Therefore, it is necessary to change the mode from voltage to current, as shown here:
When you do this, the software changes the unit of measure from V to mA, and also presents you with the ability
to select Shunt 1, Shunt 2 (Shunt 2 applies to Shunt 3, Shunt4, and Shunt 5, which are the same electrically, but
which only have different I/O connector configurations), as well as a variety of Dewetron specialized shunts for
automotive applications:
Simply select the shunt that is appropriate. In this case, when you choose Shunt 1, DEWESoft will automatically
scale the input. And notice that the measuring ranges are now given directly in mA instead of voltage units.
9-6 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Have a look at the range selector:
Therefore you can simply select the 20 mA range, and there is no need to do any other scaling unless you need to
convert the 20 mA signal to something else.
For instance, if your 4 - 20 mA signal really represents -100 to 5000 PSI, you could enter these scaling values
quite easily on this same screen. First change the Units from mA to PSI, then below in the Scaling area, enter
these values:
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 9, Options & Interfaces | 9-7
That’s all you would have to do! Any scaling parameters which are linear can be entered in this way.
-- Note: the ranges shown above apply to the DAQP-LV module. When you use the DAQ-SHUNT-1 with other
modules, the ranges will be different according to which module is being used.
Using custom Shunt resistors
After selecting CURRENT input type you can also select CUSTOM instead of one of the preset current adapters,
at the end of the list:
When you do this, the software allows you to enter the value of the shunt resistor that you are using, as well as
the maximum wattage. The software will do the appropriate ohm’s law calculations to amperage for you automatically.
-- Note - Dewetron conditioners such as the MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE and MDAQ-SUB-STG also support the di-
rect selection of CURRENT as a measuring type. Therefore you can use them with shunts as shown above.
You simply need to adapt the input connector to handle a shunt resistor. An idea choice is the CONNDSUB-9 mating connector, which makes it easy to insert your own shunt resistor into the mating connector and plug it into the DSUB 9-pin input connector of the module.
9-8 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Using Current sensors
In this case we recommend that you leave the Measurement type to Voltage, and simply enter the appropriate engineering units and scaling factor. For example, if you were using a current clamp that could measure 250 Amps,
but which output 0.1 V/A, you would simply set up this channel like this:
After you set the Units to A, then enter the scaling factors as shown above so that 0.1 V = 1 A, simply use the
Range selector to choose the appropriate current measuring range. Keep an eye on the right side of the scaling
BAR in the bottom left corner of the screen. Notice that when you select the 25V measuring range, you will get
a full scale 250 A measuring range. This is perfect. You can select smaller ranges if you expect that the current
input will not really reach 250 A. Choose the range that best fits to your current sensor AND the desired measuring range.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 9, Options & Interfaces | 9-9
Using the ADAP-BR-1/4-120 or 350 bridge completion adapters
These adapters are only needed for Dewetron bridge conditioners which do not have internal completion for
1/4 bridge sensors. Therefore they are not needed by the DAQP-STG, DAQP-BRIDGE-A, DAQP-BRIDGE-A, or
MDAQ-SUB-STG-D, because these all support full bridge, half bridge and quarter bridge with internal completion
for many bride wiring scenarios.
However, these adapters to apply to Dewetron conditioners that lack 1/4 bridge completion, including the MDAQSUB-BRIDGE-D (full and half bridge inputs), as well as the inputs of the DEWE-43, DEWE-101, and DEWE3213 (full bridge inputs).
Select the full bridge mode of the MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE, and then plug in the completion adapter.
This is less convenient than using a more capable signal conditioner, not only because of the external adapter, but
because you cannot use the balance buttons in this mode. But it serves to adapt this less capable conditioner to
handle 1/4 bridge sensors.
9-10| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
General DAQ/PAD module specifications
Module dimensions:
20 x 65 x 105 mm (0.79 x 2.56 x 4.13 in.)
(W x H x D without front cover and connectors)
Front cover: Environmental:
Temp. range storage: Temp. range operating:
Rel. humidity (MIL202): RFI susceptibility:
20 x 87 x 2 mm (0.79 x 3.43 x 0.08 in.)
(W x H x D without connector)
-30 °C to +85 °C (-22 °F to 185 °F)
-5 °C to +60 °C (23 °F to 140 °F)
0 to 95 % at 60 °C, non-condensing
±0.5 % span error at 400 MHz, 5 W, 3 m
All specifications within this manual are valid at 25 °C.
All modules are produced according to ISO9001 and ISO14001.
DAQ Series Common Information
Calibration information
All DEWETRON modules are calibrated at 25°C after a warmup time of 30 minutes and meet their specifications
when leaving the factory. The time interval for recalibration depends on environmental conditions. Typically, the
calibration should be checked once a year.
Calibration certificates are available from DEWETRON as an option. DEWETRON offers several types:
„„ NIST traceable DEWETRON calibration certificate (USA CAL LAB only)
„„ ISO traceable DEWETRON certificate (European CAL LAB only)
„„ Calibration certificate according to ÖKD (equivalent to DKD)
RS-232/485 interface
DAQP modules can be configured via RS-485 interface, PAD modules require this interface for all data transfers The DEWE-3210 and DEWE-3211 include an internal RS-232/485 converter and interface. This converter
allows communication with all Dewetron signal conditioning modules. To communicate with the modules, the RS232 interface must be set to the following parameters:
baud rate:
data bits: parity: stop bits: handshake: 9600
8
no parity
1
not required
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-1
10
Signal Conditioners
There are several series of Dewetron signal conditioners that may be installed in your system in many possible
combinations. This section presents technical information about each of these series:
Module series
DEWE-3210 series
DEWE-3211 series
DEWE-3213 series
DAQ series Modules
Directly plug in, user exchangeable
Can be added externally
Can be added externally
PAD series Modules
Directly plug in, user exchangeable
Can be added externally
Can be added externally
MDAQ series Modules
Can be added externally
Factory installed, not user
exchangeable
Can be added externally
EPAD2 series Modules
Can be added externally
Can be added externally
Can be added externally
CPAD2 series Modules
Can be added externally
Can be added externally
Can be added externally
DEWE-43 Modules
N/A
N/A
Can be added externally (up to 4)
Above: cross reference of module types and chassis compatibility
Further technical information can be found in the Dewetron Modules Technical Reference, a separate document.
DAQ Series Modules
DAQ Module Connectors
Front Panel Connector
Accessible to the user. The connector type and pin assignment varies
from module to module. Detailed pin assignment of each module is shown
in the appropriate module description.
Rear Connector
Not user accessible. 9-pin male SUB-D, interface to the Dewetron System.
10-2| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Module
Input type
Ranges
TEDS
Bandwidth (BW)
Filters (LP / HP)
ISOLATION (ISO)
Over-voltage
Protection (OP)
High Voltage Measurement
DAQP-HV
V
High voltage
±20, ±50, ±100, ±200, ±400,
±800, ±1400 V
N/A
BW: 300 kHz
LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz
1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz
ISO: 1.8 kVrms
(line-to-line)
High voltage
±20, ±50, ±100, ±200, ±400,
±800, ±1400 V
N/A
BW: 700 kHz
ISO: 1.8 kVrms
(line-to-line)
High voltage
±10, ±40, ±100, ±200, ±400,
±1000 V
N/A
BW: 20/30 kHz
LP: 10, 100, Hz
1, 2, 20/30 kHz
ISO: 1.5 kVrms
N/A
BW: 300 kHz
LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz
1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz
ISO: up to 1 kVrms
(with banana jacks)
OP: 350 VDC
DAQP-HV-S3
V
DAQP-DMM
V
Low/Medium Voltage & Current Measurement
DAQP-LV
V
DAQP-V
V
Voltage, current
with external shunt
or current sensor
±10, ±20, ±50, ±100, ±200,
±500 mV
±1, ±2.5, ±5, ±10, ±25, ±50 V
IEPE via MSIV-ACC
±10, ±20, ±50, ±100, ±200,
±500 mV
±1, ±2.5, ±5, ±10 V
PT100, Pt200,
Pt500, Pt1000,
Pt2000 and
resistance via MSIV-RTD
-200 to 1000 C and 0 to 6.5
kOhm
Voltage, current
with external shunt
or current sensor
±10, ±100 mV
±1, ±5, ±10, ±50 V
N/A
BW: 50 kHz
LP: 10, 100 Hz
1, 10, 50 kHz
ISO: up to 1 kVrms
OP: ±500 VDC or
350 Vrms
Current
Note: 5Arms
continuous
±0.1, ±0.3, ±1, ±3 A
±10 A peak, ±30 A peak
max 5Arms continuous
current
N/A
BW: 300 kHz
LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz
1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz
ISO: 1.4 kVrms
Current
Note: intended
for 4-20 mA
applications
±2, ±6, ±20 mA
±60 mA, ±200 mA, ±0.6A
max 0.6 A
N/A
BW: 300 kHz
LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz
1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz
ISO: 1.4 kVrms
DAQP-LA-SC
DAQP-LA-B
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-3
Module
Input type
Ranges
TEDS
Bandwidth (BW)
Filters (LP / HP)
ISOLATION (ISO)
Over-voltage
Protection (OP)
Bridge / Strain Gage Measurement
DAQP-STG
DAQP-BRIDGE-A
DAQP-BRIDGE-B
DAQP-CFB
Strain gages,
bridge sensors,
voltages
Bridge:
Voltage:
Pot/Ohmic sensors
Resistance/ohms
Thermocouple via
MSR-BR-TH series
Full range of thermocouple
type
Strain gages,
bridge sensors
±1, ±2, ±5, ±10, ±20, ±50
mV/V
(@ 5 Vdc excitation)
Pot/Ohmic sensors
200 ohm to 10 kohm
Thermocouple via
MSR-BR-TH series
Full range of thermocouple
type
Strain gages,
bridge sensors
±0.1, ±0.2, ±0.5, ±1, ±2, ±5,
±10, ±20, ±50, ±100 mV/V
(@ 5 Vdc excitation)
Pot/Ohmic sensors
200 ohm to 10 kohm
Thermocouple via
MSR-BR-TH series
Full range of thermocouple
type
AC bridge, strain
gage, carrier
sensors
Bridge: 0.1 to 1000 mV/V
Inductive: 5 to 1000 mV/V
BW: 300 kHz
LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz
1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz
ISO: 350 VDC
OP: ±10 VDC
N/A
BW: 20 kHz
LP: 10, 100 Hz
1, 5, 20 kHz
ISO: 350 VDC
OP: ±50 VDC
Yes
BW: 200 kHz
LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz
1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 200 kHz
ISO: N/A
OP: ±10 VDC
N/A
BW: dc to 2.3 kHz
LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz
1 kHz
ISO: N/A
OP: ±10 VDC
Inductive/ LVDT
sensors
Voltage: 0.2 to 1000 mV/
vrms
IEPE sensors
±50, ±166, ±500 mV; ±1.66,
±5 V (Gain: 1, 3, 10, 30, 100)
Yes
BW: 0.5 Hz to 300 kHz
LP: 1, 10, 100, 300 kHz
HP: 0.5 Hz, 5 Hz
N/A
IEPE and charge
sensors
Note: selectable
integration and
double integration
Charge: 5, 50, 500, 5000,
50000 pC
IEPE: ±5, ±50, ±500 mV,
±5 V
(0, 20, 40, 60 dB)
N/A
BW: 0.1 Hz to 50 kHz
LP: 100 Hz; 1, 3, 10,
50 kHz
HP: 0.1 Hz, 1 Hz, 10 Hz
N/A
Charge sensors
Note: selectable
time constant
for static charge
sensors
±100, ±500, ±2 000, ±10
000,
±40 000, ±200 000, ±1 000
000 pC
N/A
BW: 0.5 Hz to 100 kHz
LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz;
1, 3, 10, 30, 100 kHz
HP: DC, 0.0001 Hz to
0.5 Hz
ISO: 350 VDC
Charge / IEPE Measurement
DAQP-ACC-A
DAQP-CHARGE-A
DAQP-CHARGE-B
10-4| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Module
Input type
Ranges
TEDS
Bandwidth (BW)
Filters (LP / HP)
ISOLATION (ISO)
Over-voltage
Protection (OP)
Temperature and Universal Measurement
DAQP-THERM
Thermocouple
(universal)
K, J, T, R, S, N, E, B, L, C, U
freely programmable within
the maximum range of the
selected thermocouple type,
internal linearization, internal
CJC
N/A
BW: 3 kHz
LP: 3Hz, 10 Hz, 30 Hz,
100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz
Butterworth or Bessel;
2nd, 4th, 6th, or 8th order
(programmable)
ISO: ±1000 Vrms
continuous
Thermocouple
(universal)
K, J, T, R, S, N, E, B, L, C, U
type, internal linearization,
freely programmable range,
internal CJC
RTD
Pt100, Pt200, Pt500,
Pt1000 and Pt2000 sensors,
programmable range (2-wire
and 4-wire only)
Yes
BW: 3 kHz
LP: 3Hz, 10 Hz, 30 Hz,
100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz
Butterworth or Bessel;
2nd, 4th, 6th, or 8th order
programmable
ISO: 1000 Vrms
continuous (for
input, excitation
and TEDS
interface)
Voltage
10 ranges from ±5 mV to
± 5V
Resistance
freely programmable range
from 1 Ohm to 1 MOhm
Bridge (constant
current)
4-wire full bridge sensors,
13 ranges from ±0.5 to 5000
mV/mA
Frequency to
voltage
100, 1k, 5k, 20k, 100k and
200 kHz ranges;
Trigger level range 0 to
130 V,
Additional TTL output
(isolated pulse output of input
signal)
N/A
BW: 200 kHz
Selectable input and
output filters (rangedependent)
ISO: 350 Vrms
Analog output
1:1 output module, from 0 to
±10 V; Accuracy ±0.05 %
Connector choices: banana,
BNC, or 9-pin DSUB
connector
N/A
BW: 400 Hz
ISO: CMV output to
input, continuous:
1500 VRMS max
DAQP-MULTI
V
Frequency to Voltage Measurement
DAQP-FREQ-A
Output modules
DAQN-V-OUT
OUT
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-5
Adding DAQ (or HSI) modules to your Dewtetron system:
DAQ modules can be plugged directly into the DEWE-3210, because it has 8 slots for DAQ/PAD/HSI series plugin modules. But if you don’t want to add more DAQ modules, you can simply add a DEWE-30 series chassis. The
typical DEWE-3210 has a 16-channel A/D card inside it already, and the first 8 channels are wired to the 8 x DAQ
slots on the left side of the DEWE-3210.
The other 8 channels are wired to the EXPANSION LEMO connector on the side of the DEWE-3210 near the
modules. Therefore, you may easily connect a DEWE-30-8 chassis with 8 more DAQ (or PAD or HSI) modules in
it, using the appropriate cable. It is expecially convenient to use the expansion version of the DEWE-30-8 chassis,
because then it will also be powered from the DEWE-3210 mainframe, and a single cable will connect power, the
analog outputs from the external modules, and the RS485 interface for module control. When you run the software, all 16 modules will show up on the SETUP screen just as if they were all built into the DEWE-3210!
This method also allows the DEWE-3211 to utilze DAQ series modules, since this model does not have any slots
on its chassis. DEWE-30 series chassis are available with 4, 8, 16, 32, 48, or 64 slots, while DEWE-50-PCI series
chassis are available with 16, 32, or 64 slots.
Typical DEWE-3210 hook-ups:
„„ Installing 8 modules directly into the DEWE-3210:
„„ Adding a DEWE-30-8 expansion rack, for accessing 16
total channels:
Analog/
Power/
RS485
„„ Adding a DEWE-30-8 expansion rack, plus another 16
slot DEWE-30-16 rack, for a total of 32 DAQ modules:
Analog/
RS485
Analog/
Power/
RS485
The DEWE-30-16 requires that an
additional 16-ch A/D card be added
into the DEWE-3210 mainframe!
10-6| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Addressing DAQ modules
Each DAQ module must have a unique address (just like HSI, PAD, and other modules). The address is stored inside the DAQ
module in non-volatile memory. Therefore, if you remove a DAQ module from one system, where it was set to address 31, and
plug it into a different Dewetron chassis, it will still report itself on the bus at address 31.
This can cause a conflict if you already have a module at this address. In addition, it will be confusing to you when you hook up
your signals to what you believe is DAQ module at address 16, but the channels show up on address 31. Therefore, it is vitally
important that you set the addresses of any DAQ, PAD, or HSI modules that you plug into your Dewetron system.
-- There is no need to set the addresses of MDAQ modules, except when initially installed at the factory.
There are essentially two ways to address your modules:
„„ FILL RACK PROCEDURE - this addresses all of your modules in sequence. This is what you should do if you have been
changing more than one module around, to ensure that every module is at the appropriate and unique address.
„„ FILL ONE MODULE PROCEDURE - easier and faster, when you simply want to exchange one module.
Let’s look at how to do each one of the above procedures:
Fill Rack (all Modules) Procedure
Within DEWESoft, go to the ACQUISITION MODE and select the SETUP screen, where you can see your list of modules. Now
click on the top of the AMPLIFIER COLUMN and you will see this menu:
Select the FILL RACK option, and the software will prompt you like this:
Follow the instruction to press the TOP black button on the module in the first slot, which is always SLOT 0 in the case of doing
a FILL RACK, since you are starting at 0 and going all the way up, filling all modules.
When you press this button on the module, the system will beep and prompt you to press the next module’s button, and so on.
Continue all the way through until you have done the last module, then press CANCEL to complete and save your changes.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-7
If you get to the position where there is an empty module slot, or a non-programmable module from the old days in that slot,
press the SKIP button to move past it to the next module. You can do this as many times as needed.
When you’re done, the rack should be filled with all of the modules that are physically installed within this system, like this:
FILL (or CLEAR) One Module Procedure
FILL RACK is a great way to ensure that your modules are all addressed correctly, and we highly recommend it if you make
several module exchanges at once. But there are times when you simply want to exchange one module with a different one, or
perhaps to just remove a module. This is also quite easy once you know how.
Within DEWESoft, go to the ACQUISITION MODE and select the SETUP screen, where you can see your list of modules. This
time, instead of clicking on the top of the AMPLIFIER COLUMN, double-click the amplifier column for the one module that you
want to add, delete, or exchange. When you do this, the software will give you a similar choice as before:
And your choices are:
„„ If you have plugged a new module into this slot, choose FILL, then follow the prompts.
„„ If you change you mind and want to do a FILL RACK anyway, starting at slot 0, choose FILL FROM #0, then follow the
prompts.
„„ If there is a module in this slot that you have removed, but it continues to show up in RED (because the software cannot
really find it), choose CLEAR to remove it from the list.
„„ If you have clicked this by accident and want to cancel without making any changes, choose CANCEL
10-8| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Module Installation Trouble-shooting
There may be times when you have trouble addressing your modules, for a variety of reasons. Here are some good tips for solving these issues:
Problem: some or all modules are showing up in RED letters.
Analysis: a module shown in RED letters on the setup screen tells you that the software cannot find this module. Or, it can mean
that there is a conflict with another module, like when you plug two modules with the same address into the system at the same
time and don’t do a FILL RACK or FILL (or CLEAR) one of them. A very rare condition might be that a module is defective
and cannot communicate properly.
Solution: the trusty FILL RACK is always a great and easy way to solve nearly all these issues.
If the FILL RACK does not solve them, remove any modules shown in RED and add them back in one at a time, using the FILL
ONE MODULE procedure. Fill one module at a time until the offending modules’ addresses have been resolved.
Problem: you plug in a new module into a previously unused slot, but it does not show up.
Analysis: more than likely it was already set to an address that you were using, and it has either taken another module’s address,
or is conflicting with it.
Solution: the trusty FILL RACK is always a great and easy way to solve nearly all these issues.
If the FILL RACK does not solve them, remove any modules shown in RED and add them back in one at a time, using the FILL
ONE MODULE procedure. Fill one module at a time until the offending modules’ addresses have been resolved.
Problem: you want to use a very old PAD module which does not have the upper black button on it, so you don’t know how to
address it
Analysis: These modules have been out of production for a long time, but there are still some around, and they are still perfectly
good modules.
Solution: Start with the old PAD module in the slot, but NOT PRESSED IN!! Make sure the connector on the inside is not
mated or making contact in any way. Now double click on the amplifier slot where you want to install this module. Select FILL
when prompted. Then when the next prompt appears to press the black button or push in the module... PUSH IN THE MODULE.
The green LED on its front panel should light up, and it should show up on the list on your SETUP screen.
Problem: some modules show up with the SERIAL NUMBERS in the amplifier column, and some do not.
Analysis: There is nothing wrong here. With each Dewetron module there is a certain revision before which the serial number
was not available for external query, so these modules will not show this information on the setup screen.
Solution: N/A
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-9
10-10 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DAQP-HV (and -S3) Isolated High Voltage module (300/700 kHz)
Input ranges: Bandwidth: Isolation:
Signal connection:
7 ranges (±20 V to ±1400 V)
300 kHz (version DAQP-HV-S3: 700 kHz)
1.8 kVRMS line to line 1.4 kVRMS line to ground
Banana sockets (S3 = Screw terminals)
V
DAQP-HV Specifications
Parameter
DAQP-HV
Input ranges unipolar and bipolar:
20 V, 50 V, 100 V, 200 V, 400 V, 800 V, 1400 V
DC accuracy:
20 V and 50 V
100 V to 1400 V
±0.05 % of reading ±40mV
±0.05 % of reading ±0.05 % of range
Gain linearity:
0.03%
Gain drift range:
Typically 20 ppm/°K (max. 50 ppm/°K)
Offset drift:
20 V to 100 V
200 V to 1400 V
typical 0.5mV/°K
typical 5ppm/°K
max. 4mV/°K
max. 20 ppm of Range/°K
Long term stability:
100 ppm/sqrt (1000 hrs)
Input resistance:
10 MΩ
-3dB Bandwidth:
300 kHz
Filter selection:
Push button or software
Filter (lowpass):
10, 30, 100, 300, 1k, 3k, 10k, 30k, 100k, 300 kHz
Filter type:
Bessel or Butterworth 40 dB/decade
Typical SFDR and SNR:
300 kHz
SFDR
SNR
98 76 dB
98
84 dB
98
86 dB
50 V:
200 V:
1400 V:
Typical CMRR:
>80 dB @ 50 Hz
70 dB @ 400 Hz
60 dB @ 1 kHz
48 dB @ 10 kHz
Isolation voltage
Line to Ground 1.4kVrms
Line to Line 1.8kVrms
Protection:
CAT III 600
CAT IV 300
±4000V
±4000V
Surge (1.2/50)
Burst(5kHz)
Output voltage:
±5 V
Output resistance:
<10 Ohm
Output current:
5 mA
Output protection:
Short to ground for 10 sec.
Power supply:
±9 VDC ± 1%
100 kHz
SFDR
SNR
101
81 dB
101
89 dB
102
91 dB
1)
10 kHz
SFDR
108
108
107
SNR
90 dB
91 dB
92 dB
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-11
Parameter
DAQP-HV
Power consumption:
0.7 W
Power On default settings:
Software programable
RS485 interface for module control:
Yes
TEDS support:
N/A
MSI support:
N/A
1) The 300 kHz filter setting applies only to the Bessell filter type
Signal hook-up
DAQP-HV: The insulated banana jacks are the signal connection point. Use only mating cables which have molded
insulated/safety type plugs. These plugs should be the kind which prevent you from coming into contact with high
voltages or currents.
DAQP-HV-S3: The insulated screw terminal panels are the signal connection point. Always make your connections
before applying voltage to them.
⇒⇒ Use only insulated cables and the appropriate mating plugs or connectors when using this module!
⇒⇒ Never handle cables when high voltage is applied! Connect your signal points before applying high volt-
age!
⇒⇒ Failure to observe safety protocols can result in equipment damage, and personal injury or even death!
⇒⇒ Always check that positive and negative lines are connected with the correct polarity on the DAQP-HV
and DAQP-HV-S3 module, and at the signal source side.
⇒⇒ Use of red (+) and black (-) color coded cables is highly recommended.
⇒⇒ High voltages can be lethal! Observe all safety protocols at all times.
10-12 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DAQP-DMM Isolated High Voltage Module (20/30 kHz)
Voltage input: Bandwidth: Isolation:
Signal input:
6 ranges (±10 V to ±1000 V)
30 kHz maximum
1500 VRMS
Insulated banana jacks
V
DAQP-DMM Specifications
Parameter
DAQP-DMM
Input ranges:
±10, ±40, ±100, ±200, ±400, ±1000 V
Range selection:
Pushbutton or software command
DC accuracy:
0.1 % of reading ±0.1 % of range
Gain linearity:
Better than ±0.03 %
Gain drift range:
Typ. 20 ppm/°K, max. 40 ppm/°K
Input resistance:
10 MOhm (±0.1 %)
Bandwidth (-3 dB ±1.5 dB @ f0)
10 V to 40 V range
100 V to 200 V range
400 V to 1000 V range
Typical 20 kHz
Typical 25 kHz
30 kHz
Filter selection:
Pushbutton or software command
Filter:
10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)
Filter characteristics
@ 0.01, 0.1, 1, 3 kHz
@ 30 kHz
Butterworth 40 dB / decade (12 dB / octave)
100 dB / decade (30 dB / octave)
Typ. SNR @ max. bandwidth
10 V range
100 V range
1000 V range
60 dB
76 dB
81 dB
Typical CMRR:
73 dB @ 0 Hz
70 dB @ 50 Hz
57 dB @ 400 Hz
Isolation voltage:
1.5 kVRMS
Output voltage:
±5 V
Output resistance:
<10 Ohm
Output current:
5 mA max.
Output protection:
Continuous short to ground
Power supply voltage:
±9 VDC ± 1%
Power consumption:
0.65 W typical
RS-485 interface for module control:
Yes
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-13
Parameter
DAQP-DMM
TEDS support:
N/A
MSI support:
N/A
Signal hook-up
DAQP-DMM: The insulated banana jacks are the signal connection point. Use only mating cables which have
molded insulated/safety type plugs. These plugs should be the kind which prevent you from coming into contact
with high voltages or currents.
⇒⇒ Use only insulated cables and the appropriate mating plugs or connectors when using this module!
⇒⇒ Never handle cables when high voltage is applied! Connect your signal points before applying high volt-
age!
⇒⇒ Failure to observe safety protocols can result in equipment damage, and personal injury or even death!
⇒⇒ Always check that positive and negative lines are connected with the correct polarity on the DAQP-DMM
module, and at the signal source side.
⇒⇒ Use of red (+) and black (-) color coded cables is highly recommended.
⇒⇒ High voltages can be lethal! Observe all safety protocols at all times.
10-14 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DAQP-LV Isolated Low Voltage Module (300 kHz)
Voltage input: 12 ranges (10 mV to 50 V)
Current input:
±20 mA using DAQ-SHUNT-1 (option)
±5 A using DAQ-SHUNT-4 or DAQ-SHUNT-5
Bandwidth: 300 kHz
Isolation:
350 VDC (1 kVRMS with banana connector)
Additional signal input types using MSI interfaces:
IEPE Constant current powered sensors (accels,mics);
12 ranges (10 mV to 5 V); requires MSI-V-ACC
RTD
Resistance Temperature Detector (Pt100 to Pt2000)
9 resistance ranges (8 to 4000 Ω); requires MSI-V-RTD
CHARGE
Charge up to 50000 pC requires MSI-V-CHA-50
V
DAQP-LV Specifications
Parameter
DAQP-LV
Input ranges unipolar and bipolar:
10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV, 100 mV, 200 mV, 500 mV, 1 V, 2.5 V, 5 V, 10 V, 25 V, 50 V
Push button selectable ranges:
10 mV, 50 mV, 200 mV, 1 V, 5 V, 10 V, 50 V
DC accuracy:
Bipolar:
Unipolar:
Range
10 mV to 50 mV
100 mV to 50 V
10 mV to 50 mV
100 mV to 50 V
Accuracy
±0.02 % of reading ±40 μV
±0.02 % of reading ±0.05 % of range
±0.04 % of reading ±40 μV
±0.04 % of reading ±0.05 % of range
Input coupling:
DC or AC software selectable (1.5 Hz standard, cust.on request down to 0.01 Hz)
Gain linearity:
0.01 % of full scale
Gain drift range:
Typically 10 ppm/°K (max. 20 ppm/°K)
Offset drift:
10 mV to 200 mV:
500 mV to 50 V:
Uni- and bipolar
3 μV/°K
10 ppm of Range/°K
Long term stability:
100 ppm/sqrt (1000 hrs)
Input resistance:
1 MOhm
-3dB Bandwidth:
300 kHz
Filter selection:
Push button or software
Filter:
10, 30, 100, 300, 1k, 3k, 10k, 30k, 100k, 300 kHz 1)
Filter type:
Bessel or Butterworth 40 dB/decade
Typical SFDR and SNR:
300kHz bandwidth
SFDR
SNR
100 dB
72 dB
102 dB
82 dB
102 dB
82 dB
100 kHz bandwidth
SFDR
SNR
98 dB
76 dB
99 dB
93 dB
99 dB
93 dB
Typical CMRR:
10 mV to 1 V range:
>100 dB @ 50 Hz
>100 dB @ 1 kHz
83 dB @ 10 kHz
2.5 V to 50 V range:
90 dB @ 50 Hz
65 dB @ 1 kHz
55 dB @ 10 kHz
Input overvoltage protection:
350 VDC
Isolation voltage:
350 VDC (1 kVRMS with banana connector)
Sensor supply:
±9 V (±1 %), 12 V (±5 %), 200mA resettable fuse protected 2)
Output voltage:
±5 V
Output resistance:
<10 Ohm
20 mV
1V
50 V
10 kHz bandwidth
SFDR
SNR
97 dB
84 dB
97 dB
96 dB
97 dB
96 dB
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-15
maximum Output current:
5 mA
Output protection:
Short to ground for 10 sec.
Power On default settings
Software programable
Power supply:
±9 VDC ± 1%
Power consumption:
0.8 W without sensor supply
RS-485 interface for module control:
Yes
TEDS support:
Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS2406, DS2430A, DS2432, DS2433, DS24313)
MSI support:
MSI-V-ACC; MSI-V-RTD; MSI-V-CHA-50
(1) 300 kHz exclusively for Bessel filter characteristic (2) Overall current should not exceed Dewetron mainframe’s maximum power.
(3) TEDS is only available on the -D and -L versions
DAQP-LV Signal Hook-up
DAQP-LV-D pin-outs
Standard 9-pin DSUB connector
DAQP-V-B model with banana jacks
Hot: IN+
Shield: IN-
DAQP-V-BNC model with BNC connector
Hot: IN+
Shield: IN-
DAQP-V-D model with DSUB connector
Description
1
TEDS
2
IN +
3
Reserved for custom sensor supplies
4
GND (not isolated)
5
+9 V (200 mA max.)
6
+12 V (200 mA max.)
7
IN -
8
Reserved for custom sensor supplies
9
-9 V (200 mA max.)
DAQP-LV-L pin-outs
LEMO EGG.1B.307
See table >
DAQP-V-L model with LEMO connector
Pin
Pin
Description
1
IN +
2
IN -
3
+9 V (200 mA max.)
4
-9 V (200 mA max.)
5
GND
6
+12 V (200 mA max.)
7
TEDS
⇒⇒ IMPORTANT: Always observe all safety protocols when handling live voltages!
⇒⇒ Use pins 4, 5 and 9 only as NON-ISOLATED sensor supply voltages
⇒⇒ If signals above 60 V may appear, don’t use the metal housing of SUBD connector
10-16 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DAQP-LV: Typical sensor connections
Sensor with differential output, module powered
Current measurement using external shunt
Current loop-powered measurement with
external shunt
Sensor with common ground
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-17
DAQP-LV: Shunt Options
There are several current shunts that are available for this module, which can handle currents up to 5A. For
higher currents, please use a rated CLAMP or FLEX COIL or other current transformer which has a voltage
output.
Model
Input Range
Accuracy
Description
100 mA
0.1%
50 Ω shunt adapter (1 W)
Compatible with all Dewetron voltage modules
and break-out boxes with banana jacks
100 mA
0.1%
50 Ω shunt adapter (1 W)
(This is the resistor from the DAQ-SHUNT-1
option above - for user mounting/integration)
5A
±0.1% < 10 ppm
100 mΩ Shunt box
Current input via 2x safety banana jacks
Voltage output via 2x 0.3 meter cable with
banana plugs
5A
±0.1% < 10 ppm
100 mΩ Shunt box
Current input via 2x safety banana jacks
Voltage output via 2x safety banana jacks
DAQ-SHUNT-1
DAQ-SHUNT-1R
DAQ-SHUNT-4
DAQ-SHUNT-5
10-18 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DAQP-V Isolated Low Voltage Module (50 kHz)
Input ranges: Bandwidth: Isolation: Signal connectors:
6 ranges from ±10 mV to ±50 V
50 kHz
350 VDC (1 kVRMS with banana connector)
-B:
Safety banana sockets
-BNC: BNC connector
-D:
9-pin SUB-D connector
-L:
8-pin LEMO connector (option)
V
DAQP-V Specifications
Parameter
DAQP-V
Input ranges:
±10, ±100 mV, ±1, ±5, ±10, ±50 V
Range Selection:
Push button or software
DC accuracy:
10 mV range
100 mV range
1 V to 50 V ranges
0.05 % of reading ±40 μV
0.05 % of reading ±100 μV
0.05 % of reading ±0.05 % of range
Input coupling:
DC fixed
Gain linearity:
Better than ±0.03%
Gain drift range:
Typically 20 ppm/°K (max. 40 ppm/°K)
Input resistance:
1 MOhm (±0.1 %)
Bandwidth (-3 dB):
50 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)
Filters (low-pass):
10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)
Filter selection:
Pushbutton or software command
Filter characteristics:
@ 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10 kHz
@ 50 kHz
Typ. SNR @ max. bandwidth
10 mV range
10 V range
50 V range
Butterworth
40 dB / decade (12 dB / octave)
100 dB / decade (30 dB / octave)
61 dB
78 dB
78 dB
Typical CMRR:
90 dB @ 0 Hz
78 dB @ 50 Hz
60 dB @ 400 Hz
Isolation voltage:
350 VDC (1 kVRMS with banana connector)
Sensor supply:
±9 V (±1 %), 12 V (±5 %)
Output voltage:
±5 V
Output resistance:
<10 Ohm
maximum Output current:
5 mA
Output protection:
Continuous short to ground
Power supply:
±9 VDC ± 1%
Power consumption:
0.85 W typical without sensor supply
RS-485 interface:
Yes
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-19
Parameter
DAQP-V
TEDS:
N/A
Supported TEDS chips:
N/A
Supported MSI
N/A
DAQP-V Signal Hook-up
DAQP-V-D pin-outs
Standard 9-pin DSUB connector
DAQP-V-B model with banana jacks
Hot: IN+
DAQP-V-BNC model with BNC connector
Shield: IN-
Description
1
Not connected
2
IN +
3
Not connected
4
GND (not isolated)
5
reserved for +9 V sensor supply
6
+12 V sensor supply (200 mA max.)
7
IN -
8
Not connected
9
reserved for -9 V sensor supply
DAQP-V-L pin-outs
LEMO EGG.1B.307
DAQP-V-D model with DSUB connector
DAQP-V-L model with LEMO connector
Pin
Pin
Description
1
IN +
2
IN -
3
+9 V sensor supply
4
-9 V sensor supply
5
GND
6
+12 V sensor supply
7
not connected
⇒⇒ IMPORTANT: Always observe all safety protocols when handling live voltages!
⇒⇒ Use pins 4, 5 and 9 only as NON-ISOLATED sensor supply voltages
⇒⇒ If signals above 60 V may appear, don’t use the metal housing of SUBD connector
-- For sensor hook-up guidance and shunt resistor information, please refer to the DAQP-LV module
(except that TEDS is not available on the DAQP-V module)
10-20 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DAQP-LA and LA-SC Isolated Current Module
Input ranges:
Bandwidth: Isolation: Signal connection:
DAQP-LA-SC: 0.1 A, 0.3 A, 1 A, 3 A, 10 A peak, 30 A peak
DAQP-LA-B-S1: 2 mA, 6 mA, 20 mA, 60 mA, 200 mA, 0.6 A
300 kHz
1.4 kVRMS Input to ground
-SC: screw terminals
-B-S1: insultated banana jacks
DAQP-LA Specifications
Parameter
DAQP-LA-SC
DAQP-LA-B-S1
Input resistance (Shunt):
0.1 Ω
5Ω
Shunt inductance:
<10 nH
<10 nH
Input ranges:
0.1 A, 0.3 A, 1 A, 3 A, 10 A peak, 30 A peak
2 mA, 6 mA, 20 mA, 60 mA, 200 mA, 0.6 A
Continuous current:
max. 5 Arms
max. 0.6 A
Peak current:
30 A max. 10 ms; 10 A max. 100 ms
DC accuracy:
100 mA and 300 mA
1 A to 30 A
±0.05 % of reading ±200 μA ±0.05 % of reading
±0.05 % of range
2 mA and 6 mA
20 mA and 600 mA
Offset drift
100 mA and 300 mA
1 A to 30 A
±0.05 % of reading ±4 μA ±0.05 % of reading
±0.05 % of range
typ. max.
12
20
20
40
μA/°K
ppm of Range/°K
typ .
0.24
20
2 mA and 6 mA
20 mA to 600 mA
Gain linearity:
0.03 %
Gain drift range:
Typically 20 ppm/°K (max. 50 ppm/°K)
Long term stability:
100 ppm/sqrt (1000 hrs)
-3dB Bandwidth:
300 kHz
Filter selection:
Push button or software
Filter:
10, 30, 100, 300, 1k, 3k, 10k, 30k, 100k, 300 kHz 1)
Filter type:
Bessel or Butterworth 40 dB/decade
Typical SFDR and SNR:
300kHz bandwidth
SFDR
SNR
95 dB
64 dB
102 dB
82 dB
104 dB
89 dB
100 mA
1A
30 A
100 kHz bandwidth
SFDR
SNR
95 dB
67dB
103 dB
85 dB
103 dB
89 dB
Protection:
CAT III 150 V
CAT IV 100 V
Isolation voltage:
Input to Ground 1.4 kVRMS
Output voltage:
±5 V
Output resistance:
<10 Ohm
Output current:
5 mA
max.
0.4
40
10 kHz bandwidth
SFDR
SNR
95 dB
77 dB
113 dB
90 dB
117 dB
91 dB
μA/°K
ppm of Range/°K
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-21
Output protection:
Short to ground for 10 sec.
Power On default settings
Software programable
Power supply:
±9 VDC ± 1%
Power consumption:
0.7 W
RS-485 interface:
Yes
TEDS:
N/A
Supported TEDS chips:
N/A
Supported MSI
N/A
(1) 300 kHz exclusively for Bessel filter
DAQP-LA Signal Hook-up
DAQP-LA-B-xx model with banana jacks
DAQP-LA-SC model with screw terminal connectors
Hot: IN+
Shield: IN-
⇒⇒ IMPORTANT: Always observe all safety
protocols when handling live voltages!
10-22 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DAQP-STG Isolated Universal Input Module
Strain gauge, bridge sensors:
±0.1 to ±1000 mV/V (@ 5 VDC excitation)
Piezoresistive bridge: ±0.5 to ±10000 mV/mA (@ 1 mA excitation)
Voltage input: ±500 μV to ±10 V
RTD:
Resistance Temperature Detector (Pt100 to Pt2000)
9 resistance ranges (8 to 4000 Ω)
Resistance: 25 mΩ to 100 kΩ
Isolation: 350 VDC
Signal input connection:
9-pin SUB-D connector (standard) or LEMO (optional)
Additional signal input using MSI interfaces:
IEPE Constant current powered sensors (accelerometers, mics);
12 ranges (±2.5 mV to 10 V); requires MSI-V-ACC
THERMOCOUPLE
Popular T/C types; requires MSI-BR-TH-J, -K, or -T
CHARGE
Charge sensors up to 50000 pC requires MSI-V-CH-50
VOLTAGE
up to ±200 V requires MSI-BR-V-200
V
DAQP-STG specifications
Parameter
DAQP-STG
Gain:
0.5 to 10 000
Voltage Input ranges: Sensitivity @ 5 VDC
excitation:
±0.5 , ±1, ±2.5, ±5, ±10, ±25, ±50, ±100, ±250, ±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2V, ±5 V,±10 V ±0.1 , ±0.2, ±0.5, ±1,
±2, ±5, ±10, ±20, ±50, ±100, ±200, ±400, ±1000 mV/V
Resistance:
25 mOhm to 100 kOhm
Input impedance:
>100 MOhm (power off: 50 kOhm)
Input noise:
3.5 nV * √Hz
Voltage Input Accuracy:
Excitation voltage:
Excitation current:
Gain drift
Offset drift
Linearity
Accuracy
Drift
Current limit
Protection
Accuracy
Drift
Compliance voltage
Output impedance
±0.05 % of reading ± 0.02 % of range ±10 μV
typical 10 ppm/°K max. 20 ppm/°K
typical 0.3 μV/°K + 10 ppm of range, max 2 μV/°K + 20 ppm of range
typical 0.02 %
0, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5,10 and 12 VDC software programmable (16 Bit DAC)
±0.03 % ±1 mV
±10 ppm/K ±50 μV/K
100 mA
Continuous short to ground
0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 and 20mA software programmable (16 Bit DAC)
0.05% ±2μA
15ppm/°K
12V
>1 MOhm
Supported Sensors:
4- or 6-wire full bridge 3- or 5-wire 1⁄2 bridge with internal completion (software programmable)
3- or 4-wire 1⁄4 bridge with internal resistor for 120 and 350 Ohm (software programmable)1) 4-wire
full bridge with constant current excitation (piezoresistive bridge sensors) Potentiometric Resistance
Resistance Temperature Detection: PT100 PT200 PT500 PT1000
Bridge resistance:
80 Ohm to 10 kOhm @ ≤ 5 VDC excitation
Shunt calibration:
Two internal shunt resistors 59.88 kOhm and 175 kOhm
Shunt and completion resistor accuracy:
0.05% ±15ppm/°K
Automatic bridge balance:
Input range 500μV to 1V:
2.5V to 5V:
Bandwidth (-3dB):
300 kHz
Filters (low pass):
10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)
±200 % of Range
±40% of Range
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-23
V
Parameter
DAQP-STG
Filter characteristics:
10Hz to 100Hz:
300kHz:
Typical SNR @ 100 kHz [1 kHz]
and 5 VDC excitation:
66 dB [84 dB] @ 1 mV/V
82 dB [100 dB] @ 50 mV/V
Typical CMRR @ 0.1 mV/V [1 mV/V]
and 5 VDC excitation:
160 dB [160 dB] @ DC
115 dB [110 dB] @ 400 Hz
110 dB [105 dB] @ 1 kHz
Isolation
±350 VDC continuous (for input, excitation and TEDS interface)
Common mode Voltage
±350 VDC input to housing
Over voltage protection:
±50 VDC input (+) to input (-)
Output voltage:
±5 V
Output resistance:
< 1 Ohm
Output current:
Max. 5 mA; short to ground protected for 10 seconds
RS-485 interface:
Yes
TEDS support:
Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS2406, DS2430A, DS2431, DS2432, DS2433
MSI support:
MSI-BR-TH-x, MSI-BR-ACC, MSI-BR-V-200 ,MSI-BR-CH-50
Power supply voltage:
±9 VDC (±1 %)
Power consumption:
Typ. 1.7 W @ 350 Ohm, 2.15 W @ 120 Ohm (both full bridge @ 5 VDC excitation)
Absolute max.: 3 W (maximum excitation @ maximum current)
Butterworth or Bessel 40 dB/dec ( 2nd order)
Bessel 60 dB/dec (3rd order)
Module Pin-outs
⇒⇒ CAUTION: The sensor shield can be connected to either pin 4 (SUB-D version only) or the housing of the
9-pin SUB-D / 8-pin LEMO connector, depending on your application.
10-24 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DAQP-STG-D Cables and Shielding
To reduce the influence of electromagnetic disturbances, shielded twisted pair cables are recommended. Connect the shield to
the isolated GND (Pin4) to get the best result.
The twisted pairs for full bridge, half bridge, voltage and resistance mode are:
Twisted pair 1
EXC+
PIN1
EXC-
PIN8
Twisted pair 2
Sense+
PIN6
Sense-
PIN3
Twisted pair 3
IN+
PIN2
IN-
PIN7
Twisted pair 4
R+
PIN5
GND(isolated)
PIN4
If TEDS is used also the shield could be used as GNDisolated
For quarter bridge mode:
Twisted pair 1
IN+
PIN2
Sense1
PIN3
Twisted pair 2
R+
PIN5
EXC-
PIN8
DAQP-STG Operation Notes
Free variable gain and excitation
The gain, excitation and offset values of this module are free programmable. So it is possible to normalize any physical sensor
input signal to the ±5V output of the module. By using these settings as power on default, standalone solutions could be easily
realized.
Gain: from 0.5 to 10000. The module input ranges are based on predefined gain values. The module automatically chose the
best gain combination of the internal amplifiers to keep the overall noise and drift as low as possible.
Output offset: Could be programmed from the positive to the negative full scale range except on the input ranges above 1V.
Due to internal structure here the offset could be set from +20 % to – 20 %.
Excitation Voltage: The excitation voltage is programmable from 0 to 12 V in 185 μV steps. Setting the excitation to 0 V for
example allows you to determine the noise of the sensor cabling. The sense terminals have to be connected to the excitation
terminals all the time. Even if the remote sensing is not required.
Excitation current: The current could be programmed from 0.1 mA to 20 mA in 0.3 μA steps. The maximum compliance voltage is 12 V. The compliance voltage is automatically balanced around the internal GND. This minimizes the common mode error.
Power On Default function
You can store the latest settings of the module in the internal EE-Prom memory. Once the module restarts, it comes up automatically with these setting. This is important for stand alone applications and for fail-safe reasons.
Filter
The Module has nine selectable low-pass filters from 10 Hz to 100 kHz. The filter characteristic can be set to Butterworth
2nd order or Bessel 2nd order. An additional fixed filter inside this module is a 3rd order Bessel filter with a guaranteed -3 dB
bandwidth of 300 kHz.
DAQP-STG Amplifier balance
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-25
The amplifier balance allows eliminating automatically all internal amplifier offsets. It switches the differential amplifier inputs
IN+ and IN- to the internal isolated GND reference point. Then the output offset of the module is automatically adjusted to zero
for all ranges. This function takes up to 8 seconds. Automatically previous stored sensor offset values are cleared.
Sensor Balance
Typically every strain gage sensor has a certain offset. That comes from manufacturing tolerances or because of sensor mounting. By performing a bridge balance this sensor offset could be completely removed on the analog side up to 200 % of the actual
range. This allows using the full dynamic of the AD-board instead of losing resolution because of digital offset shifting. Output
offset and sensor balance may not exceed 200 % of range (20 % for ranges above 1 V).
Internal Completion Resistors
The DAQP-STG has an internal half bridge completion and two internal quarter bridge completions for 120 Ohm and 350 Ohm
strain gages. The used high precision resistors with low temperature drift allow a long- time stable measurement of almost every
strain gage type without using an external completion network.
Internal Shunt
With two internal shunt resistors (59.88 kOhm and 175 kOhm) and one spare socket for a customised shunt, the DAQP-STG
has wide flexibility in case of shunt calibration. A jumper network gives the possibility to connect the internal shunts to either
Sense+ Sense – IN+ or IN- to be compatible to existing sensor types and correction calculation methods. This technology is
used to correct the complete measurement chain gain error from the sensor input to the digital signal output. It is based on the
known ratio between the shunt resistor and the strain gage resistance.
Short
It switches the differential amplifier inputs IN+ and IN- from the input terminals to the internal isolated GND reference point.
With this function the absolute sensor offset could be determined.
CAL
It applies a high precision internal reference signal with 80% of the full scale value to the module. For ranges above 1V the
reference signal level is 20 % of range.
Self Test
The self test function is a software controlled procedure that checks in the first step the amplifier itself. In the second step a
basic sensor check will be performed. This test is only available in DeweSoft if an AD-Card is installed.
Part 1: Amplifier Test
The amplifier offset is checked by using the Short function The 80% Cal signal is applied to the amplifier. The complete isolation
amplifier including the AD-Card is checked by using this test signal. The self test circuit switches the amplifier input to the positive excitation voltage, so also the input amplifier is checked. Warning: if there is a short circuit on the excitation this test will
fail.
Part 2: Basic Sensor Test
Bridge Sensor: It is checked if the supply current doesn’t exceed the maximum value, and if the excitation voltage is within the
predefined value.
10-26 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Full bridge signal connection
6-wire and 4-wire sensor connection
Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.
Sense lines MUST be connected to the excitation also when 4-wire connection is used.
6-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor
4-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector
Half bridge signal connection
5-wire and 3-wire sensor connection, and potentiometric sensors
5-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor
3-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector
Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.
Sense lines MUST be connected to the excitation also when 4-wire connection is used. A potentiometer can be seen similar to
a half bridge sensor with ±500 mV/V sensitivity. Therefore potentiometric sensors can be measured with bridge amplifiers. The
advantages of using the DAQP-STG for potentiometric measurements is by adjusting the offset and range, you can focus on a
certain potentiometer position with higher resolution. The scaling is ±500 mV/V equals ±50 % of potentiometer position.
1) ‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-27
Quarter bridge signal connection
3-wire sensor connection
(Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor)
⇒⇒ Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6 must be connected!
-- The 3-wire quarter bridge is only able to compensate symmetrical wire resistance
4-wire sensor connection
(Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor)
In the quarter bridge 4-wire mode the DAQP-STG internally adjusts its excitation so that on the gage the resistor
terminates exactly on the half of the excitation voltage. All wire resistances are compensated.
Resistance, RTD 2-wire and 4-wire
For resistance and RTD mode, 4-wire connection is recommended (2-wire connection will not compensate wire resistance).
10-28 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Other measurement modes and hook-ups
Voltage and microvolt measurement signal connection
⇒⇒ CAUTION: If the excitation is not used for sensor supply it has to be deactivated by setting it to 0 V. This
will internally connect the IN- to the GNDisolated to improve the common mode rejection.
Sensor with supply, and voltage output
In the quarter bridge 4-wire mode the DAQP-STG internally adjusts its excitation so that on the gage the resistor
terminates exactly on the half of the excitation voltage. All wire resistances are compensated.
Why More Wires are Better...
Sensitivity: For sensor wiring typically copper cables are used. For example a 120 Ω full bridge connected with
four 0.14 mm2 cables will have an sensitivity error of 2.1 % due to the 1.27 Ω wire resistance. But with 6-wire
technology this can be completely compensated!
Temperature drift:
Intial error
Drift after 10°C warm up
Offset
Sensitivity
Offset
Sensitivity
2-wire
25183 μm/m
-4.97 %
956 μm/m
-0.18 %
3-wire
0 μm/m
-2.6 %
0 μm/m
-0.01 %
4-wire
0 μm/m
0.0 %
0 μm/m
0.00 %
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-29
10-30 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DAQP-BRIDGE-A Isolated Strain Gage Module
Protection: Input sensitivity: Ranges and filter: Bridge offset:
Bridge completion: Shunt calibration: Custom range: Signal connection:
Fully isolated (input and excitation)
0.5 mV/V to 1000 mV/V
Button or software selection
Automatic bridge offset adjustment (approx. ±200 % of range)
Internal completion for 1⁄2 and 1⁄4 bridge (120 and 350 Ohm)
Two internal shunts or external shunt calibration possible
Programmable range for sensitivity, excitation and offset
9-pin SUB-D or 8-pin LEMO connector (optional)
DAQP-BRIDGE-A specifications
Parameter
DAQP-BRIDGE-A
Gain:
20 to 1000
Input ranges: @ 5 VDC excitation:
±5, ±10, ±25, ±50, ±100, ±250 mV ±1, ±2, ±5, ±10, ±20, ±50 mV/V
Range selection:
Push button or software
Input impedance:
> 100 MOhm
DC accuracy:
±0.1 %
Gain linearity:
±0.05 %
Excitation voltage: Accuracy: Drift: Protection:
0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5 and 10 VDC software programmable (5 VDC = default setting) 0.05 % ±1 mV typ. 20
ppm (max. 40 ppm) Continuous short to ground
Bridge types:
Full bridge 1⁄2 bridge with internal completion (software programmable) 1⁄4 bridge with internal resistor
for 120 and 350 Ohm (software programmable)
Bridge resistance:
120 Ohm to 10 kOhm (down to 87 Ohm on request)
Shunt calibration:
Two internal shunt resistors or external resistor for shunt calibration (175k & 59k88)
Zero adjust:
Full automatic, ±200 % of F.S. (via push button or software)
Bandwidth (-3dB):
20 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)
Filters (lowpass):
10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 5 kHz, 20 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)
Filter selection:
Push button or software
Filter characteristics:
Bessel or Butterworth (software programmable) 40 dB / decade (12 dB / octave)
Typ. SNR @ max. bandwidth:
71 dB @ Gain 1000 79 dB @ Gain 20
Typical CMRR:
73 dB @ 0 Hz 71 dB @ 400 Hz 70 dB @ 1 kHz
Overvoltage protection:
±10 VDC
Isolation:
350 VDC (for input and excitation)
Output voltage:
±5 V
Output resistance:
< 10 Ohm
Output current:
Max. 5 mA
Output protection:
Continuous short to ground
RS-485 interface:
Yes
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-31
Parameter
DAQP-BRIDGE-A
TEDS support:
No
MSI support:
Manually support of MSI-BR-TH-x adapter
Power supply voltage:
±9 VDC (±1 %)
Power consumption:
Typ. 1.44 W @ 350 Ohm, 1.83 W @ 120 Ohm (both full bridge @ 5 VDC excitation) Max: 3 W (depending
on sensor) *
Module Pin-outs
⇒⇒ CAUTION: The sensor shield can be connected to either pin 4 (SUB-D version only) or the
housing of the 9-pin SUB-D / 8-pin LEMO connector, depending on your application.
Full bridge signal connection
6-wire sensor connection
4-wire sensor connection
⇒⇒ Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6; LEMO: pin 5 and 6) MUST be connected!
10-32 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Half bridge signal connection
3-wire sensor connection
⇒⇒ Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6; LEMO: pin 5 and 6) MUST be connected!
Quarter bridge signal connection
3-wire sensor connection
⇒⇒ Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6; LEMO: pin 5 and 6) MUST be connected!
⇒⇒ 1) ‘Shunt’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.
Potentiometric and µV measurements
The differential amplifier of the DAQP-BRIDGE-B module is designed to measure small voltages (with very low
offset drift and high amplification). These are exactly the same requirements than for μV amplifiers.
By setting the bridge input type to Voltage you can select input ranges from ±0.5 mV to ±500 mV. The advantages
of using bridge amplifiers for μV measurements: only one multifunctional module with high bandwidth, a lot of
input and filter ranges and a programmable offset (Auto Zero).
The correct hook-up is simply connecting your µV signal to the IN+ and IN- pins of the this module, and be sure to
use a shielded cable and connect the drain to the ground pin of the DSUB connector on the DAQ module.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-33
A potentiometer can be seen similar to a half bridge sensor with ±500 mV/V sensitivity. Therefore potentiometric
sensors can be measured with bridge amplifiers.
The advantages of using bridge amplifiers for potentiometric measurements: only one multifunctional module with
high bandwidth and a programmable offset (by adjusting the offset and range, you can focus on a certain potentiometer position with higher resolution).
Module configuration
DAQP-BRIDGE-A:
Excitation: 0.5 V
Range:
500 mV/V
The following table shows how the mV/V ranges are calculated. The ranges depend on the gain and the excitation
voltage (note that commas indicate decimal points in this table):
⇒⇒ Always change the excitation voltage before changing the input range, otherwise you will not get the
required 500 mV/V range.
Potentiometer sensor connection
The left side shows the connections on the signal conditioner, while the right side represents your potentiometric
sensor:
10-34 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DAQP-BRIDGE-B Strain Gage Module
Input sensitivity: Bandwidth, filter: Bridge offset: Bridge completion:
Shunt calibration: Custom range: TEDS: Signal connection:
0.05 mV/V to 1000 mV/V
200 kHz, 9 selectable lowpass filters (10 Hz to 100 kHz)
Automatic offset adjustment (approx. ±200 % of range)
Internal completion for 1⁄2 and 1⁄4 bridge (120 and 350 Ohm)
Supports 3- and 4-wire 1⁄4 bridge connection
Two internal shunts or external shunt calibration possible
Programmable range for sensitivity, excitation and offset
Support for TEDS sensors
9-pin SUB-D or 8-pin LEMO connector (optional)
DAQP-BRIDGE-B specifications
Parameter
DAQP-BRIDGE-B (revision 2)
Gain:
10 to 10 000
Input ranges: @ 5 VDC excitation:
±0.5 1), ±1, ±2.5, ±5, ±10, ±25, ±50, ±100, ±250, ±500 mV ±0.1 1), ±0.2, ±0.5, ±1, ±2, ±5, ±10, ±20,
±50, ±100 mV/V
Range selection:
Push button or software
Input impedance:
> 100 MOhm
Input noise:
3.5 nV * √Hz
Accuracy @ 5 VDC excitation:
±0.05 % F.S.
Gain drift @ 5 VDC excitation:
10 ppm/K of range ±0.02 μV/V/K
Excitation voltage: Accuracy: Drift:
Protection:
0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5 and 10 VDC software programmable (5 VDC = default setting) ±0.05 % ±0.7 mV ±10
ppm/K ±50 μV/K Continuous short to ground
Bridge types:
4- or 6-wire full bridge 3- or 5-wire 1⁄2 bridge with internal completion (software programmable) 3- or
4-wire 1⁄4 bridge with internal resistor for 120 and 350 Ohm (software programmable) 1)
Bridge resistance:
87 Ohm to 10 kOhm @ ≤ 5 VDC excitation (120 Ohm to 10 kOhm @ 10 VDC excitation)
Shunt calibration:
Two internal shunt resistors
Zero adjust:
Full automatic, ±200 % of F.S. (via push button or software)
Bandwidth (-3dB):
200 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0) 1)
Filters (lowpass):
10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)
Filter selection:
Push button or software
Filter characteristics:
Bessel or Butterworth (software programmable) 40 dB / decade (12 dB / octave)
Typ. SNR @ 100 kHz [1 kHz] and 5 VDC
excitation:
66 dB [84 dB] @ 1 mV/V 82 dB [100 dB] @ 50 mV/V
Typ. CMRR @ 0.1 mV/V [1 mV/V] and 5 VDC
excitation:
125 dB [120 dB] @ DC 115 dB [110 dB] @ 400 Hz 110 dB [105 dB] @ 1 kHz
Max. common mode voltage:
±6 V
Overvoltage protection:
±10 VDC
Output voltage:
±5 V
Output resistance:
< 10 Ohm
Output current:
Max. 5 mA
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-35
Parameter
DAQP-BRIDGE-B (revision 2)
Output protection:
Continuous short to ground
RS-485 interface:
Yes
TEDS: Supported TEDS chips
Hardware support for TEDS (Transducer Electronic Data Sheet) DS2406, DS2430A, DS2432, DS2433
MSI support:
Automatic MSI-BR-TH-x support
Power supply voltage:
±9 VDC (±1 %)
Power consumption:
Typ. 1 W @ 350 Ohm, 1.3 W @ 120 Ohm (both full bridge @ 5 VDC excitation) Max: 2 W (depending on
sensor)
1) 4-wire 1⁄4 bridge or ±0.5 mV input range will limit the bandwidth to 30 kHz
Module Pin-outs
⇒⇒ CAUTION: The sensor shield can be connected to either pin 4 (SUB-D version only) or the
housing of the 9-pin SUB-D / 8-pin LEMO connector, depending on your application.
Full bridge signal connection
6-wire sensor connection
4-wire sensor connection
⇒⇒ Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6; LEMO: pin 5 and 6) MUST be connected!
10-36 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Half bridge signal connection
5-wire sensor connection
(sense wired at the sensor)
3-wire sensor connection
(sense wired at the connector)
⇒⇒ Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6; LEMO: pin 5 and 6) MUST be connected!
Quarter bridge signal connection
4-wire sensor connection
(sense wired at the sensor)
3-wire sensor connection
(sense wired at the connector)
⇒⇒ Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6; LEMO: pin 5 and 6) MUST be connected!
⇒⇒ 1) ‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.
Potentiometric and µV measurements
The differential amplifier of the DAQP-BRIDGE-B module is designed to measure small voltages (with very low
offset drift and high amplification). These are exactly the same requirements than for μV amplifiers.
By setting the bridge input type to Voltage you can select input ranges from ±0.5 mV to ±500 mV. The advantages
of using bridge amplifiers for μV measurements: only one multifunctional module with high bandwidth, a lot of
input and filter ranges and a programmable offset (Auto Zero).
The correct hook-up is simply connecting your µV signal to the IN+ and IN- pins of the this module, and be sure to
use a shielded cable and connect the drain to the ground pin of the DSUB connector on the DAQ module.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-37
A potentiometer can be seen similar to a half bridge sensor with ±500 mV/V sensitivity. Therefore potentiometric
sensors can be measured with bridge amplifiers.
The advantages of using bridge amplifiers for potentiometric measurements: only one multifunctional module with
high bandwidth and a programmable offset (by adjusting the offset and range, you can focus on a certain potentiometer position with higher resolution).
Module configuration
DAQP-BRIDGE-B:
Excitation: 1 V
Range:
500 mV/V
The following table shows how the mV/V ranges are calculated. The ranges depend on the gain and the excitation
voltage (note that commas indicate decimal points in this table):
⇒⇒ Always change the excitation voltage before changing the input range, otherwise you will
not get the required 500 mV/V range.
Potentiometer sensor connection
The left side shows the connections on the signal conditioner, while the right side represents your potiometric
sensor:
10-38 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DAQP-CFB Carrier Frequency/LVDT module
Ideal for these kinds of sensors:
Special features:
Input ranges: Bandwidth: Isolation: Signal connection:
full bridge; half bridge; quarter bridge 120 Ω;
quarter bridge 350 Ω inductive full bridge;
inductive half bridge (such as most LVTD Sensors)
Automatic balancing up to 400% of range
Internal completion for 1⁄2 and 1⁄4 bridge
Two internal shunts for completion
0.1 mV/V to 1000 mV/V
2.3 kHz
N/A
9-pin SUB-D
DAQP-CFB specifications
Parameter
DAQP-CFB
Input ranges:
0.1 mV/V to 1000 mV/V
Inductive input ranges:
5 mV/V to 1000 mV/V (inductive range is limited from 20 mVRMS to 1000 mVRMS input voltage)
Input voltage ranges:
0.2 mVRMS to 1000 mVRMS
Bridge resistance:
60 - 1,000 Ohm depending on excitation voltage
Excitation voltage level:
1, 2, 5 VRMS
Excitation voltage frequency:
5 kHz sine wave ±20 Hz
Maximum excitation current:
30 mARMS short circuit protected
Excitation voltage synchronization:
Internal or external
Excitation voltage accuracy:
5 VRMS ±5 mVRMS; 2 VRMS ±2.5 mVRMS; 1 VRMS ±2.5 mVRMS
Excitation voltage drift:
typically 50 ppm/°K
Excitation frequency drift:
typically 20 ppm/°K
Nonlinearity:
±0.02 % FS
Accuracy:
±0.2 % of reading ±0.1 % of range
Offset drift:
±0.003 μV/V/K ±40 ppm of Range/°K
Gain drift:
within ±30 ppm/°K
Balance adjusting range:
±400 % of Range (±200 % at 1 V excitation)
Capacitive imbalance compensation:
Approx. 1000 pF
Phase adjustment range:
±40° (inductive mode only)
Balance adjusment accuracy:
within ±0.1 % FS
Supported sensors:
full bridge; half bridge; quarter bridge 120 Ω; quarter bridge 350 Ω
inductive full bridge; inductive half bridge (typically LVTD Sensors)
Shunt calibration:
internal 50 kOhm and 100 kOhm Shunt
Completion and shunt resistor accuracy:
±0.05 %
-3 dB Bandwidth:
DC - 2.3 kHz
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-39
Parameter
DAQP-CFB
Filters (lowpass):
10, 30, 100, 300, 1 kHz
Filter characteristics:
2nd order Bessel, 2nd order Butterworth (40 dB/ decade)
Typ. SNR @ 1000 Hz [100 Hz]
and 2 VRMS excitation:
78 dB [85 dB] @ 1 mV/V
80 dB [87 dB] @ 100 mV/V
Over voltage protection
±10 V
Output voltage:
±5V
Output current:
±5 mA
Output protection:
Continuous short to ground
Power consumption:
max. 1.5 W
Supported TEDS chips:
DS2406, DS2430, DS2432, DS2433, DS2431 1)
Weight:
within 250 (±30) g
1) TEDS only supported by revision 2 of this module (or higher)
Module Pin-outs
-- Pins 6 and 8 can be left unconnected
Software controlled functions
Amplifier balance
Amplifier balance allows elimination of the amplifier offset. The input is shorted and all ranges are balanced by
within the module. Any previously stored sensor offset values are cleared.
Sensor balance
Sensor balance is similar to the amplifier balance. Because the input is not shorted, the sensor offset is automatically adjusted to zero.
Short
When measuring the absolute strain it is possible to disconnect the sensor via software and short the input.
10-40 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Shunt
Two different internal shunts resistors (50 kΩ and 100 kΩ) can be connected for easy function or calibration
check. With this technique the whole measurement chain (sensor, amplifier and analog to digital conversation) are
checked. The table below shows the shunt calibration result for typical strain gage resistor values.
Strain gage resistor
Shunt resistor
Result
120Ω
50k
0.6 mV/V
120Ω
100k
0.3 mV/V
350Ω
50k
1.74 mV/V
350Ω
100k
0.87 mV/V
The shunt resistor check is not possible in inductive bridge operation mode.
Cal
Independent of the value of the input signal, the CAL function sets the output to 80% of the actual range. The
base of this calibration signal is the excitation voltage. Therefore this is an easy check of the excitation voltage.
The typical reasons why the excitation is not working are short curcuit of the excitation at the cabling or sensor
defects, too high a load for the excitation amplifier (please decrease the excitation level), or wrong settings of the
synchronization mode (no master assigned).
Synchronizing multiple amplifiers
Due the high amplification of strain gage amplifiers it is needed to synchronize the excitation voltage if multiple
channels are used. This is done with Pin 8 of the back plane connector. See the detailed DAQ modules manual for
details about how to set up the synchronization of multiple DAQP-CFB modules.
Sensor connections
Inductive half bridge sensors
LVDT sensors
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-41
Full bridge signal connection
4-wire sensor connection for standard bridge & inductive bridge
(Sense wired at the connector)
-- Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6) could be connected to be compatible to other modules.
Half bridge signal connection
3-wire sensor connection for standard bridge
(Sense wired at the sensor)
Quarter bridge signal connection
3-wire sensor connection for standard bridge
(Sense wired at the connector)
-- Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6) could be connected to be compatible to other DEWE-BRIDGE amplifier.
-- 1) ‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.
10-42 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DAQP-ACC-A IEPE Accelerometer module
Constant current type accelerometers, aka
IEPE, ICP, I.C.P.®, or Piezotronic
Ideal for these kinds of sensors:
Input ranges: Bandwidth: Isolation: Signal connection:
±5 V, ±1.66 V, ±500 mV, ±166 mV, ±50 mV
300 kHz
N/A
BNC connector
DAQP-ACC-A specifications
Parameter
DAQP-ACC-A
Input ranges:
±5 V, ±1.66 V, ±500 mV, ±166 mV, ±50 mV
Gain:
1, 3, 10, 30, 100
Range/gain selection:
Pushbutton or software selection
Gain error:
0.5 %
Sensor types:
IEPE (constant current) only
Sensor excitation:
4 or 8 mA (software selection), 10 %, up to 28 VDC
Input impedance:
5 or 7 MOhm (depending on time constant), in parallel with 1.2 nF
Input voltage range:
Voltage < 4 V
Voltage > 19 V
-3 dB Bandwidth:
Filters (high-pass)
4 to 19 V
”Shortcut” detection
“No sensor” detection
From selected highpass filter to 300 kHz (+2 to -5 dB @ fg)
0.5 Hz filter
5 Hz filter
0.5 Hz and 5 Hz (software selection)
0.32 s time constant
0.032 s time constant
Filters (low-pass):
1 kHz, 10 kHz, 100 kHz, 300 kHz
other filter steps available as an option upon request
Filter selection:
Pushbutton or software selection
Filter characteristics
Typ. SNR @ max. bandwidth
up to 100 kHz
300 kHz
Gain 1 and 3
Gain 10
Gain 30
Gain 100
Butterworth
100 dB / decade (30 dB / octave)
80 dB / decade (24 dB / octave)
94 dB
91 dB
80 dB
73 dB
Output voltage:
±5 V
Output resistance:
<10 Ω
Output current:
5 mA maximum
Output protection:
Continuous short to ground
Power supply voltage:
±9 VDC (±10 %)
RS-485 interface for module control:
Yes
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-43
Parameter
DAQP-ACC-A
TEDS support:
N/A
Power consumption:
Typical 0.8 to 1.0 W (depending on sensor)
Sensor connection
Standard IEPE accelerometer or microphone connector and cable. Use a standard BNC plug on the Dewetron
module side. The sensor side may be molded into the sensor, or a modular connector with BNC, 10-32, etc.
10-44 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DAQP-CHARGE-A Charge/IEPE module
Handles both of these sensors:
Special features:
IEPE sensitivity:
Charge sensitivity:
Bandwidth: Isolation: Signal connection:
Charge type accelerometers and microphones, plus
IEPE (Piezotron) accelerometers and mics
Directly outputs acceleration, velocity or displacement
0, 20, 40 and 60 dB (±5 V, ±500 mV, ±50 mV, ±5 mV)
5, 50, 500, 5000 and 50000 pC
0.1 Hz to 50 kHz
N/A
BNC (10-32 microdot adapter included)
DAQP-CHARGE-A specifications
Parameter
DAQP-CHARGE-A
Input sensitivity:
IEPE mode:
CHARGE mode:
0, 20, 40, 60 dB (±5 V, ±500 mV, ±50 mV, ±5 mV)
5, 50, 500, 5000, 50000 pC
Supported sensor types:
Dynamic CHARGE and IEPE (constant current)
Sensor type selection:
Pushbutton or software selection
Gain accuracy:
1% full scale
Input range fine tuning:
Software selectable
Range selection:
Pushbutton: fixed ranges
Software: every range
Integration on-board:
Single (velocity) or double (displacement), 0 dB at 15.9 H
LED indicators:
Range and filter:
ICP LED:
OVL LED:
A, V and D LED:
5 LEDs
Active with connected ICP® sensor, inactive for charge input
Overload control (output voltage > 5 V)
Indicator for acceleration, velocity and displacement output
Constant current source:
3.2 to 5.6 mA, > 24 V
Filters (high-pass):
0.1 Hz, 1 Hz, 10 Hz (±2 dB @ f0)
Filters (low-pass):
100 Hz, 1, 3, 10, 50 kHz (±2 dB @ f0)
Filter selection:
Push button or software selection
Filter characteristics:
Butterworth
80 dB / decade (24 dB / octave)
-3 dB Bandwidth:
0.1 Hz to 50 kHz (±2 dB @ f0)
Typ. SNR @ max. bandwidth
5000 pC
500 pC
50 PC
5 pC
5 pC
90 dB
87 dB
73 dB
54 dB
60 dB @ 10 kHz
Output voltage:
±5V
Output noise:
< 8 mV (all ranges with 50 kHz filter)
Power consumption:
0.6 W to 1.2 W (depending on sensor)
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-45
Parameter
DAQP-CHARGE-A
Power supply voltage:
±9 VDC (±10 %)
TEDS support:
N/A
RS-485 interface for module control
Yes
Sensor connection
Standard charge or IEPE accelerometer or microphone connector and cable. Use a standard BNC plug on the
Dewetron module side. The sensor side may be molded into the sensor, or a modular connector with BNC, 10-32,
etc.
BNC to Microdot adapter
This adapter is included for no additional cost with the DAQP-CHARGE-A module.
-- Using an IEPE® sensor with charge input selected (or a Charge sensor with IEPE® input selected) will not
destroy the module or the sensor, but the measured values will be incorrect.
-- When using the fine tuning option of the input range (3686 steps per decade), the module is no longer in
a calibrated state. In this case the input range LED’s are not active!
10-46 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DAQP-CHARGE-B Isolated Static/Dynamic Charge module
Ideal for these kinds of sensors:
Special capability:
Input ranges: Bandwidth: Isolation: Signal connection:
Charge sensors, dynamic or static
Selectable time bases for long settling time sensors
Charge drift < 0.03 pC/sec
±100 to ±1 000 000 pC
100 kHz
350 VDC
BNC connector
DAQP-CHARGE-B specifications
Parameter
DAQP-CHARGE-B
Input ranges:
±100, ±500, ±2 000, ±10 000, ±40 000, ±200 000, ±1 000 000 pC
Supported sensor types:
Dynamic and static CHARGE accelerometers and microphones
Gain accuracy:
0.5 % of range (1 % of range for 100 and 500 pC)
Gain linearity:
±0.5 %
-3 dB Bandwidth:
100 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)
Range selection:
Pushbutton or software selection
Filters (low-pass):
10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz (±2 dB @ f0)
Filter selection:
Push button or software selection
Filter characteristics:
Bessel or Butterworth (software selectable)
40 dB / decade (12 dB / octave)
Time constant:
Long
Highpass filter on
DC mode
2 to 1000 sec.
Drift input current @ 25 °C:
< ±0.03 pC/s
Offset drift:
50 ppm of Range/°K
Amplifier reset:
Push button or software
Offset after reset:
±2 mV or ±1 pC (greater value is valid)
Typ. SNR @ max. bandwidth:
Range 100 pC
Range > 2000 pC
Ouput noise:
@ 100 kHz
@ 30 kHz
76 dB (82 dB @ 30 kHz / 85 dB @ 10 kHz )
81 dB (89 dB @ 30 kHz / 93 dB @ 10 kHz )
0.3 mVRMS + 0.01 pCRMS
0.12 mVRMS + 0.008 pCRMS
Output voltage:
±5V
Output noise:
< 8 mV (all ranges with 50 kHz filter)
Cable noise:
< 10-5 pCRMS/pF
CMR:
< 0.02 pC/V (difference between input and output ground)
Input overvoltage protection:
1 kV ESD
Isolation:
350 VDC
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-47
Parameter
DAQP-CHARGE-B
Power consumption:
1.5 W to 3.5 W (depending on signal range and frequency)
Power supply voltage:
±9 VDC (±1 %)
TEDS support:
N/A
RS-485 interface for module control
Yes
Sensor connection
Standard charge accelerometer or microphone connector and cable. Use a standard BNC plug on the Dewetron
module side. The sensor side may be molded into the sensor, or a modular connector with BNC, 10-32, etc.
BNC to Microdot adapter
This adapter is available as an option with the DAQP-CHARGE-B module.
High pass filter
The time constant of the internal highpass filter depends on the used input range. For range 1 (100 pC, 500 pC
and 2,000 pC) the time constant is 2 seconds (or 0.07 Hz), for range 2 (10,000 pC and 40,000 pC) the time constant is 40 seconds (or 3.9 mHz). For the highest both ranges (200,000 pC and 1,000,000 pC) the time constant
is 1,000 seconds or 0.16 mHz).
10-48 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DAQP-THERM Isolated Thermocouple module
Ideal for these kinds of sensors:
Special feature:
Cold junction compensation: Linearization:
Bandwidth: Isolation: Signal connection:
Thermocouple types K, J, T, R, S, N, E, B, L, C, U
Freely programmable measuring range!
On-board and automatic
On-board and automatic
3 kHz
350 VDC
Standard mini T/C connector, universal white
DAQP-THERM specifications
Parameter
DAQP-THERM
Thermocouple types:
K, J, T, R, S, N, E, B, L, C, U
Range selection:
Min. to max. of the input range is freely programmable within the full thermocouple input span
CJC absolute accuracy:
±0.2 °C
CJC stability:
0.01 °C/°C ambient temperature change
Linearization:
DSP based linearization
Accuracy:
Typical 0.3° for type K including CJC error; details see table below
Nonlinearity:
> 0.01°C
Input resistance:
> 1 MΩ
-3 dB Bandwidth:
3 kHz
Filters:
3 Hz, 10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz
Filter characteristics:
Butterworth or Bessel, 2nd, 4th, 8th order programmable
Isolation:
±1000 VRMS continuous (for input excitation and TEDS interface)
Typ. CMRR @ 3kHz:
> 160 dB
Open thermocouple detection:
100 MΩ pull up; software selectable
Output voltage:
±5 V; 0 to 5 V; (±10 V and 0 to 10 V possible only with special DEWE-30)
Output resistance:
100 Ω
Output protection:
Continuous short to ground
Power supply voltage:
±9 VDC (±1 %)
Power consumption:
1 W typical
TEDS support:
N/A
Connector:
Universal mini termocouple connector, white color code
Standard MINI thermocouple connector
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-49
DAQP-THERM Input ranges and detailed specifications
Thermocouple
Type
Standard
Input range
Accuracy
min
[°C]
max
[°C]
-270 to -200
°C [°C]
-200 to -100
°C [°C]
-100 to 0 °C
[°C]
0 to 100 °C
[°C]
100 °C to fullscale [% of
reading + °C]
J
DIN EN 60584-1
-270
1372
6.70
0.70
0.35
0.26
0.027
0.26
K
DIN EN 60584-1
-210
1200
0.68
0.60
0.32
0.25
0.019
0.25
T
DIN EN 60584-1
-270
400
4.37
0.69
0.37
0.26
R
DIN EN 60584-1
-50
1760
0.85
0.59
0.009
0.44
S
DIN EN 60584-1
-50
1760
0.77
0.58
0.012
0.45
N
DIN EN 60584-1
-270
1300
9.14
0.77
0.37
0.28
0.017
0.27
E
DIN EN 60584-1
-270
1000
4.25
0.60
0.33
0.24
0.018
0.23
L
DIN 43710
0
900
0.25
C
ASTM E988-96
0
2310
0.36
U
DIN 43710
-200
600
0.64
0.37
DIN EN 60584-1
0
1820
0.33
0.045
0.26
0 to 500°C
B
0.23
0.26
0.33
0.24
> 500°C
0.44
All values given in Celcius on these pages.
Software programmable module range
Regardless which input mode is selected, the module measurement range is completely free programmable. Simply by entering the lower and upper limit the amplifier adjusts its gain and offset factors automatically. The amplifier output is scaled to either ±5 V or 0 to 5 V. Converting a nonlinear temperature signal from a thermocouple to
a linear analog output is one of the key features of this amplifier.
Open thermocouple detection
The open thermocouple detection of the DAQP-THERM consists of an 100 MΩ pull-up resistor. That typically
drives a 50 nA current through the sensor which normally does not take effect on the measurement, but is enough
to generate an input overflow if the sensor breaks. Despite of this small current, there are sensors available
where this current generates a big error. These sensors are typically non-contact infrared thermocouples and fast
response thermocouples. In that case the open thermocouple detection can simply be deactivated in the software.
Sensors with up to 50 kΩ output impedance can be measured in this way.
CJC
The DAQP-THERM comes with an integrated cold junction compensation sensor with an absolute accuracy of
±0.2 °C. In order to archieve this accuracy the sensor has to be connected for at least 5 minutes to the thermocouple connector (CJC equilibrium time).
10-50 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DAQP-MULTI Isolated Multifunction module
Thermocouple:
Bridge: Voltage input: RTD:
Resistance: Bandwidth: Isolation: Signal connection:
Freely programmable ranges within full thermocouple input span
±0.5 to ±1000 mV/mA
±5 mV to ±5 V (free programmable within ±5 V)
Resistance Temperature Detector (Pt100 to Pt2000),
freely programmable ranges within full RTD input span
1 Ω to 1 MΩ (free programmable between 1 Ω and 1 MΩ)
3 kHz
1000 VRMS continuous
Standard miniature thermocouple connector, and
9-pin SUB-D connector
V
DAQP-MULTI specifications
Parameter
DAQP-MULTI
Input types:
Thermocouple (TC); Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD); Voltage; Resistance; Bridge with constant
current excitation
Thermocouples
Sensor types:
K, J, T, R, S, N, E, B, L, C, U, others on request
Range:
Min. to max. of the input range is free programmable within the full thermocouple input span
CJC absolute accuracy:
±0.2 °C
CJC stability:
0.01 °C/°C ambient temperature change
Accuracy:
Typical 0.3° for type K including CJC error; details see table below.
Linearization:
DSP based linearization on-board
Non-linearity:
> 0.01°C
Open thermocouple detection:
100 MΩ pull up; software selectable
Connector:
Mini thermocouple connector with integrated cold junction compensation sensor
RTD
Sensor types:
Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000, Pt2000, others on request
Range:
Min. and max. of the input range is free programmable within the full RTD input span
Constant current:
Pt100: 1 mA; Pt200, Pt500: 0.5 mA; Pt1000, Pt2000: 0.2 mA
Accuracy:
Typical accuracy 0.15 °C for Pt100, details see table below
Linearization:
DSP based linearization on-board
Non-linearity:
> 0.01 °C
Voltage
Input ranges:
±5 mV, ±10 mV, ±20 mV, ±50 mV, ±100 mV, ±200 mV, ±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2 V, ±5 V, free programmable
within ±5V
Accuracy:
0 to ±100 mV Range:
0.02 % of reading ±0.01 % of Range ±5 μV
>±100mV to ±5V Range: 0.02 % of reading ±0.01 % of Range ±100 μV
Offset drift:
Typical ±0.3 μV/°K ±10 ppm of range/°K
Gain drift:
Typical 15 ppm/°K
Input impedance:
> 100 MΩ (power off: 50 kΩ)
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-51
Parameter
DAQP-MULTI
Input noise:
8 nV * √Hz
Resistance
Ranges:
1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300, 1k, 3k, 10k, 30k, 100k, 1M, free programmable between 1 Ω and 1 MΩ
Accuracy:
See table below
Drift:
Typical 15 ppm/°K
Constant current:
From 5 μA to 5 mA depending on range
Bridge
Ranges:
0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000 mV/mA
Accuracy:
0.02 % of reading ±0.01 % of Range ±5 μV
Offset drift:
typical ±0.3 μV/°K ±10 ppm of range/°K
Gain drift:
typical 15ppm/°K
Input impedance:
> 100 MΩ (power off: 50 kΩ)
Input noise:
8 nV * √Hz
Automatic bridge balance:
±200 % of range
Supported sensors:
4 wire full bridges
Connector:
DSUB 9, standard Dewetron bridge pin-outs
Excitation current:
1, 2, 4 mA; software programmable
Accuracy:
0 to 200 μA
200 μA to 5 mA
0.02 % ±50 nA
0.02 % ±1 μA
Drift:
15 ppm/°K
Compliance voltage:
15 V
Source resistance:
> 150 kΩ
General Specifications
-3dB Bandwidth:
3 kHz
Filters:
3 Hz, 10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz
Group delay:
300 μs with highest filter
Filter characteristics:
Butterworth or Bessel, 2nd, 4th, 8th order programmable
Typ. CMRR @ 3kHz
>160 dB
Isolation:
±1000 VRMS continuous (for input excitation and TEDS interface)
Over-voltage protection:
±100 V between inputs (clamping voltage: 5 V @ TC input; 11 V @ Voltage input)
Output voltage:
±5 V; 0 to 5V; (±10 V and 0 to 10 V with special DEWE-30)
Output resistance:
22 Ω
Output current:
Max. 5 mA
Output protection:
Continuous short to ground
RS485 interface for module control:
Yes
10-52 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Parameter
DAQP-MULTI
Supported TEDS chips:
DS2406, DS2430A, DS2431, DS2432, DS2433,DS28EC20
MSI support:
No
Power supply voltage:
±9 VDC (±1 %)
Power consumption:
1 W typical
DAQP-MULTI Input ranges and detailed specifications for THERMOCOUPLES
Thermocouple
Type
Standard
Input range
Accuracy
min
[°C]
-270 to -200
°C [°C]
max
[°C]
-200 to -100
°C [°C]
-100 to 0 °C
[°C]
0 to 100 °C
[°C]
100 °C to fullscale [% of
reading + °C]
J
DIN EN 60584-1
-270
1372
6.70
0.70
0.35
0.26
0.027
0.26
K
DIN EN 60584-1
-210
1200
0.68
0.60
0.32
0.25
0.019
0.25
T
DIN EN 60584-1
-270
400
4.37
0.69
0.37
0.26
R
DIN EN 60584-1
-50
1760
0.85
0.59
0.009
0.44
S
DIN EN 60584-1
-50
1760
0.77
0.58
0.012
0.45
N
DIN EN 60584-1
-270
1300
9.14
0.77
0.37
0.28
0.017
0.27
E
DIN EN 60584-1
-270
1000
4.25
0.60
0.33
0.24
0.018
0.23
L
DIN 43710
0
900
C
ASTM E988-96
U
DIN 43710
B
DIN EN 60584-1
0
2310
-200
600
0
1820
0.23
0.25
0.36
0.64
0.37
0.33
0.045
0.26
0 to 500°C
0.33
0.24
> 500°C
0.26
0.44
DAQP-MULTI Input ranges and detailed specifications for RTDs
RTDs
Type
Standard
Input range
Current
Accuracy
min
[°C]
[mA]
-200 to -100 °C
[°C]
max
[°C]
-100 to 0 °C
[°C]
100 °C to full-scale [%
of reading + °C]
Pt100 (385)
DIN EN 60751
-200
850
0.2
0.14
0.21
0.07
0.21
Pt200 (385)
DIN EN 60751
-200
850
0.1
0.18
0.27
0.10
0.27
Pt500 (385)
DIN EN 60751
-200
850
0.2
0.34
0.42
0.09
0.42
Pt1000 (385)
DIN EN 60751
-200
850
0.2
0.22
0.29
0.09
0.29
Pt2000 (385)
DIN EN 60751
-200
850
0.2
0.25
0.35
0.12
0.36
-200
850
0.2
0.14
0.21
0.07
0.21
Pt100 (3926)
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-53
DAQP-MULTI Input ranges and detailed
specifications for RESISTANCE
DAQP-MULTI detailed specifications
for EXCITATION CURRENT
Excitation
Resistance
Range
Current
Accuracy
% of reading
[µA]
[Ω]
[mA]
% of reading
% of range
0 to 200 μA
0.02
0.05
1,000,000
0.005
0.04
1.02
>0.2 to 5 mA
0.02
1
300,000
0.015
0.04
0.35
100,000
0.05
0.04
0.11
30,000
0.1
0.04
0.07
10,000
0.1
0.04
0.08
3,000
0.2
0.04
0.07
1,000
0.5
0.04
0.25
300
1
0.04
0.18
100
1
0.04
0.12
30
2
0.04
0.08
10
4
0.04
0.06
3
5
0.04
0.10
1
5
0.04
0.23
Sensor connections
9-pin DSUB connector
Mini thermocouple connector
10-54 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Resistance, RTD 2-wire and 4-wire
-- For resistance and RDT mode the 4-wire connection is recommended. The 2-wire connection will not compensate the wire
resistance.
Voltage Measurement
Bridge sensor
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-55
Thermocouple sensor
10-56 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DAQP-FREQ-A Frequency to Voltage module
Ideal for these kinds of sensors:
Frequency ranges:
Special feature:
Input ranges: Isolation: Signal connection:
Frequency and tachometer sensors, hall effect F/V, optical speed
sensors, and more
100 Hz, 1 kHz, 5 kHz, 20 kHz, 100 kHz, 200 kHz
Second output from module: TTL clock mirror of input frequency
100 Hz, 1 kHz, 5 kHz, 20 kHz, 100 kHz, 200 kHz
350 VDC
9-pin SUB-D connector
DAQP-FREQ-A specifications
Parameter
DAQP-FREQ-A
Input ranges:
100 Hz, 1 kHz, 5 kHz, 20 kHz, 100 kHz, 200 kHz
Minimum input frequency:
2 % of selected range
Range selection:
Pushbutton or software selection
Accuracy:
±0.05 % (from 4 % to 100 % of range)
Input signal:
10 mV to 300 V
Note: the DSUB connector is only specified up to 250 V
For signals above 60 V do not use the metal housing of the provided DSUB connector
Input resistance:
1 MΩ
Input filters:
100 Hz, 1 kHz, 5 kHz, 20 kHz, 100 kHz, 200 kHz
Filter selection:
Pushbutton or software selection
Input coupling:
DC or AC (software selectable)
Trigger level:
10 mV to 130 V (software programmable)
Sensor supply:
+12 VDC, ±9 VDC (not isolated)
Input isolation:
350 VDC
Over-voltage protection:
±500 V peak / 350 VRMS
Output filter:
Output signals:
Filter characteristics
Selection
Main output
Secondary output
3 ranges with 1.5, 30 and 500 ms (10 - 90 %)
Butterworth, 60 dB / decade (18 dB / octave)
Automatically according to input range
Slow (default) or fast output filter selectable within the input range
±5 V according to input frequency
Secondary: TTL level trigger output signal
Output resistance:
< 10 mΩ
Output current:
5 mA max.
Output protection:
Continuous short to ground
Power consumption:
1 W max.
TEDS support:
N/A
Power supply voltage:
±9 VDC (±5 %)
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-57
Sensor connection
⇒⇒ Sensor supply voltages are not isolated - only the input (pin 2 and 7)!
⇒⇒ For signals above 60 V don’t use the metal housing of SUBD connector!
Sensors without power supply
Sensors with power supply
Open collector sensors (NPN)
Open collector sensors (PNP)
-- The value of the resistor depends on the sensor supply voltage and the open collector sensor.
10-58 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
DAQN-V-OUT Isolated Voltage Output module
Module purpose:
Input/Output range: Bandwidth: Isolation: Signal connection:
1:1 (unity gain) isolation module, compatible
with AD series cards which have analog outputs
±10 V
400 Hz
1500 VRMS
-B: Banana plugs
-BNC: BNC connector
-D: 9-pin SUB-D connector
OUT
DAQN-V-OUT specifications
Parameter
DAQN-V-OUT
Input range:
±10 V
Input range maximum:
±36 V maximum (damage will occur above ±36 V)
Input resistance:
50 MΩ
Output voltage range:
±10 V
Over range capability:
5 % @ 10 V output
Output drive:
50 mA max.
Output resistance:
0.5 Ω
Output current during fault, maximum:
75 mA
Output protection, transient:
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-1989
CMV, output to input, continuous:
1500 VRMS max.
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-1989
110 dB
Accuracy:
±0.05 % span (0 to 5 mA load)
NMR (-3 dB @ 400 Hz):
100 dB per decade above 400 Hz
Non-linearity:
0.02 % span
Transient
CMRR (50 / 60 Hz)
Stability:
Noise:
Offset
Span
Output ripple, 1 kHz bandwidth
±25 ppm/°C
±20 ppm/°C
2 mVpp
-3 dB Bandwidth:
400 Hz
Power supply voltage:
9 VDC ±5 %
Over voltage protection
±10 V
Power supply current:
350 mA full load, 135 mA no load
Power supply sensitivity:
±12.5 ppm/%
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, DAQ | 10-59
Output signal connections
DAQN-V-OUT-B module
Voltage output via banana plug cables
DAQN-V-OUT-BNC module
Voltage output via BNC cable
DAQN-V-OUT-B module
Voltage output via DSUB 9-pin cable
Pin
9-pin DSUB connector
1
Not connected
2
Not connected
3
Not connected
4
GND (not isolated)
5
+9 V (not isolated)
6
Not connected
7
OUT + (-10 to +10 V, isolated)
8
OUT - (-10 to +10 V, isolated)
9
-9V (not isolated)
⇒⇒ Use pin 4, 5 and 9 only as sensor supply (not isolated)!
⇒⇒ For signals above 60 V don’t use the metal housing of SUB-D connector!
10-60 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, PAD | 10-61
PAD Series Modules
PAD Series Common Information
Calibration information
All DEWETRON modules are calibrated at 25°C after a warmup time of 30 minutes and meet their specifications
when leaving the factory. The time interval for recalibration depends on environmental conditions. Typically, the
calibration should be checked once a year.
Calibration certificates are available from DEWETRON as an option. DEWETRON offers several types:
„„ NIST traceable DEWETRON calibration certificate (USA CAL LAB only)
„„ ISO traceable DEWETRON certificate (European CAL LAB only)
„„ Calibration certificate according to ÖKD (equivalent to DKD)
This manual contains no calibration information. There is a separate calibration kit available for DAQ series modules manual calibration. The CAL-KIT contains the required cables, software and instructions that you need to add
to your own calibration lab. It does not include a calibrator or volt meter.
General PAD module specifications
Module dimensions:
20 x 65 x 105 mm (0.79 x 2.56 x 4.13 in.)
(W x H x D without front cover and connectors)
Frontcover: 20 x 87 x 2 mm (0.79 x 3.43 x 0.08 in.)
(W x H x D without connector)
Environmental:
Temp. range storage: Temp. range operating:
Rel. humidity (MIL202): RFI susceptibility:
-30 °C to +85 °C (-22 °F to 185 °F)
-5 °C to +60 °C (23 °F to 140 °F)
0 to 95 % at 60 °C, non-condensing
±0.5 % span error at 400 MHz, 5 W, 3 m
All specifications within this manual are valid at 25 °C.
All modules are produced according to ISO9001 and ISO14001.
10-62 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
PAD Module Connectors
Front Panel Connector
Accessible to the user. The connector type and pin assignment varies
from module to module. Detailed pin assignment of each module is shown
in the appropriate module description.
Rear Connector
Not user accessible. 9-pin male SUB-D, interface to the Dewetron System.
RS-232/485 interface
PAD modules can be configured via RS-485 interface, and they require this interface for all data transfers.
The DEWE-3210 and DEWE-3211 include an internal RS-232/485 converter and interface. This converter allows communication with all Dewetron signal conditioning modules.
To communicate with the modules, the RS-232 interface must be set to the following parameters:
baud rate:
data bits: parity: stop bits: handshake: 9600
8
no parity
1
not required
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, PAD | 10-63
PAD Modules Table
Module
Chs
Input type
Ranges
Voltage
±100 mV to ±50 V
Bandwidth
(BW)
Filters (FILT)
Isolation (ISO)
Overvoltage
protection (OP)
Special
functions
BW: 6 Hz
FILT: 1 / 4 / 8
values
ISO: 350 VDC
OP: 150 VDC
Separate 24-bit
ADC per channel
BW: 6 Hz
FILT: 1 / 4 / 8
values
ISO: 350 VDC
OP: 15 VDC
Separate 24-bit
ADC per channel
ISO: 350 VDC
OP: 15 VDC
Separate 24-bit
ADC per channel
Voltage measurement
PAD-V8-P
V
8
Current
±20 mA
Voltage
±15, ±50, ±100, ±150 mV
-150 mV to +1.5V
Thermocouple
Types J, K, T with PAD-CB8
breakout box
RTDs
Pt100, Pt200, Pt500,
Pt1000, Pt2000, Ni120
Temperature and ohmic measurement
PAD-TH8-P + PAD-CB8-J/K/T
8
PAD-TH8-P + PAD-CB8-RTD
Resistors
up to 2 MΩ
BW: 6 Hz
FILT: 1 / 4 / 8
values
Digital output
Relay outputs (dry contacts)
--
ISO: 300 VDC
Max load:
0.5 A @ 60 VAC,
1 A @ 24 VDC
Voltage output
0 to 10V
Current output
0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
--
ISO: 300 VDC
--
8
Analog and digital outputs
PAD-DO7
7
PAD-AO1
1
OUT
Please see the following pages for details about each of the available PAD series modules and accessories.
10-64 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Adding PAD modules to your Dewtetron system:
PAD modules can be plugged directly into the DEWE-3210, because it has 8 slots for DAQ/PAD/HSI series plugin modules. But if you don’t want to give up one of these eight dynamic input slots, you can simply add a DEWE30 series chassis.
This method also allows the DEWE-3211 to utilze PAD series modules, since this model does not have any slots
on its chassis. When only PAD modules are installed into it, the DEWE-30 series expansion box connects easily
via either RS485 connected to the Dewetron chassis’ EPAD interface, or via RS232C using the Dewetron chassis’
COM port. DEWE-30 chassis are available with 4, 8, 16, 32, 48, or 64 slots.
-- Note: if you want to also use DAQ or HSI series modules in this expansion rack, then you must also have
an analog cable connecting it to the DEWE-3210 or DEWE-3211. In addition, there must be an A/D card
inside the DEWE-321x chassis with the appropriate number of ADCs available.
Typical hook-ups
PAD modules can plug directly into the DEWE-3210 via any of its 8 slots, or...
PAD modules can plug into a DEWE-30 chassis (4 to 64 slots), and connect to a DEWE-3210 or DEWE-3211 via
RS232 com
If you connect a DEWE-30 chassis (with only PAD modules in it) to your DEWE-3210 or DEWE-3211, you may
connect it via EITHER RS232 (com port) or RS485 (EPAD).
Do not connect both interfaces at the same time.
If using RS232 com port, you must configure the port used for additional PAD modules in the DEWESoft hardware setup, analog tab.
Make sure the PAD modules are checked
When adding external PAD modules, enter the number of them under “Additional PAD modules”
If adding a DEWE-30 via RS232, select the appropriate com port here for the additional PAD modules.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, PAD | 10-65
Addressing PAD modules
Each PAD module must have a unique address (just like DAQ modules). The address is stored inside the PAD module in nonvolatile memory. Therefore, if you remove a PAD module from one system, where it was set to address 31, and plug it into a
different Dewetron chassis, it will still report itself on the bus at address 31.
This can cause a conflict if you already have a module at this address. In addition, it will be confusing to you when you hook up
your signals to what you believe is PAD module at address 16, but the channels show up on address 31. Therefore, it is vitally
important that you set the addresses of any DAQ, PAD, or HSI modules that you plug into your Dewetron system.
-- There is no need to set the addresses of MDAQ modules, except when initially installed at the factory.
There are essentially two ways to address your modules:
„„ FILL RACK PROCEDURE - this addresses all of your modules in sequence. This is what you should do if you have been
changing more than one module around, to ensure that every module is at the appropriate and unique address.
„„ FILL ONE MODULE PROCEDURE - easier and faster, when you simply want to exchange one module.
Let’s look at how to do each one of the above procedures:
Fill Rack (all Modules) Procedure
Within DEWESoft, go to the ACQUISITION MODE and select the SETUP screen, where you can see your list of modules. Now
click on the top of the AMPLIFIER COLUMN and you will see this menu:
Select the FILL RACK option, and the software will prompt you like this:
Follow the instruction to press the TOP black button on the module in the first slot, which is always SLOT 0 in the case of doing
a FILL RACK, since you are starting at 0 and going all the way up, filling all modules.
When you press this button on the module, the system will beep and prompt you to press the next module’s button, and so on.
Continue all the way through until you have done the last module, then press CANCEL to complete and save your changes.
10-66 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
If you get to the position where there is an empty module slot, or a non-programmable module from the old days in that slot,
press the SKIP button to move past it to the next module. You can do this as many times as needed.
When you’re done, the rack should be filled with all of the modules that are physically installed within this system, like this:
FILL (or CLEAR) One Module Procedure
FILL RACK is a great way to ensure that your modules are all addressed correctly, and we highly recommend it if you make
several module exchanges at once. But there are times when you simply want to exchange one module with a different one, or
perhaps to just remove a module. This is also quite easy once you know how.
Within DEWESoft, go to the ACQUISITION MODE and select the SETUP screen, where you can see your list of modules. This
time, instead of clicking on the top of the AMPLIFIER COLUMN, double-click the amplifier column for the one module that you
want to add, delete, or exchange. When you do this, the software will give you a similar choice as before:
And your choices are:
„„ If you have plugged a new module into this slot, choose FILL, then follow the prompts.
„„ If you change you mind and want to do a FILL RACK anyway, starting at slot 0, choose FILL FROM #0, then follow the
prompts.
„„ If there is a module in this slot that you have removed, but it continues to show up in RED (because the software cannot
really find it), choose CLEAR to remove it from the list.
„„ If you have clicked this by accident and want to cancel without making any changes, choose CANCEL
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, PAD | 10-67
Module Installation Trouble-shooting
There may be times when you have trouble addressing your modules, for a variety of reasons. Here are some good tips for solving these issues:
Problem: some or all modules are showing up in RED letters.
Analysis: a module shown in RED letters on the setup screen tells you that the software cannot find this module. Or, it can mean
that there is a conflict with another module, like when you plug two modules with the same address into the system at the same
time and don’t do a FILL RACK or FILL (or CLEAR) one of them. A very rare condition might be that a module is defective
and cannot communicate properly.
Solution: the trusty FILL RACK is always a great and easy way to solve nearly all these issues.
If the FILL RACK does not solve them, remove any modules shown in RED and add them back in one at a time, using the FILL
ONE MODULE procedure. Fill one module at a time until the offending modules’ addresses have been resolved.
Problem: you plug in a new module into a previously unused slot, but it does not show up.
Analysis: more than likely it was already set to an address that you were using, and it has either taken another module’s address,
or is conflicting with it.
Solution: the trusty FILL RACK is always a great and easy way to solve nearly all these issues.
If the FILL RACK does not solve them, remove any modules shown in RED and add them back in one at a time, using the FILL
ONE MODULE procedure. Fill one module at a time until the offending modules’ addresses have been resolved.
Problem: you want to use a very old PAD module which does not have the upper black button on it, so you don’t know how to
address it
Analysis: These modules have been out of production for a long time, but there are still some around, and they are still perfectly
good modules.
Solution: Start with the old PAD module in the slot, but NOT PRESSED IN!! Make sure the connector on the inside is not
mated or making contact in any way. Now double click on the amplifier slot where you want to install this module. Select FILL
when prompted. Then when the next prompt appears to press the black button or push in the module... PUSH IN THE MODULE.
The green LED on its front panel should light up, and it should show up on the list on your SETUP screen.
Problem: some modules show up with the SERIAL NUMBERS in the amplifier column, and some do not.
Analysis: There is nothing wrong here. With each Dewetron module there is a certain revision before which the serial number
was not available for external query, so these modules will not show this information on the setup screen.
Solution: N/A
10-68 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
PAD-V8-P Isolated 8-channel Voltage module
Module purpose:
Input ranges: Bandwidth: Isolation: Signal connection:
Interface boxes:
Voltage input module for DC/quasi-static signals
Selectable from ±100 mV to ±50V full-scale
6 Hz
350 VDC
25-pin D connector
PAD-CB8-BNC: 8 channel connector block, BNC
PAD-CB8-B:
8 channel connector block, banana jacks
V
PAD-V8-P specifications
Parameter
PAD-V8-P
Input channels:
8 differential input channels
Input ranges:
Voltage
Current
±100 mV, ±150 mV, ±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, ±10 V, ±50 V, -0.15 to +1.5 V
With external shunt resistor
Resolution:
10 µV for all ranges
Sample rate:
12 Hz for all channels, maximum
Read-out speed:
Typical 80 channels/s
DC accuracy:
±0.02 % of reading ±900 μV
-3 dB Bandwidth:
6 Hz (±1.5 dB @ f0)
Input isolation:
350 VDC (channel to channel, and input to output)
Over-voltage protection
150 VDC
Common mode voltage:
350 VDC / 250 VAC @ 50 Hz
NMR:
120 dB @ 50/60 Hz
CMRR:
140 dB @ DC, 120 dB @ 50 Hz
RS485 interface for module control/data:
Yes
Power supply voltage:
9 VDC ±10 %
Power consumption:
0.6 W typical
1)
1) Depending on system and number of channels
PAD-CB8-B and PAD-CB8-BNC break-out boxes
High quality break-out boxes are available for the PAD-V8-P module. The
PAD-CB8-B provides eight banana jacks, while the PAD-CB8-BNC provides
eight BNC onnectors. Each one features a 2 meter long cable and connector that plugs into the face of the PAD-V8-P module. There are no electronics inside these break-out boxes.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, PAD | 10-69
Connector pin-outs
Pin
Mating connector
Function
Pin
Function
1
Channel 0 (+)
13
Channel 6 (+)
2
Channel 0 (-)
14
Channel 6 (-)
3
Channel 1 (+)
15
Channel 7 (+)
4
Channel 1 (-)
16
Channel 7(-)
5
Channel 2 (+)
17
Digital input 1*
6
Channel 2 (-)
18
Digital input 2*
7
Channel 3 (+)
19
Digital input 3*
8
Channel 3 (-)
20
+12 VDC
9
Channel 4 (+)
21
Reset / Digital input 4*
10
Channel 4 (-)
22
GND
11
Channel 5 (+)
23
Reserved
12
Channel 5 (-)
24
Reserved
25
Reserved
* not supported in Dewesoft software
PAD-OPT2
25-pin SUB-D connector with screw terminals
(optional)
Low cost alternative to the PAD-CB8-B and -BNC
breakout boxes, or as a building block to making
your own cable without soldering. Metal shell covers
included.
10-70 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
PAD-TH8-P Isolated 8-channel Temperature module
Module purpose:
Bandwidth: Isolation: Signal connection:
Interface boxes:
Thermocouples and RTD input module for DC/quasi-static
signals
6 Hz
350 VDC
25-pin D connector
PAD-CB8-TH8-K-M: T/C K mini connectors, 2 meter cable
PAD-CB8-TH8-K-P2: T/C J mini connectors, 2 meter cable
PAD-CB8-TH8-J-P2: T/C J mini connectors, 2 meter cable
PAD-CB8-TH8-T-P2: T/C J mini connectors, 2 meter cable
PAD-CB8-RTD: RTD, 9-pin DSUB, 2 meter cable
PAD-TH8-P specifications
Parameter
PAD-TH8-P
Input channels:
8 differential input channels
Input voltage:
±1.5 V
Input resistance:
1.4 MΩ
Gain linearity:
0.001%
Temperature drift:
30 ppm/°K
Typical noise:
2 µV
Resolution:
10 µV for all ranges
Sample rate:
12 Hz for all channels, maximum
Read-out speed:
Typical 80 channels/s
DC accuracy:
Better than ±0.05 % ±200 μV (typ. ±0.03 % F.S. ±20 μV)
-3 dB Bandwidth:
6 Hz (±1.5 dB @ f0)
Input isolation:
350 VDC (channel to channel, and input to output)
Over-voltage protection
15 VDC
Common mode voltage:
130 VDC / 250 VAC @ 50 Hz
NMR (50/60 Hz):
120 dB
CMRR (50/60 Hz):
130 dB
RS485 interface for module control/data:
Yes
Power supply voltage:
9 VDC ±10 %
Power consumption:
0.6 W typical
1) Depending on system and number of channels
1)
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, PAD | 10-71
PAD-CB8-K-xx series break-out boxes
Above left: standard size PAD-CB8-K-P2 break-out box
Above right: miniature size PAD-CB8-K-M
Parameter
PAD-CB8-J (or K or T)-P2 and PAD-CB8-J (or K or T)-M
Input channels:
8 thermocouple sensors (J, K, or T) with built-in CJC (cold junction compensation)
Accuracy:
Thermocouple type J:
±1.0 °C @ -200 to -100 °C ±0.3 °C @
-100 to 150 °C ±0.4 °C @ 150 to 400
°C ±1 °C @ 400 to 1200 °C
Typical noise:
±0.1 °C @ 6 Hz sampling; no average
Operating temperature:
-25 to +80 °C
Cable length:
2m (up to 12 m on request)
Dimensions:
approx. 196 x 57 x 32.2 mm (7.7 x 2.2 x 1.3 in.)
Thermocouple type K:
±1.0 °C @ -200 to -25 °C ±0.4 °C @
-25 to 120 °C ±0.6 °C @ 120 to 400
°C ±1 °C @ 400 to 1372 °C
Thermocouple type T:
±1.0 °C @ -200 to -150 °C ±0.4 °C @
-150 to 400 °C
PAD-CB8-RTD break-out box
Parameter
PAD-CB8-RTD
Input channels:
8 RTD sensors
Constant current:
1250 μA (CB8-RTD-S3: 250 μA)
Constant current drift:
5 ppm/°K
Connection types:
2-, 3-, and 4-wire
Standard input ranges:
Resistor 0 to 999,99 Ohm, Pt100 a = 0.00385; Pt100 a = 0.003916; Pt200; Pt500; Ni120
CB8-RTD-S3:
Resistor 0 to 999,99 Ohm, Pt100 a = 0.00385; Pt100 a = 0.003916; Pt200; Pt500; Pt1000; Pt2000
10-72 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
PAD-DO7 Isolated 7-channel Relay Output module
Module purpose:
Isolation: Signal connection:
Important note:
Driving dry contact relays
300 VDC
25-pin D connector
This module is not supported by DEWESoft
data acquisition software
PAD-DO7 specifications
Parameter
PAD-DO7
Output channels:
7 relay output channels
Relay type:
Form “A” relay SPST N.O. with dry contacts
Max load:
0.5 A (60 VAC) 1 A (24 VDC)
Gain linearity:
0.001%
Input isolation:
300 VRMS
Relay on-time:
5 mS typical
Common mode voltage:
130 VDC / 250 VAC @ 50 Hz
RS485 interface for module control/data:
Yes
Power supply voltage:
+12 VDC (±10%)
Power consumption:
1.0 W typical
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, PAD | 10-73
Connector pin-outs
Pin
Function
Mating connector
Pin
Function
1
R1 NO
13
R7 NO
2
R1 COM
14
R7 COM
3
R2 NO
15
Not connected
4
R2 COM
16
Not connected
5
R3 NO
17
Not connected
6
R3 COM
18
Not connected
7
R4 NO
19
Not connected
8
R4 COM
20
+12 VDC
9
R5 NO
21
Init
10
R5 COM
22
GND
11
R6 NO
23
Not connected
12
R6 COM
24
Not connected
25
Not connected
* not supported in Dewesoft software
PAD-OPT2
25-pin SUB-D connector with screw terminals
(optional)
Convenient building block to making your own cable
without soldering. Metal shell covers included.
10-74 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
PAD-AO1 Isolated 1-channel Analog Output module
Module purpose:
Isolation: Signal connection:
Important note:
Driving a DC analog output
300 VDC
25-pin D connector
This module is not supported by DEWESoft
data acquisition software
PAD-AO1 specifications
Parameter
PAD-AO1
Output channel:
1 analog VDC output channel
Output signals:
Voltage
Current
0 to 10 V
0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
Resolution:
12-bits
Accuracy:
±0.1 % of FSR
Read-back accuracy:
±1 % of FSR
Rad-back resolution:
±0.02 % of FSR
Zero drift:
Voltage output
Current output
±30 μV/°C
±0.2 μA/°C
Span temp. coefficient:
±25 ppm/°C
Programmable output slope:
0.125 to 1024 mA/sec or 0.0625 to 512 V/sec
Current load resistor:
500 Ω
Isolation:
300 VDC
RS485 interface for module control/data:
Yes
Power supply voltage:
+12 VDC (±10%)
Power consumption:
1.2 W typical
OUT
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, PAD | 10-75
Connector pin-outs
Pin
Mating connector
Function
Pin
Function
1
Not connected
13
Not connected
2
Not connected
14
Not connected
3
Not connected
15
Reserved
4
Not connected
16
Reserved
5
Not connected
17
IOUT (+)
6
Not connected
18
IOUT (-)
7
Not connected
19
VOUT (+)
8
Not connected
20
VOUT (-)
9
Not connected
21
Not used
10
Not connected
22
GND
11
Not connected
23
Not connected
12
Not connected
24
Not connected
25
Not connected
* not supported in Dewesoft software
PAD-OPT2
25-pin SUB-D connector with screw terminals
(optional)
Convenient building block to making your own cable
without soldering. Metal shell covers included.
10-76 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, MDAQ | 10-77
MDAQ Series Modules
MDAQ Series Common Information
Calibration information
All DEWETRON modules are calibrated at 25°C after a warmup time of 30 minutes and meet their specifications
when leaving the factory. The time interval for recalibration depends on environmental conditions. Typically, the
calibration should be checked once a year.
Calibration certificates are available from DEWETRON as an option. DEWETRON offers several types:
„„ NIST traceable DEWETRON calibration certificate (USA CAL LAB only)
„„ ISO traceable DEWETRON certificate (European CAL LAB only)
„„ Calibration certificate according to ÖKD (equivalent to DKD)
This manual contains no calibration information. There are separate resources optionally available for MDAQ
series modules for automated calibration under Met/CAL®. The CAL-KIT contains the required cables, software
and instructions that you need to add to your own calibration lab. It does not include a calibrator or volt meter.
General MDAQ module specifications
MDAQ modules are factory installed within your Dewetron system. From the outside you see only the input connectors. But inside, there is a BASE card which can hold any two 8-channel MDAQ-SUB modules on one side,
and any MDAQ-FILT filter card on the other side. The result is a system which can be configured to suit a wide
variety of applications.
All specifications within this manual are valid at 25 °C.
All modules are produced according to ISO9001 and ISO14001.
10-78 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
MDAQ-BASE-5 Mother Board
Every MDAQ assembly consists of a 16-channel MDAQ-BASE mother board and at least one MDAQ-SUB series 8-channel
daughter card. Each MDAQ-BASE card can accept any two MDAQ-SUB cards, which are mounted next to each other on one
side of the MDAQ-BASE. The other side of the MDAQ-BASE can accept any single Dewetron MDAQ-FILT series 16-channel
filter card.
MDAQ-BASE-5 Details
The MDAQ assembly is factory installed according to your purchase order. Unlike DAQ modules, which can be freely plugged/
unplugged by the system user, MDAQ assemblies are not user-exchangeable. When your system is constructed at Dewetron, the
MDAQ assembly will be completely installed and tested.
TOP: MDAQ-SUB DAUGHTER cards (2)
MIDDLE: MDAQ-BASE mother board
BOTTOM: MDAQ-FILT card (optional)
MDAQ-SUB module dimensions:
Modules with BNC connectors: 175 x 61 x 30 mm (6.9 x 2.4 x 1.2 in.)
Modules with DSUB connectors: 175 x 82 x 22 (6.9 x 3.2 x 0.9)
MDAQ-SUB output connector (for MDAQ-BASE mother board)
68-pin amplimite series (AMP Nr. 174339-6)
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, MDAQ | 10-79
Module
Input type
Ranges
Strain gage (full, half, and
1/4 bridge, incl. shunt cal
and balance) for strain gage
applications
14 ranges from ±0.5 to 1000 mV/V
(@ 5V excitation)
Voltage up to ±10V
15 ranges from ±2.5 V to ±10 V
IEPE via MSI-BR-ACC
7 ranges from ±0.25 mV to ±10V
Voltage via MSI-BR-V200
6 ranges from ±10 to ±200 V
Thermocouples via MSI-BRTH-J, -K, -T
Full range of thermocouple type
RTD via MSI-BR-RTD
-200° to 1000°C, and 0 to 6.5 kΩ
Strain gage (full and half
bridge) for strain gage
sensors
14 ranges from ±0.5 to 1000 mV/V
(@ 5V excitation)
Voltage up to ±10V
15 ranges from ±2.5 V to ±10 V
IEPE via MSI-BR-ACC
7 ranges from ±0.25 mV to ±10V
Voltage via MSI-BR-V200
6 ranges from ±10 to ±200 V
Thermocouples via MSI-BRTH series
Full range of thermocouple type
RTD via MSI-BR-RTD
-200° to 1000°C, and 0 to 6.5 kΩ
Voltage up to ±200V
13 ranges from ±0.125 to ±200 V 2)
IEPE via MSI-BR-ACC
7 ranges from ±0.25 mV to ±10V
RTD via MSI-BR-RTD
-200° to 1000°C, and 0 to 6.5 kΩ
8
Voltage up to ±200V
8
8
#
Chs
MDAQ-SUB-STG-D
Connector: DB9
MSI
V
8
MSI
MSI
MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE-D
Connector: DB9
TEDS
√
BW: 30 kHz
HF: -EX: 0 to 12 VDC
√
BW: 30 kHz
HF: 0.16 Hz
EX: 0 to 12 VDC
EX: ±15 VDC
√
BW: 300 kHz
EX: 0 to 12 VDC
EX: ±15 VDC
13 ranges from ±0.125 to ±200 V
--
BW: 300 kHz
HF: -EX: --
IEPE or voltage up to ±10V
8 ranges from ±125 mV to ±10 V
√
BW: 300 kHz
HF: 0.16 Hz
EX: 4/8 mA
IEPE or voltage up to ±10V
8 ranges from ±125 mV to ±10 V
√
BW: 300 kHz
HP: 0.16 and
3.4 Hz
EX: 4/8 mA
MSI
V
8
MSI
MSI
MDAQ-SUB-V200-D
Connector: DB9
V
MSI
8
MSI
MDAQ-SUB-V200-BNC
Connector: BNC
V
MDAQ-SUB-ACC-BNC
Connector: BNC
MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A-BNC
Connector: BNC
(same image as above)
Bandwidth
High-pass
Filter
Excitation
-- 1) When excitation is chosen on any channel of an MDAQ-SUB module, it is the same for all 8 channels of that module.
⇒⇒ 2) We recommend not exceeding 50Vrms on the DSUB input connector for safety reasons
10-80 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
MDAQ-SUB-STG 8-channel Strain Gage/Bridge module
Sensor compatibilty:
Full bridge sensors, 1/2 bridge sensors, 1/4 bridge sensors,
Voltages up to ±10V, Potentiometric/ohmic sensors
Special functions:
Built-in bridge completion, built-in shunt resistors,
Software selectable auto-balance
Excitation programmable in 1 mV steps from 0 to 12VDC
Sense lines for the most accurate measurements
Ranges: 15 input ranges from ±2.5mV to ±10V
Bandwidth: 30 kHz
Input configuration: Differential (not isolated)
Compatibility:
Plugs into any MDAQ-BASE card
Signal connection:
-D: Banana plugs (standard)
-L: 8-pin LEMO connector (optional)
V
MDAQ-SUB-STG specifications
Parameter
MDAQ-SUB-STG
Gain:
0.5 to 2000
Input ranges @ 5VDC excitation:
±2.5, 5, 10, 20, 25, 50, 100, 200, 250, 500, 1000, 1250, 2500, 5000, 10 000 mV ±0.5, 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 20,
40, 50, 100, 200, 250, 500, 1000 mV/V
Input impedance:
>100 MΩ
Input noise:
3.5 nV * √Hz
Typ. input offset drift:
0.5 μV/K (for ranges < 200 mV)
DC Accuracy
(High Gain)
±2.5mV;5mV/V;10mV/V;±25mV
20mV
50mV
±100mV to ±200mV
(with correction table applied)
±0.03% of reading ±15μV [±3μV/V @5 Vexc] ±0.03% of reading ±0.12% of range ±0.03% of reading ±0.06% of range ±0.03% of reading ±0.03% of range
(no correction table applied)
±0.15% of reading ±15μV [±3μV/V @5 Vexc]
±0.03% of reading ±0.12% of range
±0.03% of reading ±0.06% of range
±0.03% of reading ±0.03% of range
DC Accuracy
±0.250 to ±1V
±1.25V; ±2.5V
±5; 10V
(with correction table applied) ±0.03% of reading 400μV [±80μV/V @5 Vexc]
±0.03% of reading ±1mV
±0.03% of reading ±0.03% of range
(no correction table applied)
±0.15% of reading 400μV [±80μV/V @5 Vexc]
±0.15% of reading ±1mV
±0.15% of reading ±0.03% of range
(Low Gain)
Gain drift @ 5VDC excitation:
10 ppm/K of range ±0.02 μV/V/K
Excitation voltage:
0 to 12 VDC, programable in 1 mV steps. (5 VDC default)
Excitation accuracy:
±0.05 % ±0.7 mV
Excitation drift:
±10 ppm/K ±50 μV/K
Excitation protection:
Continuous short to ground
Excitation current limit:
50 mA/channel
Bridge types:
4- or 6-wire full bridge
3- or 5-wire 1⁄2 bridge with internal completion (software selectable)
3- wire Quarter bridge with internal 120 Ohm and 350 Ohm completion (software selectable)
Shunt resistor:
Internal 100 k and 50 k Resistor (software selectable)
Completion and Shunt resistor accuracy:
0.05% 5ppm/°K
Bridge resistance:
120 Ohm to 10 k Ohm
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, MDAQ | 10-81
Parameter
MDAQ-SUB-STG
Automatic bridge balance:
Absolute Voltage
mV/V @ 5V EXC
±10mV
±100mV
±0.5V
±5V
±2mV/V
±20mV/V
±100mV/V
±1000mV/V
2.5mV to 20mV
25mV to 200mV
250mV to 1V
2V to 10V
μm/m @ 5VEXC
(k=2 quarter bridge)
±4,000μm/m
±40,000μm/m
±200,000μm/m
±2,000,000μm/m
-3 dB Bandwidth:
30 kHz
Filters (low-pass):
See MDAQ-FILT specification (option)
Typ. SNR @ 30 kHz [1 kHz] and
@ 5 VDC excitation
64 dB [82 dB] @ 1 mV/V
82 dB [96 dB] @ 50 mV/V
Typ. CMR @ 0.1 mV/V [1 mV/V] and
@ 5 VDC excitation
125 dB [120 dB] @ DC
115 dB [110 dB] @ 400 Hz
110 dB [105 dB] @ 1 kHz
Input isolation:
N/A (input is differential but not isolated)
Common Mode Voltage:
12V maximum
Input over-voltage protection:
±25 VDC
Output voltage:
±5 V
Output resistance:
< 10 Ω
Output current:
5 mA max.
Output protection:
Continuous short to ground
TEDS compatible 1)
Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS2406, DS2430A, DS2432, DS2433
Power consumption:
@ 5 VDC excitation
@ 5 VDC excitation
@ 10 VDC excitation
Standard operating temperature:
350 Ohm 16 Channels typ. 8 W
120 Ohm 16 Channels typ. 15 W
350 Ohm 16 Channels typ. 15 W
0 °C to 70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F)
1) When MSI modules are used, the TEDS interface is used by the MSI, and is not available to any sensor that you may connect
Module Pin-outs (all 8 inputs are the same)
⇒⇒ CAUTION: The sensor shield can be connected to
either pin 4 (SUB-D version only) or the housing of the 9-pin SUB-D / 8-pin LEMO connector, depending on your application.
⇒⇒ If signals above 60 V may appear, don’t use
the metal housing of SUBD connector.
PIN
Function
1
EXC+
2
IN+
3
Sense -
4
GND
5
+15VDC (50 mA)
6
Sense +
7
IN-
8
EXC-
9
TEDS
10-82 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Full bridge signal connection
6-wire and 4-wire sensor connection
Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.
Sense lines MUST be connected to the excitation also when 4-wire connection is used.
6-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor
4-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector
Half bridge signal connection
5-wire and 3-wire sensor connection, and potentiometric sensors
5-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor
3-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector
Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.
A potentiometer can be seen similar to a half bridge sensor with ±500 mV/V sensitivity. Therefore potentiometric sensors can be
measured with bridge amplifiers. The advantages of using the MDAQ-STG for potentiometric measurements is by adjusting the
offset and range, you can focus on a certain potentiometer position with higher resolution. The scaling is ±500 mV/V equals ±50
% of potentiometer position.
-- 1) ‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, MDAQ | 10-83
Quarter bridge signal connection
3-wire sensor connection
(Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor)
⇒⇒ Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6 must be connected!
-- ‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.
-- The 3-wire quarter bridge is only able to compensate symmetrical wire resistance
Other measurement modes and hook-ups
Voltage and microvolt measurement signal connection
⇒⇒ CAUTION: If the excitation is not used for sensor supply it has to be deactivated by setting it
to 0 V.
10-84 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Sensor with 15VDC supply, and voltage output
Why More Wires are Better...
Sensitivity: For sensor wiring typically copper cables are used. For example a 120 Ω full bridge connected with
four 0.14 mm2 cables will have an sensitivity error of 2.1 % due to the 1.27 Ω wire resistance. But with 6-wire
technology this can be completely compensated!
Temperature drift:
Intial error
Drift after 10°C warm up
Offset
Sensitivity
Offset
Sensitivity
2-wire
25183 μm/m
-4.97 %
956 μm/m
-0.18 %
3-wire
0 μm/m
-2.6 %
0 μm/m
-0.01 %
4-wire
0 μm/m
0.0 %
0 μm/m
0.00 %
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, MDAQ | 10-85
10-86 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE 8-channel Bridge module
Sensor compatibilty:
Full bridge sensors, 1/2 bridge sensors
Voltages up to ±10V, Potentiometric/ohmic sensors
Special functions:
Built-in bridge completion for half bridge
AC/DC coupling software selectable
Software selectable auto-balance
Several selectable excitation voltages
Sense lines for the most accurate measurements
Ranges: 15 input ranges from ±2.5mV to ±10V
Bandwidth: 30 kHz
Input configuration: Differential (not isolated)
Compatibility:
Plugs into any MDAQ-BASE card
Signal connection:
-D: Banana plugs (standard)
-L: 8-pin LEMO connector (optional)
MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE specifications
V
Parameter
MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE
Gain:
0.5 to 2000
Input ranges @ 5VDC excitation:
±2.5, 5, 10, 20, 25, 50, 100, 200, 250, 500, 1000, 1250, 2500, 5000, 10 000 mV ±0.5, 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 20,
40, 50, 100, 200, 250, 500, 1000 mV/V
Input impedance:
1 MΩ
Input noise:
3.5 nV * √Hz
Typ. input offset drift:
0.5 μV/K (for ranges < 200 mV)
DC Accuracy
(High Gain)
±2.5mV;5mV/V;10mV/V;±25mV
20mV
50mV
±100mV to ±200mV
(with correction table applied)
±0.03% of reading ±15μV [±3μV/V @5 Vexc] ±0.03% of reading ±0.12% of range ±0.03% of reading ±0.06% of range ±0.03% of reading ±0.03% of range
(no correction table applied)
±0.15% of reading ±15μV [±3μV/V @5 Vexc]
±0.03% of reading ±0.12% of range
±0.03% of reading ±0.06% of range
±0.03% of reading ±0.03% of range
DC Accuracy
±0.250 to ±1V
±1.25V; ±2.5V
±5; 10V
(with correction table applied) ±0.03% of reading 400μV [±80μV/V @5 Vexc]
±0.03% of reading ±1mV
±0.03% of reading ±0.03% of range
(no correction table applied)
±0.15% of reading 400μV [±80μV/V @5 Vexc]
±0.15% of reading ±1mV
±0.15% of reading ±0.03% of range
(Low Gain)
Gain drift @ 5VDC excitation:
10 ppm/K of range ±0.02 μV/V/K
Excitation voltage:
0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5V (default) and 10 VDC (software selectable)
Excitation accuracy:
±0.05 % ±0.7 mV
Excitation drift:
±10 ppm/K ±50 μV/K
Excitation protection:
Continuous short to ground
Excitation current limit:
50 mA/channel
Bridge types:
4- or 6-wire full bridge
3- or 5-wire 1⁄2 bridge with internal completion (software selectable)
Completion and Shunt resistor accuracy:
0.05% 5ppm/°K
Bridge resistance:
120 Ohm to 10 k Ohm
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, MDAQ | 10-87
Parameter
MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE
Automatic bridge balance:
Absolute Voltage
mV/V @ 5V EXC
±10mV
±100mV
±0.5V
±5V
±2mV/V
±20mV/V
±100mV/V
±1000mV/V
2.5mV to 20mV
25mV to 200mV
250mV to 1V
2V to 10V
μm/m @ 5VEXC
(k=2 quarter bridge)
±4,000μm/m
±40,000μm/m
±200,000μm/m
±2,000,000μm/m
-3 dB Bandwidth:
30 kHz
Filters (low-pass):
See MDAQ-FILT specification (option)
Typ. SNR @ 30 kHz [1 kHz] and
@ 5 VDC excitation
64 dB [82 dB] @ 1 mV/V
82 dB [96 dB] @ 50 mV/V
Typ. CMR @ 0.1 mV/V [1 mV/V] and
@ 5 VDC excitation
125 dB [120 dB] @ DC
115 dB [110 dB] @ 400 Hz
110 dB [105 dB] @ 1 kHz
Input isolation:
N/A (input is differential but not isolated)
Common Mode Voltage:
12V maximum
Input over-voltage protection:
±25 VDC
Output voltage:
±5 V
Output resistance:
< 10 Ω
Output current:
5 mA max.
Output protection:
Continuous short to ground
TEDS compatible 1)
Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS2406, DS2430A, DS2432, DS2433
Power consumption for 16 channels:
@ 5 VDC excitation
@ 5 VDC excitation
@ 10 VDC excitation
@ 10 VDC excitation
350 Ohm @ 10V Exc. typ. 15 W
120 Ohm @ 5V typ. 15 W
350 Ohm max. @ 15 W max.
120 Ohm @ 15 W
Standard operating temperature:
0 °C to 70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F)
1) When MSI modules are used, the TEDS interface is used by the MSI, and is not available to any sensor that you may connect
Module Pin-outs (all 8 inputs are the same)
⇒⇒ CAUTION: The sensor shield can be connected
to either pin 4 (SUB-D version only) or the
housing of the 9-pin SUB-D / 8-pin LEMO connector, depending on your application.
⇒⇒ If signals above 60 V may appear, don’t use the
metal housing of SUBD connector.
PIN
Function
1
EXC+
2
IN+
3
Sense -
4
GND
5
+15VDC (50 mA)
6
Sense +
7
IN-
8
EXC-
9
TEDS
10-88 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Full bridge signal connection
6-wire and 4-wire sensor connection
Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.
Sense lines MUST be connected to the excitation also when 4-wire connection is used.
6-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor
4-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector
Half bridge signal connection
5-wire and 3-wire sensor connection, and potentiometric sensors
5-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor
3-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector
Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.
A potentiometer can be seen similar to a half bridge sensor with ±500 mV/V sensitivity. Therefore potentiometric sensors can be
measured with bridge amplifiers. The advantages of using the MDAQ-STG for potentiometric measurements is by adjusting the
offset and range, you can focus on a certain potentiometer position with higher resolution. The scaling is ±500 mV/V equals ±50
% of potentiometer position.
-- 1) ‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.
--
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, MDAQ | 10-89
Other measurement modes and hook-ups
Voltage and microvolt measurement signal connection
⇒⇒ CAUTION: If the excitation is not used for sensor supply it has to be deactivated by setting it to 0 V.
Sensor with 15VDC supply, and voltage output
Why More Wires are Better...
Sensitivity: For sensor wiring typically copper cables are used. For example a 120 Ω full bridge connected with
four 0.14 mm2 cables will have an sensitivity error of 2.1 % due to the 1.27 Ω wire resistance. But with 6-wire
technology this can be completely compensated!
Temperature drift:
Intial error
Drift after 10°C warm up
Offset
Sensitivity
Offset
Sensitivity
2-wire
25183 μm/m
-4.97 %
956 μm/m
-0.18 %
3-wire
0 μm/m
-2.6 %
0 μm/m
-0.01 %
4-wire
0 μm/m
0.0 %
0 μm/m
0.00 %
10-90 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
MDAQ-SUB-V200 Differential Voltage Input module
Sensor compatibilty:
Special features:
Measuring ranges: Bandwidth: Input configuration: Compatibility:
Signal connection:
Voltages, and low currents with appropriate shunt
The DSUB version has sensor power on board,
and is TEDS compatible
Low and high ranges from ±0.125 V to ±200 V
300 kHz
Differential (not isolated)
Plugs into any MDAQ-BASE card
-BNC: BNC jacks (standard)
-D: 9-pin DSUB connector
V
MDAQ-SUB-V200 specifications
Parameter
MDAQ-SUB-V200
Input ranges:
Divider OFF (higher voltage ranges)
Divider ON lower voltage ranges)
±0.125 V, 0.25 V, 0.5 V, 1 V, 1.25 V, 2.5 V, 5 V, 10 V (12 V max CMV)
±2.5 V, 5 V, 10 V, 20 V, 25 V, 50 V, 100 V, 200 V (250 V max CMV)
Input impedance:
1 MΩ to GND, 2 MΩ differential
DC accuracy:
±0.125 to ±1V
±1.25V; ±2.5V
±5; ±10V
(Divider OFF)
(with correction table applied)
±0.03% of reading
±400 μV ±0.03% of reading
±1 mV ±0.02% of reading ±0.03% of range
(without correction table applied)
±0.15% of reading
400 µV
±0.15% of reading
1 mV
±0.15% of reading
±0.03% of range
DC accuracy:
±2.5 to ±20V
±25V; ±50V
±100; ±200V
(Divider ON)
(with correction table applied)
±0.06% of reading
±8 mV ±0.03% of reading
±20 mV ±0.02% of reading ±0.03% of range
(without correction table applied)
±0.25% of reading
8 mV
±0.25% of reading
20 mV
±0.25% of reading
±0.03% of range
Gain drift:
Input offset drift:
125 mV to 10 V
2.5 V to 200 V
typ. 15 ppm/K (max. 40 ppm/K)
(Divider OFF)
(Divider ON)
Over voltage protection:
-3 dB Bandwidth:
typ. 10 μV/K (max. 20 μV/K)
typ. 100 μV/K (max. 200 μV/K)
±250 VDC
(Divider OFF)
(Divider ON)
Channel separation @ 10 kHz:
300 kHz (200 kHz at range 0.125 V and 1.25 V)
300 kHz (200 kHz at range 2.5 V and 25 V)
> 80 dB
CMRR @ 50 Hz (@ 1 kHz)
(Divider OFF)
(Divider ON)
Typ. SNR @ 50 kHz BW
±0.125 V and ±0.25 V
±0.5 V to ±10 V
(Divider OFF)
±2.5 V and ±10 V
±10 V to ±25 V
±25 V to ±200 V
(Divider ON)
> 94 dB (> 80 dB)
> 70 dB (> 56 dB)
> 87 dB
> 96 dB
> 84 dB
> 88 dB
< 93 dB
Programmable sensor supply (1)
Sensor supply accuracy(1)
Fixed sensor supply (1)
0 to 12 V short circuit protected;
50mA current limmitation ±0.05 % ±2 mV
±15 V (50 mA)
Output voltage:
±5 V
Output impedance:
5Ω
Output current:
±20 mA
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, MDAQ | 10-91
Parameter
MDAQ-SUB-V200
RS485 interface for module control:
Yes
Power supply:
±15 VDC
Power consumption:
typ. 4.5 W / 10 W
Sensor connection:
-BNC: -D:
TEDS support:
Yes (-D model only!), compatible with chips DS2406, DS2430A, DS2432, DS2433
Standard operating temperature:
0 °C to 70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F)
BNC connector, female
9-pin DSUB connector, female
1) Applies to the MDAQ-SUB-V-200-D model only (DSUB connector)
Module Pin-outs (all 8 inputs are the same)
MDAQ-SUB-V-200-BNC version
Hot: IN+
Shield: INPIN
DSUB-9 connector
MDAQ-SUB-V-200-D module (typ x 8)
1
TEDS
2
IN+
3
Reserved
4
GND
5
+15V sensor supply
6
0 - 12VDC sensor supply (software
programmable)
metal housing of SUBD connector.
7
IN-
8
Reserved
⇒⇒ Note - for safety reasons, refer to your
9
-15V sensor supply
MDAQ-SUB-V-200-D version
See table >
⇒⇒ If signals above 60 V may appear, don’t use the
local/government regulations about the
maximum voltage that may be applied
to BNC or DSUB connectors!
10-92 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
MDAQ-SUB-V200 sensor connections
Sensor with differential output, module powered
Sensor with common ground
Loop-powered sensor, ext. shunt
Single-ended connection
Current measurement, external shunt
Potentiometric connection
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, MDAQ | 10-93
Avoiding Common Mode Issues
In contrast to isolated amplifiers the input common voltage range is limited at differential amplifiers. The measurement configuration below shows the possibilities to measure the current of a 24 V supplied system.
The optimum input range in that case is 500 mV. That will work fine for CH1 in the picture, but not for the CH0.
This channel will exceed the maximum common mode voltage and go into overflow.
With the MDAQ-SUB-V-200 module, there are several ranges which overlap between the 12V and 250V max
CMV ranges. This is intentionally done to provide you with more options when it comes to choosing the best possible fit of range/resolution/common mode.
The max. CMV is shown here within the software (analog channel setup dialog):
Notice that in the screen shot above left, the CMV is shown to be 12V max, whereas it is 250V max in the screen shot above
right.
⇒⇒ Always pay attention to the max CMV which is listed on the channel setup screen, when
you select a given range within the software.
10-94 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
MDAQ-SUB-ACC IEPE Accelerometer module
Sensor compatibilty:
Special features:
Modes:
Bandwidth: Isolation: Compatibility:
Signal connection:
IEPE constant current accelerometers
and microphones, and ±10V max. signals
Single ended or differential input mode
AC/DC coupling
300 kHz
N/A
Plugs into any MDAQ-BASE card
BNC connector
V
MDAQ-SUB-ACC specifications
Parameter
MDAQ-SUB-ACC
Input voltage ranges:
±0.125 V, 0.25 V, 0.5 V, 1 V, 1.25 V, 2.5 V, 5 V, 10 V
Gain:
0.5, 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 20, 40
Input modes:
Voltage modes
IEPE or low voltage
Single-ended or differential
AC or DC coupling
Input impedance:
1 MΩ
DC Accuracy:
(with correction table applied)
±0.03% of reading
±400 μV ±0.03% of reading
±1 mV ±0.02% of reading ±0.03% of range
±0.125 to ±1V
±1.25V; ±2.5V
±5;10V
Gain drift:
typ. 10 ppm/K (max. 20 ppm/K)
Input offset drift:
typ. 3 μV/K (max. 12 μV/K)
Over voltage protection:
IN+ differential ±40 V
IN- differential: max ±40 V
IN- Single ended: max 300 mA
Max common mode voltage:
12 V (differential mode)
-3 dB Bandwidth:
300 kHz (200 kHz at range 1.25 V and 0.125 V)
Channel separation @ 10 kHz:
> 96 dB
CMR @ 50 Hz (@ 1 kHz):
> 94 dB (> 80 dB)
Typ. SNR @ 50 kHz bandwidth:
Range ±0.125 V
Range ±0.25 V
Range ±0.5 V to ±1.25 V
Range ±2.5 V to ±10 V
> 87 dB
> 93 dB
> 96 dB
> 100 dB
Sensor excitation:
4 or 8 mA, 5 % up to 24 VDC
Current noise:
150 nA * sqrt (Hz)
RS485 interface for module control:
Yes
Power supply voltage:
±15 VDC
Output voltage:
±5 V
Output impedance:
5Ω
(without correction table applied)
±0.15% of reading
400 µV
±0.15% of reading
1 mV
±0.15% of reading
±0.03% of range
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, MDAQ | 10-95
Parameter
MDAQ-SUB-ACC
Power consumption:
typ. 10 W (max 12 W @ 8 mA sensor excitation)
TEDS support:
Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS 2406, DS 2430A, DS 2432, DS2433
Standard operating temperature:
0 °C to 70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F)
Module Pin-outs (all 8 inputs are the same)
MDAQ-SUB-ACC-BNC version
HOT: IN+
SHIELD: IN-
Typical Sensor Hook-ups
Above left: IEPE sensor mode Above right: Voltage input mode
For constant current powered sensors (IEPE) the current source is switched on and the minus input of the BNC
is connected to GND. The input coupling is switched to AC. In this mode the TEDS interface circuit is activated so
that it can read the sensor information from IEEE 1451.4 compliant sensors (the TEDS interface is disabled in
the voltage mode).
In all voltage measurement modes the current source is disconnected from the input signal.
The position of the GND switch defines if the amplifier is used for differential or singled-ended input configuration. The allowed input voltage range (common mode voltage) is limited to 12 V.
-- NOTE: If floating input sources (like batteries) are connected to the MDAQ-SUB-ACC the amplifier has to
be used in single ended configuration (GND-switch ON)! Otherwise the input may be out of the maximum
input voltage range!
-- In differential mode as well as in single ended mode AC or DC coupling is possible. The standard high
pass filter frequency is 3 Hz in AC-mode. Please contact DEWETRON for other frequencies.
⇒⇒ The constant current supply (4 or 8 mA) that you set on one channel, will apply to all 8 chan-
nels of this MDAQ-SUB module. However, other MDAQ-SUB modules may be set to different
constant current levels.
10-96 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A IEPE Accelerometer module
Sensor compatibilty:
Special features:
Modes:
Bandwidth: Isolation: Compatibility:
Signal connection:
IEPE constant current accelerometers and
microphones, and ±10V max voltages
Two selectable high-pass filters
Single ended, AC/DC coupling
300 kHz
N/A
Plugs into any MDAQ-BASE card
-BNC:
BNC connector
V
MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A specifications
Parameter
MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A
Input voltage ranges:
±0.125 V, 0.25 V, 0.5 V, 1 V, 1.25 V, 2.5 V, 5 V, 10 V
Gain:
0.5, 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 20, 40
Input modes:
Voltage modes
IEPE or low voltage
Single-ended only
AC or DC coupling
Input impedance:
1 MΩ
DC Accuracy:
(with correction table applied)
±0.03% of reading
±400 μV ±0.03% of reading
±1 mV ±0.02% of reading ±0.03% of range
±0.125 to ±1V
±1.25V; ±2.5V
±5;10V
Gain drift:
typ. 10 ppm/K (max. 20 ppm/K)
Input offset drift:
typ. 3 μV/K (max. 12 μV/K)
Over voltage protection:
IN+ ±40 V
IN- Single ended: max 300 mA
Max common mode voltage:
±12 V (differential mode)
-3 dB Bandwidth:
300 kHz (200 kHz at range 1.25 V and 0.125 V)
Channel separation @ 10 kHz:
> 96 dB
CMR @ 50 Hz (@ 1 kHz):
> 94 dB (> 80 dB)
Typ. SNR @ 50 kHz bandwidth:
Range ±0.125 V
Range ±0.25 V
Range ±0.5 V to ±1.25 V
Range ±2.5 V to ±10 V
> 87 dB
> 93 dB
> 96 dB
> 100 dB
Sensor excitation:
4 or 8 mA, 5 % up to 24 VDC
Current noise:
150 nA * sqrt (Hz)
RS485 interface for module control:
Yes
Power supply voltage:
±15 VDC
Output voltage:
±5 V
Output impedance:
5Ω
Power consumption:
typ. 10 W (max 12 W @ 8 mA sensor excitation)
(without correction table applied)
±0.15% of reading
400 µV
±0.15% of reading
1 mV
±0.15% of reading
±0.03% of range
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, MDAQ | 10-97
Parameter
MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A
TEDS support:
Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS 2406, DS 2430A, DS 2432, DS2433
Standard operating temperature:
0 °C to 70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F)
Module Pin-outs (all 8 inputs are the same)
MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A-BNC version
Typical Sensor Hook-ups
Above left: IEPE sensor mode Above right: Voltage input mode
For constant current powered sensors (IEPE) the current source is switched on and the minus input of the BNC is
connected to GND. In this mode the TEDS interface circuit is activated so that it can read the sensor information
from IEEE 1451.4 compliant sensors (the TEDS interface is disabled in the voltage mode).
In all voltage measurement modes the current source is disconnected from the input signal.
The position of the GND switch defines if the amplifier is used for differential or singled-ended input configuration. The allowed input voltage range (common mode voltage) is limited to 12 V.
⇒⇒ The constant current supply (4 or 8 mA) that you set on one channel, will apply to all 8 chan-
nels of this MDAQ-SUB module. However, other MDAQ-SUB modules may be set to different
constant current levels.
10-98 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
MDAQ-FILT-5-Bx Filter card
MDAQ-FILT-5-BE: Bessel characteristics
MDAQ-FILT-5-BU: Butterworth characteristics
16 Channel 2nd order low pass filter
5 selectable filters including bypass function
5 different cut off frequencies
Discrete low noise filter design
Independent filter settings for each channel
Direct control from MDAQ-xx Amplifier series
MDAQ-FILT-5-Bx specifications
Parameter
MDAQ-FILT-5-Bx
Filter range (-3 dB):
Version MDAQ-FILT-5-BU
Version MDAQ-FILT-5-BE
Version MDAQ-FILT-5-BU-S1
Bypass bandwidth:
Filter characteristics:
30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, bypass
30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, bypass
100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz, bypass
other frequencies optionally available
> 700 kHz
-BE model
-BU model
2-Pole Bessel
2-Pole Butterworth
Attenuation slope:
40 dB/decade (12 dB/octave)
Filter Accuracy:
±1.5 dB @ fc
DC gain:
1 (0 dB)
Offset error:
Max. 1 mV (typ <0.2 mV)
Max. 0.02% of range with MDAQ-BASE-5
Input voltage range:
±10 VPP
Channel separation @ 50 kHz:
> 96 dB
CMR @ 50 Hz (@ 1 kHz):
> 94 dB (> 80 dB)
Input configuration:
Designed to work with MDAQ-BASE-5 mother board
Output configuration:
Single-ended
S/NR @ bandwidth:
> 100 dB
Output impedance:
5Ω
Output current:
20 mA max.
Output connector:
68-pin Amplimite series (AMP Nr. 174339-6), SCSI II Type
Power supply:
±7.5 V to ±15 V direct via MDAQ-BASE
Power consumption:
typ. 3 W
Dimensions:
175 x 61 x 14 mm (6.9 x 2.4 x 0.9 in.)
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, MDAQ | 10-99
MDAQ-AAF4-5-Bx Filter card
MDAQ-AAF4-5-BE: Bessel characteristics
MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU: Butterworth characteristics
16 Channel 4th order low pass filter
5 selectable filters including bypass function
5 different cut off frequencies
Discrete low noise filter design
Independent filter settings for each channel
Direct control from MDAQ-xx Amplifier series
MDAQ-AAF4-5-Bx specifications
Parameter
MDAQ-AAF4-5-Bx
Filter range (-3 dB):
version MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU
version MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU-S1
version MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU-S2
version MDAQ-AAF4-5-BE-S1
Bypass bandwidth:
Filter characteristics:
100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz, bypass
163 Hz, 500 Hz, 2.5 kHz, 10 kHz, bypass, bypass
10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, 20 kHz, bypass
100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, 20 kHz, 30 kHz, bypass
other frequencies optionally available
> 700 kHz
-BE model
-BU model
4-Pole Bessel
4-Pole Butterworth
Attenuation slope:
80 dB/decade (24 dB/octave)
Filter Accuracy:
±1.5 dB @ fc
DC gain:
1 (0 dB)
Offset error:
Max. 1 mV (typ <0.2 mV)
Max. 0.02% of range with MDAQ-BASE-5
Input voltage range:
±10 VPP
Channel separation @ 50 kHz:
> 96 dB
CMR @ 50 Hz (@ 1 kHz):
> 94 dB (> 80 dB)
Input configuration:
Designed to work with MDAQ-BASE-5 mother board
Output configuration:
Single-ended
S/NR @ bandwidth:
> 100 dB
Output impedance:
5Ω
Output current:
20 mA max.
Output connector:
68-pin Amplimite series (AMP Nr. 174339-6), SCSI II Type
Power supply:
±7.5 V to ±15 V direct via MDAQ-BASE
Power consumption:
typ. 3 W
Dimensions:
175 x 61 x 14 mm (6.9 x 2.4 x 0.9 in.)
10-100 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
General EPAD2/CPAD2 module specifications
Environmental:
Temp. range storage: Temp. range operating:
Enhanced temperature range:
Rel. humidity (MIL202): RFI susceptibility:
-30 °C to +85 °C (-22 °F to 185 °F)
-5 °C to +60 °C
(23 °F to 140 °F)
upon request and special order
0 to 95 % at 60 °C, non-condensing
±0.5 % span error at 400 MHz, 5 W, 3 m
All specifications within this manual are valid at 25 °C.
All modules are produced according to ISO9001 and ISO14001.
EPAD2/CPAD2 Series Common Information
Calibration information
All DEWETRON modules are calibrated at 25°C after a warmup time
of 30 minutes and meet their specifications when leaving the factory. The time interval for recalibration depends
on environmental conditions. Typically, the calibration should be checked once a year.
Calibration certificates are available from DEWETRON as an option. DEWETRON offers several types:
„„ NIST traceable DEWETRON calibration certificate (USA CAL LAB only)
„„ ISO traceable DEWETRON certificate (European CAL LAB only)
„„ Calibration certificate according to ÖKD (equivalent to DKD)
EPAD2 RS-232/485 interface
EPAD2 series modules are controlled via RS-485 interface, and they require this interface for all data transfers
The DEWE-3210 and DEWE-3211 include an internal RS-232/485 converter and interface. This converter
allows communication with all Dewetron signal conditioning modules. To communicate with the modules, the RS232 interface must be set to the following parameters:
baud rate:
data bits: parity: stop bits: handshake: 9600
8
no parity
1
not required
CPAD2 CAN BUS interface
CPAD2 series modules are controlled via the industry standard CAN BUS over CAN 2.0b protocol, and they
require this interface for all data transfers. CAN BUS is an option for both the DEWE-3210 and DEWE-3211
instruments, and must be installed at the factory in order for this interface to be available for CPAD2 connection.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-101
EPAD2 and CPAD2 series Modules
EPAD2 and CPAD2 overview
EPAD2 modules are external signal conditioning modules which connect to virtually any Dewetron system via the
RS485 interface, normally marked EPAD on your Dewetron system. It is marked this way on both the DEWE3210 and DEWE-3211 mainframes. However, EPAD2 series modules may also be connected to any computer
using a small interface box called the EPAD-BASE2, which allows you to connect one or more EPAD2 modules to
your computer’s RS232 or USB 2.0 interface.
CPAD2 modules are external modules which connect to any Dewetron system which has at least one CAN BUS interface. Unlike EPAD2 series modules which employ the RS485 bus for communication and data transfer, CPAD2
modules employ the CAN BUS for these functions.
Both EPAD2 and CPAD2 modules are 100% compatible with Dewetron software. The following pages will show
you how to connect and control these modules from within your system, as well as provide detailed specifications
about these modules.
EPAD2 and CPAD2 modules are available for measuring voltage, current, and temperature. Each module provides
8 inputs. They have a separate 24-bit ADC for each input channels, and provide galvanic isolation to avoid ground
loops and common mode problems. They can be daisy-chained to add more and more channels to a single interface
(CPAD2 and EPAD2 modules cannot be chained together).
EPAD2 and CPAD2 modules are not meant for dynamic/AC signals, but are intended for slowly changing (quasistatic) and DC signals. They are the ideal way to add a moderate or even large number of slow channels to your
Dewetron system in an affordable and convenient way.
Further technical details can be found within the xPAD technical reference manual, a separate document.
All specifications within this manual are valid at 25 °C.
All modules are produced according to ISO9001 and ISO14001.
xPAD2 Series Calibration Information
All DEWETRON modules are calibrated at 25°C after a warmup time of 30 minutes and meet their specifications
when leaving the factory. The time interval for recalibration depends on environmental conditions. Typically, the
calibration should be checked once a year.
Calibration certificates are available from DEWETRON as an option. DEWETRON offers several types:
„„ NIST traceable DEWETRON calibration certificate (USA CAL LAB only)
„„ ISO traceable DEWETRON certificate (European CAL LAB only)
„„ Calibration certificate according to ÖKD (equivalent to DKD)
This manual contains no calibration information. There are separate resources optionally available for MDAQ
series modules for automated calibration under Met/CAL®. The CAL-KIT contains the required cables, software
and instructions that you need to add to your own calibration lab. It does not include a calibrator or volt meter.
10-102 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Cross-reference of EPAD2 / CPAD2 modules
Module
Input type
Input ranges
Isolation
8 thermocouple connectors
Type J: xPAD2-TH8-P-J
Type K: xPAD2-TH8-P-K
Type T: xPAD2-TH8-P-T
Type U: UNIVERSAL
Type J: -210 to 1200 °C
Type K: -270 to 1372 °C
Type T: -270 to 400 °C
Type U: includes types K, J, T, E,
R, S, B, N, C, and U
EPAD2-V8
CPAD2-V8
8 isolated voltage input
channels
Physical input range: ±50 V
Software selectable: ±100 mV,
±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V,
±10 V
350 VDC (channel to
channel and channel to
BUS, power and chassis)
EPAD2-RTD8
CPAD2-RTD8
8 isolated Resistance
Temperature Detector
(RTD) channels
Resistor: 0 to 999.99 Ω
RTD:
PT100(385), PT200 (385),
PT500(385), PT1000 (385),
PT2000(385), PT100 (3961)
350 VDC (channel to
channel and channel to
BUS, power and chassis)
EPAD2-TH8-P
CPAD2-TH8-P
8 isolated voltage inputs
Supported breakout boxes:
PAD-CB8-x-P2 PAD-CB8x-M PAD-CB8-RTD
±1.5 V fixed
350 VDC (channel to
channel and channel to
BUS, power and chassis)
EPAD2-LA8
CPAD2-LA8
8 isolated current inputs
0 to 20 mA, ±20 mA, ±30 mA
350 VDC (channel to
channel and channel to
BUS, power and chassis)
EPAD2-TH8-x
CPAD2-TH8-x
(where x = J, K, T, U)
350 VDC (channel to
channel and channel to
BUS, power and chassis)
COMMENTS
Overvoltage protection:
15 VDC
Types J, K, T have typical
accuracy of ±0.4°C
Type U (universal) has
typical accuracy of ±1.4°C
Overvoltage protection:
350 VDC
DSUB25 connector - please
order PAD-CB8-B or -BNC
breakout boxes to complete
this module
Overvoltage protection:
15 VDC
LEMO connectors
Overvoltage protection:
15 VDC
DSUB25 connector - please
order PAD-CB8-J, K, T or
-RTD breakout boxes to
complete this module
Overcurrent protection:
70 mA cont.
LEMO connectors
Installing CPAD2 modules
After connecting a CPAD2 module to an unused CAN BUS
interface on your Dewetron system, run DEWESoft and go
to the HARDWARE SETTINGS screen, accessed under the
SETTINGS button. Then click on the CAN button.
Select the CAN interface that you connected the CPAD2 module to on that screen and set it to work with CPAD2 modules,
as shown in the screen shot here.
If your software does not have this selection on the CAN screen, please
obtain the CPAD2 plugin from Dewetron. This is a software addon that is
free of charge with your CPAD modules. It was included on a DVD/CD disk
when you purchased your CPAD2 module(s). Or it can be downloaded from
our FTP site.
Additional CPAD2 series modules can be daisy-chained to the first module.
The last CPAD2 module must have the terminator plugged into the last open
connector to ensure stable bus communications.
Terminator
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-103
Installing EPAD2 modules
When you purchase an EPAD2 module for an existing Dewetron system, you need to make a small change to the hardware setup of your
system so that the EPAD2 is recognized by the software.
First, connect the EPAD2 to the EPAD connector on your system. If
you plan to connect multiple EPAD2 modules, start with one first and
then add the others one at a time.
When connected properly, the EPAD2 LED should light up, indicating that it is powered. If this does not happen, check your cabling and
verify it with Dewetron if necessary.
Now run DEWESoft. Click the SETTINGS button near the top right of
the screen and then click HARDWARE SETUP. Make sure you are looking at the ANALOG page of this dialog box. It looks like
this:
Notice the area that we have drawn a red rectangle around in the screen shot above: this is where you need to input the number
of EPAD2 modules that you want to add. Enter that number here. Then click OK to close this dialog box.
Click Ch Setup to see the list of ANALOG channels in DEWESoft. Scroll to the very bottom of this list and you will see that four
empty channels have been added. Assuming that one EPAD2 module is connected already to the bus, double-click the first empty
EPAD2 channel in the list within the AMPLIFIER column:
Double-click here
The new empty channels are outlined in red above. Now DOUBLE-CLICK on the first amplifier button, that we have outlined
in blue above. That will cause DEWESoft to pop up the question “what should be done with the module?”, at which point you
should click the FILL button.
When you click FILL, DEWESoft will prompt you to press the black button on the EPAD2 module. Use a paperclip or thin pencil
lead to do that, and the module will be addressed to this slot number, and it will show up here on the Setup screen. Use the SET
CH. button on the far right to configure the eight channels of this module.
Now connect the next EPAD2 module and repeat these steps, moving down to the next empty amplifier button, and so on, until
all EPAD2 modules have been installed.
Be sure to plug the terminator into the last EPAD2 module (even if there is only one EPAD2 module).
10-104 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
EPAD2-TH8-X and CPAD2-TH8-X
Intelligent amplifier with integrated 24-bit A/D conversion
8 input channels for thermocouple types J, K, T, and U (universal)
Inputs isolated to 350 VDC
Modules daisy-chain together to add more and more channels
EPAD2 series uses RS485 interface
CPAD2 series uses CAN 2.0B interface
Specifications
Parameter
EPAD2-TH8-x and CPAD2-TH8-x
Input channels:
8 isolated thermocouple channels
Input signals:
thermocouple types depending on module
J: -210 °C to 1200 °C
K: -270 °C to 1372 °C
T: -270 °C to 400 °C
U: Supports types K, J, T, E, R, S, B, N, C, and U
Sample rate:
12.5 S/s/ch maximum
-3 dB bandwidth:
6 Hz
ADC type:
Sigma delta ADC per channel, 24-bit
(Note: CPAD2 outputs CAN data at 16-bits)
Input connector:
Standard “mini” thermocouple connector, polarized, color coded
Type K: yellow
Type J: black
Type T: blue
Type U: white
Resolution:
0.01 °C for all types
Input impedance:
typically 1.4 MΩ
Bias current:
typically 10 nA
Open thermocouple detection:
module indicates fullscale if input is open
Accuracy:
Thermocouple type J
Thermocouple type K
Thermocouple type T
Thermocouple type U
±1.0 °C @ -210 to -100 °C
±0.3 °C @ -100 to 760 °C
±0.4 °C @ 760 to 1200 °C
±1.0 °C @ -200 to -25 °C
±0.4 °C @ -25 to 1000 °C
±0.5 °C @ 1000 to 1372 °C
±1.0 °C @ -250 to -150 °C
±0.4 °C @ -150 to 400 °C
Varies according to the T/C type and range, but accuracy ±1.4 °C, typ. ±0.7 °C
Temperature drift:
typically 20 ppm/°C
Isolation voltage:
350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to Bus, Power and Chassis)
Over-voltage protection:
15 VDC
CMRR @ 50/60 Hz:
130 dB
Interface:
EPAD2 series: RS485
CPAD2 series: CAN BUS 2.0B protocol
Read-out speed:
EPAD2 series: typ. 80 ch/sec.
CPAD2 series: 12.5Hz, 10Hz, 5Hz, 2Hz, 1Hz, 0.5Hz, 0.2Hz or 0.1 Hz programmable
Bus power connector:
LEMO EGG.1B.304
Power supply voltage:
7 to 40V
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-105
Parameter
EPAD2-TH8-x and CPAD2-TH8-x
Power consumption:
0.5 W maximum
Dimensions:
Base module (W x D x H)
Mounting holes distance:
Weight:
129 x 72 x 34.2 mm (5.1 x 2.8 x 1.3 in.) incl. mounting holes
119 x 7 mm (4.7 x 0.3 in.), 4.2 mm (0.165 in.) diameter
360 g typical
xPAD2-TH8-X Dimensions
Connecting sensors
Use thermocouple sensors with standardized “mini”
thermocouple connectors. This is a polarized connector
with two flat blades, and one blade is wider than the
other. Insert the plug correctly, and do not force the
plug in the wrong way.
-- Connecting the thermocouple backwards will
result in wrong readings.
Above: typical thermocouple mini connectors, image courtesy
of Omega.com
xPAD2 interface connector
There are two identical interface connectors for power
and control. One is used to interface with either the
Dewetron system, or another xPAD2 module in a
series. The other can be used to extend the daisy-chain
another xPAD2 module from this one. The two connectors are interchangeable.
PIN
EPAD2
CPAD2
1
RS485 (A)
CAN high
2
RS485 (B)
CAN low
3
+15V supply
+15V supply
4
GND
GND
LEMO EGG.1B.304
Use the correct type
Thermocouples are color coded according to international conventions.
-- Note: Our “universal” thermocouple input is
cowwhite, to indicate that it is compatible with
multiple thermocouple types.
10-106 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
EPAD2-V8-X and CPAD2-V8-X
Intelligent amplifier with integrated 24-bit A/D conversion
8 input channels for voltages
Inputs isolated to 350 VDC
Modules daisy-chain together to add more and more channels
EPAD2 series uses RS485 interface
CPAD2 series uses CAN 2.0B interface
Specifications
Parameter
EPAD2-V8-x and CPAD2-V8-x
Input channels:
8 isolated voltage channels
Input ranges:
Physical input range: ±50 V Software selectable: ±100 mV, ±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, ±10 V
Sample rate:
12.5 S/s/ch maximum
-3 dB bandwidth:
6 Hz
ADC type:
Sigma delta ADC per channel, 24-bit
(Note: CPAD2 outputs CAN data at 16-bits)
Input connector:
Standard “mini” thermocouple connector, polarized, color coded
Type K: yellow
Type J: black
Type T: blue
Type U: white
Resolution:
1µV for all ranges
Input impedance:
typically 1.4 MΩ
Bias current:
typically 10 nA
Linearity:
0.001 %
DC accuracy:
±0.02 % of reading ±900 μV
Temperature drift:
typically 25 ppm/°C
Isolation voltage:
350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to Bus, Power and Chassis)
Over-voltage protection:
15 VDC
CMRR @ 50/60 Hz:
130 dB
Interface:
EPAD2 series: RS485
CPAD2 series: CAN BUS 2.0B protocol
Read-out speed:
EPAD2 series: typ. 80 ch/sec.
CPAD2 series: 12.5Hz, 10Hz, 5Hz, 2Hz, 1Hz, 0.5Hz, 0.2Hz or 0.1 Hz programmable
Bus power connector:
LEMO EGG.1B.304
Power supply voltage:
7 to 40V
Power consumption:
0.5 W maximum
Dimensions:
Weight:
Base module (W x D x H)
Mounting holes distance:
129 x 72 x 34.2 mm (5.1 x 2.8 x 1.3 in.) incl. mounting holes
119 x 7 mm (4.7 x 0.3 in.), 4.2 mm (0.165 in.) diameter
310 g typical
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-107
xPAD2-V8-X Dimensions
Connector pin-outs
Pin
Function
Pin
Function
1
Channel 0 (+)
13
Channel 6 (+)
2
Channel 0 (-)
14
Channel 6 (-)
3
Channel 1 (+)
15
Channel 7 (+)
4
Channel 1 (-)
16
Channel 7(-)
5
Channel 2 (+)
17
Digital input 1*
6
Channel 2 (-)
18
Digital input 2*
7
Channel 3 (+)
19
Digital input 3*
8
Channel 3 (-)
20
+12 VDC
9
Channel 4 (+)
21
Reset / Digital input 4*
10
Channel 4 (-)
22
GND
11
Channel 5 (+)
23
Reserved
12
Channel 5 (-)
24
Reserved
25
Reserved
* not supported in Dewesoft software
xPAD2 interface connector
There are two identical interface connectors for power
and control. One is used to interface with either the
Dewetron system, or another xPAD2 module in a
series. The other can be used to extend the daisy-chain
another xPAD2 module from this one. The two connectors are interchangeable.
PIN
EPAD2
CPAD2
1
RS485 (A)
CAN high
2
RS485 (B)
CAN low
3
+15V supply
+15V supply
4
GND
GND
Mating connector
PAD-OPT2
25-pin SUB-D connector with screw terminals
(optional)
LEMO EGG.1B.304
xPAD2-V8 signal interface connector
Normally this is where you plug in a break-out box,
such as the PAD-CB8-B (banana jacks) or PAD-CB8BNC (BNC connectors). But in the event that you want
to make your own cable, the pin-outs are here, and
there is a convenient mating connector with screw
terminals available for purchase.
Low cost alternative to the PAD-CB8-B and -BNC
breakout boxes, or as a building block to making
your own cable without soldering. Metal shell covers
included.
10-108 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
EPAD2-RTD8 and CPAD2-RTD8
Intelligent amplifier with integrated 24-bit A/D conversion
8 input channels for RTD sensors
Supports 2-wire and 4-wire hook-ups
Inputs isolated to 350 VDC
Modules daisy-chain together to add more and more channels
EPAD2 series uses RS485 interface
CPAD2 series uses CAN 2.0B interface
Specifications
Parameter
EPAD2-RTD8 and CPAD2-RTD8
Input channels:
8 isolated RTD channels
Input ranges:
Resistor: 0 to 999.99 Ω
RTD: PT100(385); PT200(385); PT500(385); PT1000(385); PT2000(385); PT100(3961)
Sample rate:
12.5 S/s/ch maximum
-3 dB bandwidth:
6 Hz
ADC type:
Sigma delta ADC per channel, 24-bit
(Note: CPAD2 outputs CAN data at 16-bits)
Input connector:
ERA.1S.304
Resolution:
0.01 °C for all types
Input impedance:
typically >100 MΩ
Bias current:
typically 10 nA
Connection type:
Accuracy:
2-wire, 4-wire (see diagrams on opposite page)
Pt100 a = 0.00385 ±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C ±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C ±0.8 °C @ 400 to 800 °C
Pt100 a = 0.003916
±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C
±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C
±0.8 °C @ 400 to 800 °C
Pt200 a = 0.00385
±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C
±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C
±0.8 °C @ 400 to 800 °C
Pt500 a = 0.00385 ±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C ±0.4 °C @ 100 to 250 °C
Pt1000 a = 0.00385
±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C
±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C
±0.8 °C @ 400 to 600 °C
Pt2000 a = 0.00385
±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C
±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C
±0.8 °C @ 400 to 600 °C
Temperature drift:
typically 25 ppm/°C
Isolation voltage:
350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to Bus, Power and Chassis)
Over-voltage protection:
15 VDC
CMRR @ 50/60 Hz:
130 dB
Interface:
EPAD2 series: RS485
CPAD2 series: CAN BUS 2.0B protocol
Read-out speed:
EPAD2 series: typ. 80 ch/sec.
CPAD2 series: 12.5Hz, 10Hz, 5Hz, 2Hz, 1Hz, 0.5Hz, 0.2Hz or 0.1 Hz programmable
Bus power connector:
LEMO EGG.1B.304
Power supply voltage:
7 to 40V
Power consumption:
0.5 W maximum
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-109
Parameter
Dimensions:
EPAD2-RTD8 and CPAD2-RTD8
Base module (W x D x H)
Mounting holes distance:
Weight:
129 x 72 x 34.2 mm (5.1 x 2.8 x 1.3 in.) incl. mounting holes
119 x 7 mm (4.7 x 0.3 in.), 4.2 mm (0.165 in.) diameter
310 g typical
xPAD2-RTD8 Dimensions
xPAD2-RTD8 signal interface connector
Pin
Function
1
Excitation +
2
Sense +
3
Sense -
4
Excitation -
* Shield is on the housing
RTD connections
2-wire hook-up
xPAD2 interface connector
There are two identical interface connectors for power
and control. One is used to interface with either the
Dewetron system, or another xPAD2 module in a
series. The other can be used to extend the daisy-chain
another xPAD2 module from this one. The two connectors are interchangeable.
LEMO EGG.1B.304
PIN
EPAD2
CPAD2
1
RS485 (A)
CAN high
2
RS485 (B)
CAN low
3
+15V supply
+15V supply
4
GND
GND
4-wire hook-up
ERA.1S.304.CLL
10-110 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
EPAD2-TH8 and CPAD2-TH8
Intelligent amplifier with integrated 24-bit A/D conversion
8 input channels for thermocouples or RTDs via
PAD-CB8 series break-out boxes
Inputs isolated to 350 VDC
Modules daisy-chain together to add more and more channels
EPAD2 series uses RS485 interface
CPAD2 series uses CAN 2.0B interface
Specifications
Parameter
EPAD2-TH8 and CPAD2-TH8
Input channels:
8 isolated voltage channels (prepared for thermocouple or RTD interface boxes)
Input range:
±1.5 V (fixed)
Sample rate:
12.5 S/s/ch maximum
-3 dB bandwidth:
6 Hz
ADC type:
Sigma delta ADC per channel, 24-bit
(Note: CPAD2 outputs CAN data at 16-bits)
Input connector:
SUBD 25-pin connector - please order your choice of PAD-CB8-TH or RTD series break-out boxes
Resolution:
1µV
Input impedance:
typically 1.4 MΩ
Supported break-out boxes:
PAD-CB8-x-P2 standard thermocouple breakout box (where x = J, K, or T)
PAD-CB8-x-M miniature size thermocouple breakout box (where x = J, K, or T)
PAD-CB8-RTD RTD breakout box
Temperature drift:
typically 20 ppm/°C
Isolation voltage:
350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to Bus, Power and Chassis)
Over-voltage protection:
15 VDC
CMRR @ 50/60 Hz:
130 dB
Interface:
EPAD2 series: RS485
CPAD2 series: CAN BUS 2.0B protocol
Read-out speed:
EPAD2 series: typ. 80 ch/sec.
CPAD2 series: 12.5Hz, 10Hz, 5Hz, 2Hz, 1Hz, 0.5Hz, 0.2Hz or 0.1 Hz programmable
Bus power connector:
LEMO EGG.1B.304
Power supply voltage:
7 to 40V
Power consumption:
0.5 W maximum
Dimensions:
Weight:
Base module (W x D x H)
Mounting holes distance:
129 x 72 x 34.2 mm (5.1 x 2.8 x 1.3 in.) incl. mounting holes
119 x 7 mm (4.7 x 0.3 in.), 4.2 mm (0.165 in.) diameter
310 g typical
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-111
xPAD2-TH8 Dimensions
Connector pin-outs
Pin
Function
Pin
Function
1
Channel 0 (+)
13
Channel 6 (+)
2
Channel 0 (-)
14
Channel 6 (-)
3
Channel 1 (+)
15
Channel 7 (+)
4
Channel 1 (-)
16
Channel 7(-)
5
Channel 2 (+)
17
Reserved
6
Channel 2 (-)
18
Reserved
7
Channel 3 (+)
19
Reserved
8
Channel 3 (-)
20
+12 VDC
9
Channel 4 (+)
21
Reserved
10
Channel 4 (-)
22
GND
11
Channel 5 (+)
23
Reserved / CJC
12
Channel 5 (-)
24
Reserved / CJC
25
Reserved / CJC
xPAD2 interface connector
Mating connector
There are two identical interface connectors for power
and control. One is used to interface with either the
Dewetron system, or another xPAD2 module in a
series. The other can be used to extend the daisy-chain
another xPAD2 module from this one. The two connectors are interchangeable.
PAD-OPT1
25-pin SUB-D connector with screw terminals
(optional)
PIN
EPAD2
CPAD2
1
RS485 (A)
CAN high
2
RS485 (B)
CAN low
3
+15V supply
+15V supply
4
GND
GND
LEMO EGG.1B.304
xPAD2-V8 signal interface connector
Normally this is where you plug in a break-out box,
such as the PAD-CB8-B (banana jacks) or PAD-CB8BNC (BNC connectors). But in the event that you want
to make your own cable, the pin-outs are here, and
there is a convenient mating connector with screw
terminals available for purchase.
Low cost alternative to the PAD-CB8-B and -BNC
breakout boxes, or as a building block to making your
own cable without soldering. CJC chip and metal shell
covers included. CJC chip will be preinstalled for you
on pins 23-24-25 (not shown in image above).
10-112 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
EPAD2-LA8 and CPAD2-LA8
Intelligent amplifier with integrated 24-bit A/D conversion
8 input channels for current measurements
Supports 0 to 20 mA, ±20 mA, and ±30 mA
Inputs isolated to 350 VDC
Modules daisy-chain together to add more and more channels
EPAD2 series uses RS485 interface
CPAD2 series uses CAN 2.0B interface
Specifications
Parameter
EPAD2-LA8 and CPAD2-LA8
Input channels:
8 isolated current input channels
Input ranges:
0 to 20 mA, ±20 mA; and ±30 mA
Sample rate:
12.5 S/s/ch maximum
-3 dB bandwidth:
6 Hz
ADC type:
Sigma delta ADC per channel, 24-bit
(Note: CPAD2 outputs CAN data at 16-bits)
Input connector:
LEMO EGB.1B.304
Resolution:
0.3 μA
Input impedance:
50 Ω 0.1 %
Connection type:
2-wire, 4-wire (see diagrams on opposite page)
Temperature drift:
typically 20 ppm/°C
Isolation voltage:
350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to Bus, Power and Chassis)
Over-current protection:
70 mA continuous
CMRR @ 50/60 Hz:
130 dB
Interface:
EPAD2 series: RS485
CPAD2 series: CAN BUS 2.0B protocol
Read-out speed:
EPAD2 series: typ. 80 ch/sec.
CPAD2 series: 12.5Hz, 10Hz, 5Hz, 2Hz, 1Hz, 0.5Hz, 0.2Hz or 0.1 Hz programmable
Bus power connector:
LEMO EGG.1B.304
Power supply voltage:
7 to 40V
Power consumption:
0.5 W maximum
Dimensions:
Weight:
Base module (W x D x H)
Mounting holes distance:
129 x 72 x 34.2 mm (5.1 x 2.8 x 1.3 in.) incl. mounting holes
119 x 7 mm (4.7 x 0.3 in.), 4.2 mm (0.165 in.) diameter
360 g typical
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-113
xPAD2-LA8 Dimensions
xPAD2-LA8 signal interface connector
Pin
Function
1
Power supply +
2
Current +
3
Current -
4
Power supply -
* Shield is on the housing
xPAD2 interface connector
There are two identical interface connectors for power
and control. One is used to interface with either the
Dewetron system, or another xPAD2 module in a
series. The other can be used to extend the daisy-chain
another xPAD2 module from this one. The two connectors are interchangeable.
PIN
EPAD2
CPAD2
1
RS485 (A)
CAN high
2
RS485 (B)
CAN low
3
+15V supply
+15V supply
4
GND
GND
LEMO EGG.1B.304
EGB.1B.304
10-114 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-115
11
DEWE-3213 Specifications
DEWE-3213 Input Specifications
Number of analog input channels
8
Input types directly supported
Full bridge and voltages up to ±10V
Input types supported via “smart”
MSI interfaces
IEPE accelerometers: MSI-BR-ACC
Charge accelerometers: MSI-BR-CHA-50
Higher voltages: MSI-BR-V200
RTD sensors: MSI-BR-RTD
Thermocouples: MSI-BR-TH-J, K, and T
Input types supported by passive
adapters
Half bridge: ADAP-BR-1/2-120, and -350 (Ω)
Quarter bridge: ADAP-BR-1/4-120, and -350 (Ω)
20 mA: ADAP-BR-SHUNT-20mA
5A: ADAP-BR-SHUNT-5A
Sample rate
Selectable from 1 kS/s/ch to 200 kS/s/ch simultaneous all 8 channels
Input type
Differential, not isolated
Input ranges (voltage mode)
±0.01, ±0.1, ±1, ±10 V (AC or DC)
Over-voltage protection
±70V input protection
Sensor supply voltages
12V, 400mA sensor supply (voltage mode)
±5V ±0.1% bridge sensor supply (bridge mode)
Dynamic range
107 dB @ ±10V range
DC Accuracy
±10 V range: ±0.05 % of reading, ±1 mV
±1 V range: ±0.05 % of reading, ±0.2 mV
±100 mV range: ±0.05 % of reading, ±100 μV
±10 mV range: ±0.05 % of reading, ±100 μV
Input impedance
20MΩ || 47 pF (differential) 10MΩ| | 33pF (common mode)
CMRR
> 80 dB (see separate CMRR section for further details)
Maximum CMV
±13 V common mode voltage
Signal to noise
0.1kS/s to 51.2kS/s : 105 dB
51.2ks/s to 102.4kS/s: 100 dB
102.4kS/s to 200kS/s: 75 dB
DEWE-43 EXPANSION MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
Power requirements
6-36 VDC
10-116 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Signal Input Connectors
Analog input connectors (8)
Connector: 9-pin D-SUB (female)
Mating connector: 9-pin D-SUB (male)
Function: to input analog signals to the eight dynamic measuring inputs of the DEWE-3213. Note that mating
connectors are available from Dewetron, from simple adapters from DSUB to BNC, to passive converters such as
shunt adapters for current measurement and bridge completion adapters for 1/4 and 1/2 bridge measurements, as
well as intelligent active interfaces for IEPE sensors, charge sensors, higher voltages, RTDs, and thermocouples.
See the MSI-BR series for details about active interfaces. See the ADAP series for details about passive adapters
of various kinds.
Above right: a typical MSI-BR series smart interface.
⇒⇒ Note: TEDS is available on the DEWE-3213 analog input connectors, for sensor interfacing. However,
MSI interfaces utilize the TEDS for MSI identification, therefore when an MSI interface is used, TEDS is no
longer available for sensor use on that channel.
-- See the separate list of MSI and ADAP options available for the DEWE-3213’s analog inputs
Counter/encoder connectors (8)
Connector: LEMO EGG.1B.307CLAD52
Mating connector: LEMO FGG.1B.307CLAD52
Function: used to input tachometer, TTL level pulse train, or encoder outputs for measuring and conversion.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-117
-- Note: see the COUNTER configuration section later in this guide.
CAN BUS interface connectors (2)
Connectors: 9-pin D-SUB (male)
Mating connector: 9-pin D-SUB (female)
Function: used to connect to vehicle CAN BUS interfaces. Also can be used to read data from sensors which have
a CAN BUS output.
-- Note: In addition to the CAN 2.0b protocol, the DEWE-3213 also supports J1939 and OBD II protocols.
SYNC/Expansion connectors
There are sync and USB 2.0 connectors located in the EXPANSION group. Connections to at least USB and
SYNC are required required to connect a DEWE-43 expansion module.
⇒⇒ The DEWE-43 can be powered separately, but it must be powered
⇒⇒ The ground reference does not have to be connected, but it might improve noise performance
10-118 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Sync connector (1)
Connector: LEMO EGG.00.304.CLL
Mating connector: FGG.00.304CLAD27Z)
Function: required to allow a DEWE-43-V to be added as an expansion module, to the DEWE-3213. If you don’t
connect the sync, the DEWE-43-V inputs will not show up in the hardware setup screen.
Power
Connector: LEMO EGJ.1B.302.CLA with spring loaded plastic cover
Mating connector: LEMO FGG.00.304CLAD27Z
Function: provides conditioned power to the DEWE-43-V expansion module only. 12VDC, 1.8A max.
USB 2.0 interface for DEWE-43-V only!
Connector: USB2.0 Standard-A receptacle
Mating connector: USB2.0 Standard-A plug, provided with the DEWE-43-V expansion module
Function: provides the USB interface to the DEWE-43-V expansion module
-- Note: use of the DEWE-43-V expansion module requires an upgrade of the data acquisition software
within the DEWE-3213 from DEWESoft-7-SE to DEWESoft-7-PROF (or higher).
⇒⇒ Note: Do not use these ports for anything EXCEPT connecting a DEWE-43-V expansion module!
⇒⇒ When connecting a DEWE-43-V expansion module to the DEWE-3213, do NOT use the other USB connec-
tors on the other side of the system. Use only this connector.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-119
Analog input configuration:
Block diagram of analog input (all analog inputs are identical):
The high input impedance (10MΩ ground referenced) has no distortion influence on the measured signal.
ADC:
The DEWE-3213 uses eight (8) delta-sigma A/D converters. If you sample with a data rate of 102.4 kS/s, the
ADC actually samples the input signal with 13.1072 MS/s (multiply the data rate with 128) and produces 1-bit
samples which are applied to the digital filter. The filter expands the data to 24-bits and rejects signal parts greater than 51.2 kHz (Nyquist frequency). It also re-samples the data to the more conventional rate of 102.4 kS/s.
A 1-bit quantizer introduces many quantization errors to the signal. The 1-bit, 13.1072 MS/s from the ADC carry
all information to produce 24-bit samples at 102.4 kS/s. The delta-sigma ADC converts from high speed to high
resolution by adding much random noise to the signal. In this way the resulting quantization noise is restricted to
frequencies above 100 kHz. This noise is not correlated with the useful signal and is rejected by the digital filter.
ADCs can only represent signals of a limited bandwidth. The maximum frequency you can represent is the half of
the sampling rate. This maximum frequency is also called Nyquist frequency. The bandwidth between 0 Hz and
the Nyquist frequency is called Nyquist bandwidth. Signals exceeding this frequency range can not be converted
correctly by the sampler.
For example, the sample rate is 1000 S/s, the Nyquist frequency is 500 Hz. If the input signal is a 375 Hz sine
wave, the resulting samples represent a 375 Hz sine wave. If a 625 Hz sine wave is sampled, the resulting
samples represent a 375 Hz sine wave too. This happens because signals exceeds the Nyquist frequency (500 Hz).
The represented frequency of the sine wave is the absolute value of the difference between the input frequency
and the closest integer multiple of the sampling rate (in this case 1000 Hz).
When the sampler modulates frequencies out of the Nyquist bandwidth back to the 0 to 500 Hz baseband it is
called aliasing. Signals which are not pure sine wave can have many components (harmonics) above the Nyquist frequency. These harmonics are erroneously aliased back to the baseband, added to parts of the accurately
sampled signal and produces a distorted data set. To block frequencies out of the Nyquist bandwidth, a lowpass
filter is applied to the signal before it reaches the sampler.
10-120 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Each input channel has its two pole anti-alias lowpass filter with a cutoff frequency of about 250 kHz. The very
high cutoff frequency allows an extremely flat frequency response in the bandwidth of interest and a small phase
error. The analog filter precedes the analog sampler. The analog sampler operates at 256 times the selected
sample rate for rates below 51.2 kS/s, 128 times for rates between 51.2 kS/s and 102.4 kS/s. For rates over
102.4 kS/s the oversampling is 64 times. That means, the ADC operates at 13.1072 MS/s if you select a sample
rate of 102.4 kS/s (128 * 102.4 kS/s).
The 1-bit oversampled data is passed to a digital anti-aliasing filter. This filter has no phase error and an extremely flat frequency response. It also has an extremely sharp roll-off near the cutoff frequency (0.38 to 0.494 times
the sample rate) and the rejection above 0.5465 times the sample rate is greater than 92 dB. The output stage of
the digital filter resamples higher frequencies to 24-bit samples.
The digital filter passes only signal components within the Nyquist bandwidth or within multiples of the Nyquist
bandwidth of 64, 128 or 256 times (depending on sampling rate). The analog filter rejects most noise near these
multiples. The following diagrams show the frequency response of the input circuitry.
Sample rate 0.1kS/s to 51.2kS/s:
Sample rate 51.2kS/s to 102.4kS/s:
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-121
Sample rate 102.4kS/s to 200kS/s:
The ADC samples at 64, 128 or 256 times the data rate (depending on the adjusted sample rate). Frequency
components above one half of the oversampling rate (> 32, 64 or 128) can alias. Most of this frequency range is
rejected by the digital filter. The filter can not reject components that lie close to integer multiples of the oversampling rate because it can not differentiate these components from components between 0 Hz and the Nyquist
frequency. That means, if the sample rate is 100 kS/s and a signal component is between 50 kHz and 12.8 MHz
(128 x 100 kHz), this signal will be aliased into the passband region of the digital filter and is not rejected. The
analog filter removes these components before they get to the digital filter and the sampler.
If aliasing is caused by a clipped or overranged waveform, (exceeding the voltage range of the ADC) it can’t be rejected with any filter. The ADC assumes the closest value to the actual value of the signal in its digital range when
the signal is clipping. The result of clipping is also a sudden change in the signal slope and results in corrupt digital
data with high-frequency energy. This energy is spread over the complete frequency spectrum and is aliased back
into the baseband. Do not allow the signal to exceed the input range to avoid this.
Idle channel noise (input terminated with 50Ω):
10-122 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Spectral noise - 50Ω termination – 8 averages – 16k [email protected]/s:
Spectral noise - 50Ω termination – 10 averages – 16k [email protected]/s:
Spectral noise - 50Ω termination – 10 averages – 16k [email protected]/s:
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-123
CMRR:
All eight analog channels of the DEWE-3213 are fully differential inputs with resistance of 10MΩ || 10pF. The
input voltage range is ±10V, ±1V, ±100mV and ±10mV. Because of the differential input structure, the difference
of the input (Ch x(+) – Ch x(-)) will be shown as the result of the measurement. Although the input is protected
for input voltages to ±70V, the common voltage range of each input is limited to about ±13V. If the input voltage
exceeds this range, the result is not valid even when the difference input voltage is lower than current input range.
These voltage ranges will be clipped and introduced as large errors that can be easily identified in frequency spectrum. The figure bellow show the allowable common-mode input voltages for various input voltages and measurement ranges.
10-124 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
For example: Many signal sources (function generators) and power supplies are floating sources. That means
that they are isolated from each other and from AC power line. If we connect a sensor with differential output
and floating power supply to measurement device, then GND of sensor and measurement device can have different voltage potential. This is what the measurement device see as common- mode voltage. This common-mode
voltage can range from few volts to few hundred volts, but in almost all cases this renders the measurement. To
prevent this effect, GND signals of the sensor and measurement device need to be directly connected. That way
we eliminate common-mode voltage. On DEWE-3213 this connection is possible over connector GND wire or over
“Common GND” receptacle on the housing.
Counter and digital inputs:
The DEWE-3213 is suited with synchronous 32-bit advanced counter and digital inputs. In addition to the basic
counter function like simple event counting, up/down counting and gated event counting also period time, pulse
width, two- edge separation, frequency and all encoder measurements are supported. All counter inputs can also
be used as digital inputs. In addition to the basic counter input selections, ADC Clock can also be used as counter
source. The figure bellow shows the block diagram of the counter and input overvoltage protection.
⇒⇒ Detailed technical specifications for data acquisition components, such as ORION series A/D cards, DAQ
and MDAQ series signal conditioning, and various other interfaces, can be found in their respective technical reference manuals.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 10, Conditioners, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-125
10-126 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
ORION Overview
To create instruments with dozens or even hundreds of dynamic channels, multiple ORION cards can be installed
within a single unit. All cards are synchronized via the internal sync-bus to ensure absolute simultaneous sampling
of all channels.
Key Features
„„ Simultaneous sampling
„„ Separate A/D converter channel
„„ Dozens of different models
„„ Synchronized analog, digital, counter and CAN inputs
„„ Clock output for synchronizing external devices, e.g. video cameras
„„ Sync option for synchronizing multiple systems or synchronize to IRIG or GPS
Multiple Dewetron instruments can be hardware-synchronized using the ORION-SYNC option. Depending on
distance and local preconditions there are several choices how to use this option.
You can connect your instruments via standard CAT6 cables, over short distances. The maximum length depends
on the sampling rate and the A/D technology, and ranges between 30 m to 200 m. This requires that the ORIONSYNC option was factory installed when each system was made.
For large distances which do not allow physical connection of the instruments, synchronization can be achieved
using GPS or IRIG time codes. This requires that the Dewetron systems have either the IRIG-CLOCK or GPSCLOCK option installed internally, or connected externally (order IRIG-CLOCK-INT or GPS-CLOCK-INT for
factory-installed internal interfaces, or the IRIG-CLOCK-EXT or GPS-CLOCK-EXT for field-installed external
interfaces).
The driver design enables total continuous gap-free disk storing rates of more than 100 MB/s. Today standard
computers with a single hard disk reach continuous gap-free storing rates between 50 MB/s and 80 MB/s.
A/D Technologies within the ORION series
Delta-Sigma Converter
This technique is used in the ORION cards with 22 and 24-bit A/D converters. Of course, 24-bit converters offer
highest dynamic range (up to 120 dB).
Whenever you choose a sampling rate, the used internal sampling rate is up to 512 times higher. Using this
over-sampling technique full anti-aliasing protection is guaranteed. These boards can not be external clocked, but
synchronized from board to board and also synchronized to GPS clock using the DEWE-GPS-CLOCK or to IRIG
time using DEWE- IRIG-CLOCK.
Flash Converter
This technique is used in all ORION cards with 16-bit A/D converters, as well as MI and AD series boards.
Flash converters offer the fastest sampling rates (up to 1 MS/s/ch) as well as the possibility for external clocking.
This is required for external clocked applications like distance related A/D conversion, combustion analysis as well
as order tracking applications (using hardware order tracking clocked by an encoder).
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 11, A/D Cards | 11-1
11
A/D Cards
There are several A/D cards which may be installed into your Dewetron system, depending on how it was ordered
from the factory. For traditional data acquisition applications, there are essentially two series of A/D cards available:
ORION series - simultaneous sampling, high-end performance, including synchronous counter/encoder inputs
on board, and offering options such as CAN BUS interfaces, isolated counters and digital input lines, and more.
ORION series cards represent the state of the art within the Dewetron family. They were designed from the
ground up to allow 100% synchronization, not just within one system but across multiple systems, whether they
are physically connected, or separated by thousands of miles.
AD series - multiplexed sampling, medium performance, with basic counters and digital input lines. No options (if
CAN BUS interfaces are needed, for example, they can be added via a separate PCI card within your system).
This section will present the basic specifications for all commonly installed ORION and AD series cards. Additional
information is available in Dewetron manuals specific to these cards, available as separate documents.
ORION series Cards
ORION cards cross-reference
Series
Chs
Voltage ranges
Res.
Max
kS/s/ch
ADC type
DI chs
DI/Os
Ctr/Enc
CAN
ORION-0424-200
4
±0.1 V, ±0.5 V, ±2 V, ±10 V
IEPE®: 4 mA / 8 mA
excitation
24-bit
204.8
D/Sigma
--
--
1 (ADV)
--
ORION-0824-200
8
±0.1 V, ±0.5 V, ±2 V, ±10 V
IEPE®: 4 mA / 8 mA
excitation
24-bit
204.8
D/Sigma
8 to 40
8
2 to 10 (ADV)
0 or 2
ORION-1624-200
16
±10 V
24-bit
204.8
D/Sigma
8 to 40
8
2 to 10 (ADV)
0 or 2
ORION-1622-100
16
±10 V
22-bit
100
D/Sigma
8 to 40
8
2 to 10 (ADV)
0 or 2
ORION-3222-100
32
±10 V
22-bit
100
D/Sigma
8 to 24
8
2 to 10 (ADV)
0 or 2
ORION-0816-1000
8
±1.25 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, ±10 V
16-bit
1000
SAR
8 to 40
8
2 to 10
0 or 2
ORION-1616-100
16
±1.25 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, ±10 V
16-bit
100
SAR
8 to 40
8
2 to 10
0 or 2
ORION-3216-100
32
±1.25 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, ±10 V
16-bit
100
SAR
8 to 24
8
2 to 10
0 or 2
ORION-1616-500
16
±1.25 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, ±10 V
16-bit
500
SAR
8 to 40
8
2 to 10
0 or 2
11-2| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
ORION card implementation notes
Combining various ORION cards
ORION cards with different bit resolutions, or different max sample rates, cannot be mixed within the same
system. In other words, you cannot install an ORION-0816-1000 and an ORION-1616-100 in the same system,
because they have different max sample rates. Nor can you mix ORION-1616-100 with ORION-1622-100.
However, there is no problem to mix the ORION-3216-100 with ORION-1616-100 cards, because they have the
same bit resolution and the same max sample rate. (The ORION-3216-100 is an ORION-1616-100 card with an
add-on of 16 more channels, so they are essentially the same card anyway).
Also there is no problem to mix multiples of the same card, but which have different last digits. Therefore you may
install an ORION-1624-200, ORION-1624-202, and ORION-1624-205 in the same system.
Synching ORION cards
If multiple compatible ORION cards are installed in
the same system, they must be interconnected with
a sync cable. A standard 10-pin connector with 1.27
mm flat ribbon cable is available for easy connection
between the boards.
-- One card must be set as the master, and the others as slaves.
This is done at the driver level.
Synching Multiple systems
If multiple systems or PCI expansion systems are used, a sync bus option must be installed. This option decouples
the internal sync bus with the external sync I/O connector. By changing the internal TTL sync bus levels from TTL
to RS-422 level, the distance between two systems can be increased by up to 50 meters using by using standard
CAT5/CAT6 Ethernet cables (greater distances are possible - please contact Dewetron to discuss).
„„ The ORION-DAQ-SYNC option is required for Dewetron 16-bit ORION cards.
„„ The ORION-DSA-SYNC option is required for Dewetron 22- and 24-bit ORION cards.
The SYNC option also includes the security circuit if two master systems have to be connected together over
the sync bus connection. As soon as the system is configured to a master system the external sync is ignored by
disabling the SYNC-IN amplifier. The LED labeled MI (master internal) indicates if the system is configured to a
master system. ME (master external) will light up if a valid sync signal is being received on the SYNC-IN connector.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 11, A/D Cards | 11-3
Above: schematic of ORION-XXX-SYNC option
-- Note - if you plan on adding more compatible Dewetrons and hardware synchronizing them like this, it is
highly recommended to have the sync option installed at the factory. It is difficult to add later.
Opto-coupler emitter
Opto-collector
System on
Power +5V
Power GND
SYNC IN
ME/MI LEDs (2)
To ORION card sync
bus interface
SYNC OUT
In addition to the synchronization function the ORION-xxx-SYNC allows also the remote power-on of any connected slave system. When the master is powered on, an opto coupler output (PC817) is activated to switch on
the power supply of the slave system. The remote power on also can be controlled with an external control voltage
(+5 [email protected]). Systems with this option typically have a three way power switch labeled ON, OFF, and SLAVE
ON. In this third mode, the system can be powered on remotely if connected to a master. This is very convenient
for powering on everything at once, and in the correct order.
On-board RS-485 interface
ORION cards are equipped with an RS-485 interfaced as standard. The
baud-rate is fixed to 9600, 8 data, 1 stop bit and no parity. This interface
is used for configuration of DAQ, MDAQ, and HSI signal conditioning
modules. In addition, PAD and EPAD2 series modulescan also be handled.
Therefore there is no need for an additional serial interface for module
control when ORION cards are used within your system.
In DEWESoft you need to access the HARDWARE SETUP screen, and
make sure that “ORION onboard” is selected as the module control interface, as shown in the screen shot at right.
11-4| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
ORION-0424-200
„„
„„
„„
„„
„„
„„
„„
4 simultaneous sampled channels, BNC connection
Voltage or IEPE® mode (4 mA or 8 mA source)
4 input ranges (from ±0.1 V to ±10 V)
Input coupling DC or AC (0.15 Hz or 3.4 Hz)
204.8 kS/s per channel
24 bit resolution, anti-aliasing filter
TEDS (IEEE 1451) sensor support
Model Overview
Model
Analog
chs
Max kS/s/
ch
Digital
input
chs
Digital
I/O
Ext clock
Ext.
trigger
Counter/
encoder
TTL
Counter/
Encoder
ADJ
CAN
BUS
ORION-0424-200
4
204.8
--
--
--
1
--
1
--
Top Level Specifications
Parameter
Specification
Number of analog input channels:
4, simultaneously sampled
Input configuration:
Symmetric, differential or single ended
Resolution:
24 bit, nominal
Type of ADC:
Delta-sigma
Sample rate:
204.8 kS/s/ch maximum
Input signal range:
±10V, ±2V, ±0.5V, ±0.1V peak
Input impedance (ground ref.):
Positive to negative input
1 MΩ each with 60 pF to GND
Over-voltage protection:
±30V on both positive and negative inputs
Alias-free bandwidth (passband):
1 kS/s ≤ fs ≤ 51.2 kS/s
51.2 kS/s < fs ≤ 102.4 kS/s
102.4 kS/s < fs ≤ 200 kS/s
DC (0 Hz) to 0.42 fs
DC (0 Hz) to 0.32 fs
DC (0 Hz) to 0.22 fs
Dimensions:
17.5 x 10.7 cm (6.9 x 4.2 in.) (not including connectors)
Form factor:
Half length PCI card
Analog input connector:
BNC
Counter input connector:
DSUB 9-pin connector, male
Environmental:
T.OP: 0 to 50°C, T.STORE: -20 to 70°C; RH: 10 to 90 %, non-condensing
For complete details, please see the detailed manual for this card, available as a separate document.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 11, A/D Cards | 11-5
ORION-0824-200
„„
„„
„„
„„
„„
„„
8 simultaneous sampled channels
Voltage or IEPE® mode (4 mA or 8 mA source)
Synchronous digital inputs
204.8 kS/s per channel
24 bit resolution, anti-aliasing filter
6 models available with many options
Model Overview
Model
Analog
chs
Max kS/s/
ch
Digital
input chs
Digital
I/O
Ext clock
Ext.
trigger
Counter/
encoder
TTL
Counter/
Encoder
ADJ
CAN
BUS
ORION-0824-200
8
204.8
2 (8*)
8
--
1
--
2
--
ORION-0824-201
8
204.8
2 (8*)
8
--
1
--
2
2
ORION-0824-202
8
204.8
10 (40*)
8
--
1
8
2
--
ORION-0824-203
8
204.8
10 (40*)
8
--
1
8
2
2
ORION-0824-204
8
204.8
10 (40*)
8
--
1
--
2+8
--
ORION-0824-205
8
204.8
10 (40*)
8
--
1
--
2+8
2
Top Level Specifications
Parameter
Specification
Number of analog input channels:
8, simultaneously sampled
Input / Resolution / ADC type:
Symmetric, differential or single ended / 24 bit, nominal / Sigma-delta
Sample rate:
204.8 kS/s/ch maximum
Input signal range:
±10V, ±2V, ±0.5V, ±0.1V peak
Input impedance (ground ref.):
1 MΩ each with 60 pF to GND (Positive to negative input)
Over-voltage protection:
±30V on both positive and negative inputs
Alias-free bandwidth (passband):
1 kS/s ≤ fs ≤ 51.2 kS/s
51.2 kS/s < fs ≤ 102.4 kS/s
102.4 kS/s < fs ≤ 200 kS/s
DC (0 Hz) to 0.42 fs
DC (0 Hz) to 0.32 fs
DC (0 Hz) to 0.22 fs
Form factor:
Half length PCI card
Analog input connector:
68-pin SCSI male (AMP 174341-5)
Environmental:
T.OP: 0 to 50°C, T.STORE: -20 to 70°C; RH: 10 to 90 %, non-condensing
For complete details, please see the detailed manual for this card, available as a separate document.
11-6| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
ORION-1624-200
„„
„„
„„
„„
„„
„„
16 simultaneous sampled channels
±10V input range
Synchronous digital inputs
204.8 kS/s per channel
24 bit resolution, anti-aliasing filter
6 models available with many options
Model Overview
Model
Analog
chs
Max kS/s/
ch
Digital
input chs
Digital
I/O
Ext clock
Ext.
trigger
Counter/
encoder
TTL
Counter/
Encoder
ADJ
CAN
BUS
ORION-1624-200
16
204.8
2 (8*)
8
--
1
2
--
--
ORION-1624-201
16
204.8
2 (8*)
8
--
1
2
--
2
ORION-1624-202
16
204.8
10 (40*)
8
--
1
2+8
--
--
ORION-1624-203
16
204.8
10 (40*)
8
--
1
2+8
--
2
ORION-1624-204
16
204.8
10 (40*)
8
--
1
2
8
--
ORION-1624-205
16
204.8
10 (40*)
8
--
1
2
8
2
Top Level Specifications
Parameter
Specification
Number of analog input channels:
16, simultaneously sampled
Input / Resolution / ADC type:
Symmetric, differential / 24 bit, nominal / Sigma-delta
Sample rate:
204.8 kS/s/ch maximum
Input signal range:
±10 V
Input impedance:
10 MΩ in parallel with 60 pF (both positive and negative inputs)
Over-voltage protection:
±30V on both positive and negative inputs
Alias-free bandwidth (passband):
1 kS/s ≤ fs ≤ 51.2 kS/s
51.2 kS/s < fs ≤ 102.4 kS/s
102.4 kS/s < fs ≤ 200 kS/s
DC (0 Hz) to 0.42 fs
DC (0 Hz) to 0.32 fs
DC (0 Hz) to 0.22 fs
Form factor:
Half length PCI card
Analog input connector:
68-pin SCSI male (AMP 174341-5)
Environmental:
T.OP: 0 to 50°C, T.STORE: -20 to 70°C; RH: 10 to 90 %, non-condensing
For complete details, please see the detailed manual for this card, available as a separate document.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 11, A/D Cards | 11-7
ORION-1622-100 and ORION-3222-100
„„
„„
„„
„„
„„
„„
16 or 32 simultaneous sampled channels
±10 V inputs
Synchronous digital inputs
100 kS/s per channel
22 bit resolution, anti-aliasing filter
8 models available with many options
Model Overview
Model
Analog
chs
Max kS/s/
ch
Digital
input chs
Digital
I/O
Ext clock
Ext.
trigger
Counter/
encoder
TTL
Counter/
Encoder
ADJ
CAN
BUS
ORION-1622-100
16
102.4
2 (8*)
8
--
1
2
--
--
ORION-1622-101
16
102.4
2 (8*)
8
--
1
2
--
2
ORION-1622-102
16
102.4
10 (40*)
8
--
1
2+8
--
--
ORION-1622-103
16
102.4
10 (40*)
8
--
1
2+8
--
2
ORION-1622-104
16
102.4
10 (40*)
8
--
1
2
8
--
ORION-1622-105
16
102.4
10 (40*)
8
--
1
2
8
2
ORION-3222-100
32
102.4
18 (24*)
8
1
1
2
--
--
ORION-3222-101
32
102.4
18 (24*)
8
1
1
2
--
2
Top Level Specifications
Parameter
Specification
Number of analog input channels:
16 or 32, simultaneously sampled
Input / Resolution / ADC type:
Symmetric, single ended w/remote sense / 22 bit nominal / Sigma-delta
Sample rate:
102.4 kS/s/ch maximum
Input signal range:
±10 V
Input impedance (ground ref.):
1 MΩ each with 60 pF to GND
Over-voltage protection:
±30V
Alias-free bandwidth (passband):
1 kS/s ≤ fs ≤ 51.2 kS/s
51.2 kS/s < fs ≤ 102.4 kS/s
DC (0 Hz) to 0.42 fs
DC (0 Hz) to 0.32 fs
Form factor:
Half length PCI card
Analog input connector:
68-pin SCSI male (AMP 174341-5)
Environmental:
T.OP: 0 to 50°C, T.STORE: -20 to 70°C; RH: 10 to 90 %, non-condensing
For complete details, please see the detailed manual for this card, available as a separate document.
11-8| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
ORION-0816-1000
„„
„„
„„
„„
„„
„„
8 simultaneous sampled channels
Four input ranges ±1.25, ±2.5, ±5 or ±10 V
Synchronous digital inputs
1 MS/s per channel
16 bit resolution
6 models available with many options
Model Overview
Model
Analog
chs
Max kS/s/
ch
Digital
input chs
Digital
I/O
Ext clock
Ext.
trigger
Counter/
encoder
TTL
Counter/
Encoder
ADJ
CAN
BUS
ORION-0816-1000
8
1000
2 (8*)
8
1
1
2
--
--
ORION-0816-1001
8
1000
2 (8*)
8
1
1
2
--
2
ORION-0816-1002
8
1000
10 (40*)
8
1
1
10
--
--
ORION-0816-1003
8
1000
10 (40*)
8
1
1
10
--
2
ORION-0816-1004
8
1000
10 (40*)
8
1
1
10
--
--
ORION-0816-1005
8
1000
10 (40*)
8
1
1
10
--
2
Top Level Specifications
Parameter
Specification
Number of analog input channels:
8, simultaneously sampled
Input / Resolution / ADC type:
Single ended w/remote sense / 16 bit (14.7 bit effective) / Successive approximation
Sample rate:
1000 kS/s/ch maximum
Input signal range:
±1.25, ±2.5, ±5 or ±10 V
Input impedance:
10 MΩ parallel (3.9 kΩ + 10 pF)
Over-voltage protection:
±30V
-3 dB Bandwidth:
600 kHz
Form factor:
Half length PCI card
Analog input connector:
68-pin SCSI male (AMP 174341-5)
Environmental:
T.OP: 0 to 50°C, T.STORE: -20 to 70°C; RH: 10 to 90 %, non-condensing
For complete details, please see the detailed manual for this card, available as a separate document.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 11, A/D Cards | 11-9
ORION-1616-100 and ORION-3216-100
„„
„„
„„
„„
„„
„„
16 or 32 simultaneous sampled channels
Four input ranges ±1.25, ±2.5, ±5 or ±10 V
Synchronous digital inputs
100 kS/s per channel
16 bit resolution
8 models available with many options
Model Overview
Model
Analog
chs
Max kS/s/
ch
Digital
input chs
Digital
I/O
Ext clock
Ext.
trigger
Counter/
encoder
TTL
Counter/
Encoder
ADJ
CAN
BUS
ORION-1616-100
16
100
2 (8*)
8
1
1
2
--
--
ORION-1616-101
16
100
2 (8*)
8
1
1
2
--
2
ORION-1616-102
16
100
10 (40*)
8
1
1
2+8
--
--
ORION-1616-103
16
100
10 (40*)
8
1
1
2+8
--
2
ORION-1616-104
16
100
10 (40*)
8
1
1
2
8
--
ORION-1616-105
16
100
10 (40*)
8
1
1
2
8
2
ORION-3216-100
32
100
18 (24*)
8
1
1
2
--
--
ORION-3216-101
32
100
18 (24*)
8
1
1
2
--
2
Top Level Specifications
Parameter
Specification
Number of analog input channels:
16 or 32, simultaneously sampled
Input / Resolution / ADC type:
Single ended w/remote sense / 16 bit (14.7 bit effective) / Successive approximation
Sample rate:
100 kS/s/ch maximum
Input signal range:
±1.25, ±2.5, ±5 or ±10 V
Input impedance:
10 MΩ parallel (3.9 kΩ + 10 pF)
Over-voltage protection:
±30V
-3 dB Bandwidth:
100 kHz
Form factor:
Half length PCI card
Analog input connector:
68-pin SCSI male (AMP 174341-5)
Environmental:
T.OP: 0 to 50°C, T.STORE: -20 to 70°C; RH: 10 to 90 %, non-condensing
For complete details, please see the detailed manual for this card, available as a separate document.
11-10 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
ORION card Windows driver
Every PCI card requires a driver so that Windows knows how to implement it. 99% of the time, ORION cards are
factory installed, and thus we install the drivers for you. If you are adding a second compatible ORION card to
your system, then the drivers are already installed. However, if you are installing one or more ORION cards into a
new computer, please contact Dewetron for the latest Windows driver.
Installing ORION cards
Please see the manual provided with your new ORION card for complete installation instructions. It is beyond the
scope of this manual to describe that for all of the different ORION cards that we offer.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 11, A/D Cards | 11-11
AD series Cards
AD cards Cross-reference
Series
Chs
Voltage ranges
Res.
Max
kS/s/ch
ADC type
DI chs
DI/Os
Counters
(simple)
Analog outs
AD16-1000-16
16
±100 mV to ±10 V
16-bit
62.5
Flash/MUX
8
8
2
--
AD16-1000-16-OUT2
16
±100 mV to ±10 V
16-bit
62.5
Flash/MUX
8
8
2
2
AD32-1000-16
32
±100 mV to ±10 V
16-bit
31.25
Flash/MUX
8
8
2
--
AD32-1000-16-OUT4
32
±100 mV to ±10 V
16-bit
31.25
Flash/MUX
8
8
2
4
AD64-1250-12
64
±50 mV to ±10 V
12-bit
19.5
Flash/MUX
--
--
--
2
AD64-100-16
64
±100 mV to ±10 V
16-bit
1.5
Flash/MUX
--
--
--
--
All AD series cards are standard half-length size PCI cards. They are
factory installed within your Dewetron system when it is made. Since it
is not possible for them to also have CAN BUS interfaces on them, if you
require CAN BUS interfaces, please order the PCI-CAN/2 option, which
is a two channel high-speed CAN BUS interface card.
AD series cards are much lower cost and thus lower performance than
the ORION series. The counters, for example, are simpler and less capable than ORION counter/encoder inputs.
Still, AD series cards are perfectly adequate for many data acquisition
applications, when interchannel phase match does not have to be perfect
via simultaneous sampling, and multiplexed A/D performance is acceptable.
100% LabVIEW compatibility
AD series cards are 100% supported in LabVIEW, since they are
made by National Instruments. Therefore, these are the ideal cards
if you are planning to develop your own software for the Dewetron
platform, and we strongly recommend them.
Calibration
When it comes time to calibration your AD series cards, this can be done by Dewetron, or you can send the card to
National Instruments.
11-12 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
AD cards technical information
Since AD series A/D cards are made by National Instruments, please refer to the website www.ni.com for technical details related to these cards.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 12, Interface cards | 12-1
12
Interface Cards
There are several key interface cards that are available for your Dewetron instrument. These include time code
interfaces based on IRIG or GPS, as well as BUS interface cards for popular data busses such as ARINC 429,
MIL-STD-1553, NTSC/PAL video input, and more.
Please see the next pages for basic information about these interface cards. Additional details can be found in the
manuals specific to each card, as provided with your system.
IRIG-CLOCK time code interface card
The purpose of the IRIG-CLOCK is to synchronize the data acquisition performed by your Dewetron system with
an absolute time reference widely used by the US military and NASA known as IRIG (Inter Range Instrumentation Group).
The IRIG-CLOCK-INT is a small printed circuit board that is factory installed within the Dewetron chassis, and
wired internally to the USB interface, power, and to the clock input of the master A/D card. There is also an external version of this IRIG interface known as the IRIG-CLOCK-EXT. This section will focus on the internal version,
since this is far more common, and the architecture is identical between the two.
The following block diagram gives a basic overview of the functionality of this interface:
The IRIG-DECODER engine generates one pulse per second (PPS) which is used to synchronize a 40 MHz oscillator with software PLL (phase locked loop). The result is an ultra stable 40 MHz clock source which is completely free of drift over time.
Out of this 40 MHz base clock, the programmable clock divider generates the clock frequency for the data acquisition system. Due to the over-clocking of delta sigma converters, a special output clock is required for synchronized
sampling. This is available on a RJ45 connector for clocking ORION-xx24 and ORION-xx22 series cards. The communication to the host is provided over native USB interface.
12-2| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Connect the IRIG signal
When this option is installed within your Dewetron system, you will find a BNC input labeled IRIG or IRIG IN.
This is where you need to connect the IRIG time code signal to the system.
This is an industry standard BNC connector, female. A mating BNC cable is not included with the IRIG-CLOCK
option.
Configure the software
It is also necessary to configure DEWESoft to look for the IRIG card, and to properly format the time in its display to the IRIG standard. This should be done for you at the factory, but in the event that you need to reconfigure
your system or create a new PROJECT under DEWESoft, please make sure that these settings are in place:
„„ Under the SETTINGS menu of DEWESoft 7, click HARDWARE SETUP, then click the TIMING button.
„„ On the selector, choose the DEWE-IRIG-CLOCK option
The interface should then be located and shown on this screen. When hardware is successfully found, you can
select either IRIG A or IRIG B as Coding type and AC modulated or DC signal type:
When this option is installed and configured, DEWESoft will behave a little differently than normal when you go
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 12, Interface cards | 12-3
to aquire data. For example, since every acquistion should be precisely synchronized to the absolute time provided
by IRIG, when you press STORE to start recording, you may briefly see the message:
WAITING FOR PPS...
This is the pulse per second which precedes each IRIG time message. This PPS is extremely precise in its location, and we use it to identify the exact beginning of the next second. The software reads the previous full time
and date string from the IRIG interface via USB, then awaits the next PPS in order to begin the acquisition at an
exactly known time.
In addition, the top right corner of the DEWESoft screen will show the IRIG TIME like this:
Above - the RED dot indicates flywheel mode
Above - the GREEN dot indicates LOCKED mode
If IRIG is lost for whatever reason, the system will “fly wheel,” meaning that it will continue to count the time
using the clock on the A/D card. In this case, the IRIG time will be shown with a RED DOT in front of it. Of course,
this mode is not locked to any absolute time reference, so over time, the time will drift. However, when time code
is restored, the IRIG-CLOCK will lock on again and the time will be updated.
When the IRIG interface has a lock onto the time code, the date and time message will be shown with a GREEN
DOT in front of it.
When the IRIG signal is lost (indicated by the status light) during measurement, the IRIG-CLOCK will switch into
“Fly Wheel Mode”. When the IRIG signal is received again, the IRIG-CLOCK switches into “Normal Operation
Mode” and automatically creates a new data file. The nomenclature of the created datafile indicates that the IRIG
signal was lost during measurement: <Original_Filename>.lostXXX. DSD where XXX represents a continuous
number.
There are times when playing data back from tape, that suddenly a new section of tape has older data on it, and
the time on the tape suddenly jumps backwards or forwards. DEWESoft will automatically close the current data
file and open a new one, as mentioned above, and continue recording without interruption.
12-4| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
IRIG-CLOCK basic specifications
IRIG-CLOCK
IRIG synchronized time base generator
Timing specs
Adjustment range:
±150 ppm
Clock acc. IRIG locked:
without drift
Clock acc. IRIG unlocked:
< 1 ppm
System specifications
Input
Output:
AM code
Ratio (AM)
Impedance
Compatibility
Connector
Trigger
Scan clock
ORION-1624-SYNC
IRIG code A or B; AM or DC
0.5 Vp-p to 10 Vp-p
3:1 ±10 %
20 kΩ
DC Level Shift TTL / CMOS Compatible
BNC female
Clock and Trigger for DAQ-systems
PPS (pulse per second), rising edge on time, 75 msec high time, TTL level compatible
10 Hz to 10 MHz, rising edge synchronized, 50 % duty cycle, TTL level compatible
LVDS compatible synchronisation bus for ORION-xx24 series
Power supply:
Powered via USB interface, max current 250 mA
Operating temperature:
+5 °C to +70 °C
Storage temperature:
-20 °C to +85 °C
Humidity:
10 to 85 %, non condensing
Vibration test:
Vibration test:
Shock:
Shape
Frequency
Power spectral density
Duration
EN 600068-2-6
Sine
10 Hz to 150 Hz
1 m/s2 / Hz from 10 – 200 Hz
30 Minutes per axis
Shape
Frequency
Power spectral density
Duration
EN 60721-3-2 Class 2M2
Random
10 Hz to 200 Hz
1 m/s2 / Hz from 10 – 200 Hz
30 Minutes per axis
Shape
Acceleration amplitude
Duration
Test in 3 axis, 3 shocks in each axis
and direction
EN 60068-2-27
Half-sine
15 g
11 ms
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 12, Interface cards | 12-5
GPS-CLOCK time code interface card
The purpose of the GPS-CLOCK is to synchronize the data acquisition performed by your Dewetron system with
an absolute time reference known as UTC (Universal Time Code), as qcuired from the GPS (Global Positioning
Satellites) circling the Earth.
The GPS-CLOCK-INT is a small printed circuit board that is factory installed within the Dewetron chassis, and
wired internally to the USB interface, power, and to the clock input of the master A/D card. There is also an external version of this GPS time code interface known as the GPS-CLOCK-EXT. This section will focus on the internal
version, since this is far more common, and the architecture is identical between the two.
The following block diagram gives a basic overview of the functionality of this interface:
The base of any GPS receiver is precise time measurement. In addition to the position information a precise PPS
(pulse per second) is generated by the GPS engine. This pulse is used to synchronize a 40 MHz oscillator with
software PLL (phase locked loop). The result is an ultra stable 40 MHz clock source which is completely free of
drift over time.
Out of this 40 MHz base clock, the programmable clock divider generates the clock frequency for the data acquisition system. Due to the over-clocking of delta sigma converters, a special output clock is required for synchronized
sampling. This is available on a RJ45 connector for clocking the DEWE-ORION-1624.
The communication to the host is provided over USB or standard RS-232 interface.
Connect the antenna
Your Dewetron system will have a TNC connector mounted on a side panel. Please use the included cable to connect the antenna to the Dewetron system via this connector:
12-6| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Configure the software for TIMING
It is also necessary to configure DEWESoft to look for the GPS card, and to properly format the time in its display
to the UTC standard. This should be done for you at the factory, but in the event that you need to reconfigure your
system or create a new PROJECT under DEWESoft, please make sure that these settings are in place:
„„ Under the SETTINGS menu of DEWESoft 7, click HARDWARE SETUP, then click the TIMING button.
„„ On the selector, choose the DEWE-GPS-CLOCK option
The interface should then be located and shown on this screen.
Mounting the GPS antenna
The antenna supplied with the GPS-CLOCK is designed to be mounted with the included mounting kit. The positioning of the antenna is critical to the correct operation of the system.
The antenna picks up the signals from up to 12 satellites which are all in different places in the sky. These satellites are not necessarily directly overhead, and can often be close to the horizon. Therefore it is best to mount the
aerial in a way, that the least amount of metal obscures the view of the sky. On a domed roof, place the aerial on
the top of the dome. On an open car with a roll-over bar, place the aerial horizontally on the highest point of the
roll-over hoop and tape the wire securely to the frame. Although the VGPS can work with at least three satellites,
it’s precision increases the more satellites it finds. If one satellite disappears over the horizon, or behind an object,
there are other satellites still in view.
In order to fix your antenna on a tube, use the provided universal mounting adaptor. The image on the left shows
you, how you have to fix the tube with the screws (1) , (2).
-- Note: the maximum diameter is limited to 43 mm (1.7 Inch). Otherwise the universal mounting adapter
will not fit on the tube.
The GPS-CLOCK is shipped with a 6 m antenna cable as standard. However, 15 and 25 m antenna cables are
available optionally:
„„ PC-GPS-CBL15 cable - 15 m
„„ PC-GPS-CBL25 cable - 25 m
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 12, Interface cards | 12-7
Warm-Up time
When the GPS-CLOCK is used for the first time, has been moved more than 200 km or not used for 10 hours
(since last usage), it is recommended to perform a ‘cold start’. To get the best performance from your GPS in the
future, perform this cold start in an open place with a good all round view to the sky. Allow the GPS to map the
satellites for at least 20 to 30 minutes. The GPS builds up the ‘Ephemeris’ data on each satellite which is stored
in a non-volatile memory, and means future satellite tracking is swift and stable. Once the GPS has carried out a
successful cold start, future satellite lock from power up will take between 15 seconds and 1 minute. Before going
to test in a shady environment with tall objects or near to trees, allow the GPS to settle in an open space for 5 to
10 minutes.
GPS-CLOCK Notes
Max. freq:
The maximum output frequency of the GPS-CLOCK is 10 MHz for standard clock output and 200
kHz for ORION-xx24 and ORION-xx22 card operation.
No. of clocks:If an ORION-xx24 or ORION-xx22 series card is installed, a synchronized clock source is available for clocking the A/D board. In the standard operation mode a second clock source is available
(reserved for future use).
Corr. limit: For synchronizing the internal oscillator with the PPS signal at least 4 satellites are required. If
the GPS signal is lost during acquisition the GPS-CLOCK continues sourcing the data acquisition
system with a precision clock source. Without synchronising to the GPS signal, the oscillator may
drift. Therefore the absolute time synchronisation can not be guaranteed anymore. However, as soon
the GPS signal is available again, the GPS- CLOCK recognizes a possible drift and tries to correct
this inaccuracy. If the drift during the free-run time is higher than the defined “Correction limit”, a
new data file is automatically generated with exact time stamping.
-- The maximum allowed correction limit is 500 ms.
The graph below gives an idea how the GPS-CLOCK behaves when the GPS signal is lost during data acquisition.
In this example the drift of the oscillator is smaller than the allowed correction limit:
A)
This state shows the normal operation. The internal clock is synchronized to the GPS once per
second.
12-8| OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
B) At this point the number of acquired satellites is lower than 4. The unit stops automatically looking
for the GPS time.
C) In the free-run operation the oscillator drift is very apparent.
D) After receiving again the GPS signal the error during the free run cycle is calculated.
E) Because the oscillator drift is smaller than the defined correction limit the GPS-CLOCK automatically corrects the drift for getting again time synchronized data. So the data acquisition is not interrupted although the GPS signal was lost. The correction is done with the maximum rate of 5 μs/sec.
But if the interrupt is too long the oscillator drift may be higher than the defined correction limit. In this case automatically the existing data file is closed and a new file is generated with adding “Lost” of the current filename:
“DataFilennameLostX” where X is a running number for each GPS signal lost.
As soon the timing device is selected DEWESoft automatically sets the data acquisition hardware to external
clocking for receiving the sample frequency out of the GPS-CLOCK. In addition to this each measurement starts
synchronized with the PPS signal. The time information of the data file is taken out of the GPS-time and not
anymore from the local PC time.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 12, Interface cards | 12-9
GPS time display
During measurement, the top right corner of the DEWESoft screen will show the UTC TIME like this:
Above - the RED dot indicates that the number of USED SATELLITES is lower than the minimum required.
Above - the GREEN dot indicates that the number of USED SATELLITES is equal to or greater than than the
minimum required.
Additionally recording speed, position, distance
In addition to providing a precise alignment of your data to the UTC time, the GPS-CLOCK can be used as a GPS
sensor, providing speed, distance, latitude, longitude, and several other useful parameters. These values can be easily displayed and recorded into the data file. But you need to configure the GPS-CLOCK for this to be possible.
Configure the software for GPS
This should be done for you at the factory, but in the event that you need to reconfigure your system or create a
new PROJECT under DEWESoft, please make sure that these settings are in place:
„„ Under the SETTINGS menu of DEWESoft 7, click HARDWARE SETUP, then click the GPS button.
„„ On the selector, choose the VGPS option
You will need to also configure the interface that these parameters are coming across. Typically this will be a COM
port with a relatively high number. There is no harm in starting with the highest com port number and working
your way down until you find the correct one. The screen will show all of the parameters available for setting when
the GPS-CLOCK interface is correctly identified here.
12-10 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Be sure to press in USED for any channel that you want to be recorded and visible when you store data. The satellite map also shows you a repsentation of the sky, according to how the antenna is positioned. The total number of
satellites (maximum is 12) as well as the number of satellites whose signals are strong enough to be used by the
GPS-CLOCK are shown. The relative darkness of the green color indicates their strength.
X absolute:
Longitude component of position in degrees, minutes and fraction of minutes
Y absolute:
Latitude component of position in degrees, minutes and fraction of minutes
Z: Altitude in meters above sea level
Velocity: Speed over ground (vector of all 3 dimensions) (can be scaled in miles or km or knots)
Velocity Z: Vertical component of the speed vector
Direction: True track over ground, from 0 to 360 degrees
Distance:
Integration of speed for getting the displacement.
-- Note: Only speed levels above 0.5 km/h are used to calculate the distance
Used sat:
Numbers of satellites used for calculation of position and speed
The field <PPS sync> and <Differential mode> change their colors from grey to green depending if the appropriate feature is available at the moment (green means available).
The PPS synch is used for hardware synchronization to analog channels. This will eliminate the time shift caused
due the calculation time of the GPS receiver and of the data transfer time of the RS-232 port.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 12, Interface cards | 12-11
GPS-CLOCK basic specifications
DEWE-GPS-CLOCK
GPS synchronized time base generator
Timing specs
Trigger accuracy:
250 ns
Clock acc. GPS locked:
without drift
Clock acc. GPS unlocked:
< 1 ppm
Clock/Trigger signal level:
TTL (LVDS for ORION-1624)
GPS specs
General:
12 channel , L1 frequency receiver
PPS accuracy:
250 ns
Refresh rate:
1 Hz
Position accuracy:
Autonomous
Differential
Horizontal CEP
3.0 m
1.0 m
Horizontal 95 %
5m
3m
System specifications
Input:
TNC connector for GPS antenna
Outputs:
Speed, displacement, RS-232, USB, Timebase generator
Power supply:
8 to 18 VDC
Operating / storage temp / humidity:
-30 °C to +80 °C / -40 °C to +85 °C / 95 % RH non condensing @ +60 °C
Vibration:
0.008 g2/ Hz
0.05 g2/ Hz 3 dB/octave
5 to 20 Hz
20 to 100 Hz
100 to 900 Hz
12-12 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
VIDEO-FG-4 interface card
This is a PCI card with four NTSC/PAL video inputs on it, presented on standard BNC connectors on the side of
your Dewetron system. With this option and DEWESoft-PROF level software, you can acquire and display up to
four video streams simultaneously in sync with your data.
It accepts standard composite colors (PAL, NTSC) or monochrome video formats (CCIR, EIA).
The supported resolution is programmable and includes square-pixel (640 x 480 or 768 x 576) and broadcast
resolution. Before captured images are transferred to the PC’s memory, images can be scaled down using available selectable ratios.
Image Acquisition
„„ Frame Rate: 30 full-frame images acquired per second for each channel.
„„ Color Image: Color video format is compatible with the following composite video input formats:
„„ NTSC-M, NTSC-Japan, PCL-B, PALD, PAL-G, PAL-H, PAL-I, PAM-M, PAL-N and SECAM
„„ Monochrome Image: The monochrome video acquisition is compatible with CCIR and EIA (RS-170).
„„ Optional Scaling: The acquire images or portions of images can be optionally scaled:
„„ Acquisition of a programmable area of interest
„„ Scaling of the image (down to 1:16)
„„ Adjustment of hue (for NTSC signals), contrast (0 to 200%), brightness and saturation (0 to 200%
„„ for U and V signals)
„„ Automatic chrominance gain control
It is necessary to install the driver for this card under Windows before it can be used within DEWESoft. Additionally, each of the inputs must be configured as a DirectShow video channel. This must be done for each of the four
video inputs by following the instructions in the manual for this product.
The OEM source for this card is Adlink, part number PCI-RTV24. Please refer to that technical information for
details.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 12, Interface cards | 12-13
Video interface setup
Once the card is installed and configured for DirectShow under Windows, run DEWESoft and then go to hardware
setup under the SETTINGS button. Click the VIDEO button to see the setup for your cameras and video inputs:
You need to enable DIRECTX video via the checkbox. When you do, the VIDEO-FG4 card should show up automatucally, and four video channels should appear in the list. If this does not happen, then the card is not set up
properly under Windows, because DEWESoft will always see any properly configured DirectX video sources that
are available under Windows.
Be sure that the ENABLED column is set to YES for each of the video streams that you want to be able to display
and record.
In the bottom section you can choose the type of video files that will be created, and the compression format.
Once this is done, and you return to the SETUP screens, you will have a new button called VIDEO in the toolbar.
Click it to access the video streams, preview them, and activate them for display and recording.
As always, be sure to press in as USED any of the video streams or cameras that you want to be able to display
and record with your data files.
12-14 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Displaying video channels
Video streams are displayed almost like any other channel, except that there is a special video display widget that
is used. Enter the design mode and find the icon that looks like a roll of film, and click it to add one video display
widget to your screen:
The video widget is shown highlighted in yellow, above. After you click it to add a video window, you can select
any USED video streams from the channel list to put them onto your screen. The video widget can be scaled and
moved freely into an attractive arrangement on your display:
-- Note: video streams also create a channel which contains the frame count. You can display this count in a
digital meter as a convenience.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 12, Interface cards | 12-15
ARINC-429 and MIL-STD-1553 interfaces
ARINC 429 and 1553 bus interfaces are available for your Dewetron system, in both PCI card and external USB
box format. The OEM supplier of these interfaces is Ballard Technologies. Dewetron systems support the Omnibus
line of cards and rack-mounting boxes, as well as the so-called “fifth generation” of lower cost Ballard PCI cards.
The software interface into DEWESoft is in the form of a software plugin, which is an option called DEWESoftOPT-ARINC/1553.
-- With the Omnibus series you can have a single card with both ARINC 429 and 1553 interfaces on it. In the
USB and 5th generation PCI series, there is one bus type maximum per interface.
The plugin will be installed and configured at the factory, however, if you need to reinstall the plugin, please copy
Ballard.dll to the Addons folder of DEWESoft. If you are running Windows 7, plugins need to be registered, and
there is a button for that on the plugins page of the DEWESoft hardware setup screen.
When this is done, the Ballard plugin will appear in Hardware setup plugin list.
Refer to Ballard manual for installation of Ballard drivers and connecting Ballard devices.
First checkmark the Ballard plugin to enable it. If any devices will be found they will be shown at Devices panel.
If hardware configuration changes, just press the Search button and system will be rescanned.
If you want to use previous recorded data or/and don’t have hardware, you can use a replay mode. Checkmark it
and select any csv file with device definition and bus data.
At the top you have save messages check box for saving replay files. Just check it and one csv file for each device
(core) will be created along with DEWESoft data file when recording (on the same folder with the same name).
Under it is one button for each bus. Short name on the button is composed of device number, channel number and
channel type. MIL-STD-1553 buses have two tabs, one for receive and one for transmit.
12-16 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
ARINC 429 receive setup
In addition to standard buttons for adding and deleting messages or channels and display options there is a scan
check box. If it is checked every unhandled message coming through the bus will be added automatically to the
list. On start every message already had standard channels (SDI, SSM and Parity). They can be deleted if you
do not need them. Bus speed and Parity check are there for ARINC 429 bus control. Messages that do not have
proper parity will be ignored.
In the table you can see all messages and channels and live data. Labels are always in octal notation, and for the
message value you can choose between hex and binary (right click on the VALUES column). Messages are always
ordered by their labels. Some properties like color and name can be changed directly on the table and for others
you must open SETUP. In the SETUP dialog you can add channels and manage their properties.
There is no problem to have more messages with the same label (and SDI filter) and/or more channels using same
bits. When the message will come through the bus all that messages and channels will catch its data.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 12, Interface cards | 12-17
ARINC 429 transmit setup
Here you have buttons for adding and deleting messages and for sorting them. Bus speed is for ARINC 429 bus
setup.
Two types of messages can be created. Button and Schedule.
Schedule messages will be send automatically in intervals which are defined with MIN INT and MAX INT values.
The schedule is created and scheduled messages start to transmit after you leave the tab by entering some other
tab or entering the measure mode.
Button messages are never sent automatically. You get a button to send them manually. In setup mode the button
for each Button message is on the table, and in Measure mode you get the special window with buttons for all that
messages.
12-18 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
MIL-STD-1553 receive setup
As in the ARINC 429 setup there are standard buttons for adding and deleting messages or channels and display
options. There is also a scan check box. If SCAN is checkmarked, every unhandled message coming through the
bus will be added automatically to the list.
In the table you can see all messages, channels and live data. Messages are always ordered by their addresses.
Some properties like color and name can be change directly on the table and for others you must open SETUP. In
the SETUP dialog you can add channels and manage their properties.
There is no problem to have more messages with the same address and/or more channels using same word/bits.
When the message will come through the bus all that messages and channels will catch its data.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 12, Interface cards | 12-19
MIL-STD-1553 transmit setup
Here you have buttons for adding and deleting messages and for sorting them.
Every message has the Edit button which opens Transmit message setup form where all message properties and
data can be set.
Two types of messages can be created. Button and Schedule.
Schedule messages will be send automatically in the same order they have in the list. After each message there
can be wait time which can be defined in Wait time column. After last message is sent the schedule starts will the
first message again. The schedule is created and scheduled messages start to transmit after you leave the tab by
entering some other tab or entering the measure mode.
Button messages are never sent automatically. You get a button to send them manually. In setup mode the button
for each Button message is on the table, and in Measure mode you get the special window with buttons for all that
messages.
Storing ARINC/1553 data
ARINC and 1553 channels pressed in as USED on the setup screen will be stored into the data file when you
store data. It does not matter if the channels are shown on a display screen or not.
Processing ARINC/1553 data in MATH
ARINC and 1553 channels can be used within your MATH channels just like any other channel.
12-20 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
CAN BUS interfaces
In terms of hardware, Dewetron systems are available with several different CAN BUS interfaces. However, 90%
of the systems delivered have the 2 CAN BUS interfaces that are provided as options from a Dewetron ORION
series A/D card. If you look at the model numbering of our ORION cards, you will see that the last digit changes
according to which options are installed on the card, like this:
model name
last digit
description
ORION-1616-100
0 (even)
the standard card
ORION-1616-101
1 (odd)
Adds 2 x CAN BUS interfaces
ORION-1616-102
2 (even)
The standard card plus more counters + digital inputs
ORION-1616-103
3 (odd)
The standard card plus more counters + digital inputs + 2 x CAN BUS interfaces
ORION-1616-104
4 (even)
The standard card plus ADVANCED counters + digital inputs
ORION-1616-105
5 (odd)
The standard card plus ADVANCED counters + digital inputs + 2 x CAN BUS interfaces
You can see from the table above that basically any ORION card whose model name ends in an odd number has
the CAN interfaces on it. In addition to the hardware option, you must have the software option called DEWESoft-OPT-CAN installed.
The actual CAN bus interface connectors installed on your unit are shown in SECTION 4, SIGNAL INPUT CONNECTORS in this document. That page also shows you how to connect to the CAN BUS, including using termination resistors if needed.
If you want to use either one of the CAN bus interfaces to connect a Dewetron CPAD2 series module, please see
SECTION 10, CONDITIONERS, CPAD2 within this document.
Your CAN interfaces should be set up already at the factory, however, if you need to check or reconfigure the settings, please check the HARDWARE SETUP under the SETTINGS menu. Then click the CAN button to see the
CAN hardware interface setup:
Use the selector to choose the CAN device that is installed within your system. Here is a basic description of what
each entry refers to:
Test CAN (replay mode) - for demonstration and training purposes, you may select this even if you do not have
the CAN software option, and point the software to a CAN bus data file (CSV), which it will replay through the
system for you.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 12, Interface cards | 12-21
National Instruments - select this if your system has a National Instruments brand PCI-CAN/2 interface card.
Softing - select this if you are using a compatible Softing brand CAN BUS interface card
Vector - select this if you are using a compatible Vector brand CAN BUS interface card
Dewetron DAQ - select this option if your system has any 16-bit ORION card with the CAN option
Dewetron DSA - select this option if your system has any 22- or 24-bit ORION card with the CAN option
⇒⇒ Note - if your DEWESoft license does not include the CAN option, you will not be able to proceed with
hardware setup after selecting a real CAN interface card. Please contact Dewetron for a license upgrade.
After doing the hardware setup, please visit the CH SETUP screens and click on the CAN icon, which will appear
there in the toolbar.
At first you will have no channels or messages being shown. This is normal.
Notice that there are buttons for CAN0 and CAN1. That is because there are two CAN interfaces in nearly every
system. Your system could even have more -- in which case you will have additional buttons for CAN2, CAN3, etc.
The maximum is 8 interfaces in one Dewetron system.
It is essential to select the correct SPEED of the bus, in kBaud. Dewetron CAN hardware supports speeds up to 1
Mb (1,000,000 bits per second). 500 kb is the default.
⇒⇒ Selecting a wrong SPEED of the CAN bus can actually interfere with certain systems, so please take care
to select the correct one.
Setting up your channels
It is important to know that the CAN data stream does not contain any information about the channels that are
being conveyed within the 64-bit messages. Therefore you need to know the configuration. Most car companies
are very secretive about the CAN message layout, and do not release this information. Dewetron does not have
any information about the CAN message layout from any car maker. However, there are third party programs such
12-22 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
as CANALYZER which you could use to help in this area. This product is not affiliated with Dewetron in any way.
A great invention of Vector corporation is the DBC file. This is essentially a standardized flat file which contains
the information about a given CAN messaging layout. If you have a DBC file, you may import it right here and set
up all of your channels instantly. Click the IMPORT button under the label DBC library, and then select the DBC
file that you would like to apply.
Scan for messages
Another approach is to checkmark the SCAN button. When you do this, DEWESoft will “listen” on this bus and
identify all of the CAN messages that are coming across, and create messages for them here. DEWESoft will
show you how many messages it has found above the SCAN button.
-- SCAN can only find messages that appear during the time the system is scanning. Not all CAN messages
are coming across the bus all the time! Some messages only report errors, for example, so you might
have to scan for days or weeks to see them all this way. Yet other messages will only appear based on a
specific query, and will thus never appear unless you cause them to report on the bus.
-- SCAN can only find messages; it cannot identify the channels within the messages
Of course, since each message might contain any number of channels, starting at various bits and running any bit
length, and with any scaling factors, it is still impossible to know just from the messages, what the bits represent,
but it gives you a starting point. As mentioned, the easiest way is by importing a DBC file, which contains everything already.
But if you need to configure channels manually, the procedure is quite simple.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 12, Interface cards | 12-23
Configuring message and channels manually
You can add messages manually by clicking the Message + button (or using SCAN as mentioned above). To configure the channels contained within a message, click the SETUP button for a message, and the CAN CHANNEL
SETUP box will open:
In the top half of this dialog you set up the message itself, where in the bottom half you can configure the channels
contained within this message.
Message setup
Looking at the top half, message configuration, here are the key things to know about:
Name
The name of the message
Arb ID#
ID number of your message on the CAN bus
Type
Select between CAN standard and CAN extended from drop down list. Those two differs in identifier length. The standard length is 11 bits, and extended is 29 bits.
DLC
DLC is the length of the message. It ranges from 1 to 8. As a standard, the DLC is set to 8.
Delay
We can also enter the message delay in millisecond which shifts the time stamp of the message
back in time. This can be used to perfectly synchronize the analog data with CAN data with compensating the delays in digital data transmission.
12-24 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
Channel setup
Now we need to add the channel(s) contained within this message. Click the ADD button and DEWESoft will
create a default channel and color code the first 16 bits of the CAN message. Please enter the name and units of
this channel, and the scale factor (multiplier and offset). Also, make sure that the start bit and length (in bits) are
correct. Then click OK. You can see that in the screen shot below, four channels have been set up within this one
message. Two of the channels are just one bit long, whereas the other ones are
Or, if this message contains multiple channels, repeat the procedure starting with the ADD button mentioned
above, and create more channels. Within a message, there can be numerous channels, and each one can be absolutely unique in terms of its bit length, scaling, name, units... CAN is really quite flexible.
Arbitration IDs and CAN message rates
CAN messages are identified via hex IDs known as “Arbitration IDs.” This is what DEWESoft shows on the message list, in the ARB column:
Below the Arbitration ID, the rate at which this message is coming across the bus is also shown in Hz. You will
notice that each message can come across at a different rate.
J1939 support
J1939 is used to enable special decoding of arbitration ID which includes the sender, receiver and the message
ID itself. Arb ID is always extended in this case. This is most widely used on trucks, busses and certain military
vehicles. Please make sure that the bus type is really J1939 before enabling this option.
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 12, Interface cards | 12-25
OBD II support
DEWESoft additionally supports the protocol for reading in data from the OBD II port, required on all US cars.
In this case, the messages are standardized, and a DBC file is not needed. This feature requires that an optional
plugin be purchased and installed into DEWESoft.
Select messages / channels for storage
Notice the buttons near the top of the CAN setup window labeled VIEW:
It is important to go to the CHANNELS view, and then press USED for the channels that you want to really
record and display next time you store data.
⇒⇒ If you press USED only on the MESSAGES view, the actual message ID itself will be stored, but not the
channel(s) that it contains!!! Always go to CHANNELS view and press in USED for all channels that you
want to display and store.
After clicking CHANNELS, you will see a list of all of the channels contained within the various CAN messages
that you have set up:
Make sure to press USED in on the channels that you want to store and display. We cannot emphasize that
enough.
OK, your CAN interface is set up.
When you save this Dewesoft SETUP, all of the CAN parameters are saved into the setup file, of course. But some-
12-26 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
times it is useful to be able to save this CAN setup as a DBC file. This is possible, as described in the next section.
Saving DBC files
Saving your CAN setup to a stand-alone DBC file requires a software option called DEWESoft-OPT-CAN-OUT.
This option is needed because the DBC file format is proprietary to Vector, a company not affiliated with Dewetron. With this software option, we include a license from Vector, which we purchase from them and transfer to
you, so that you gain the ability to export your CAN setup to a standard Vector DBC file. This DEWEsoft-CANOUT option also includes the ability to transmit CAN messages onto the bus. Please see the separate documentation about these capabilities for further details.
Displaying CAN channels
Whichever CAN channels are pressed in as USED on the CAN setup screen, will be displayed on the measure
screens, as shown below. We made a simple screen which populates the CAN channels into digital meters. Below
that, each of the four wheel speed channels are shown in a recorder graph.
Notice that the CAN channels are shown on the right side of the screen in the CHANNEL LIST. A nice feature is
that the channels contained within each message are collapsed into a group whose name is the same as the message name:
OWNER’s GUIDE - Section 12, Interface cards | 12-27
So you can see that the message called SteeingWheel has four channels within it.
The CAN messages and channels will disappear from this list if you click on a display type which is incompatible.
For example, CAN is too slow to show in a SCOPE or FFT graph. So if you click on a SCOPE or FFT graph, the
CAN channels will disappear from the channel list. This is the same with other very slow data, like from PAD,
EPAD2 or CPAD2 modules, for example.
Storing CAN data
Any CAN channels pressed in as USED on the CAN setup screen will be stored into the data file when you store
data. It does not matter if the channels are shown on a display screen or not.
Processing CAN data in MATH
CAN channels can be used within your MATH channels just like any other channel.
12-28 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 series
OWNER’s GUIDE - Appendix | A-i
Appendix
Index
Symbols
2D array 3-5
2-point scaling method 7-9
3D array 3-5
22-bit A/D converter 3-3, 7-19,
9-10, 10-51, 10-52, 10-61,
10-69, 10-73, 10-75, 10-78,
10-100, 10-107, 10-111, 10114, 11-1, 11-4, 11-5, 11-6,
11-7
1553 3-2, 3-7, 12-1, 12-15, 12-18,
12-19
A
Accessory connector 4-12
Accuracy 6-13
AC power cord 5-1
Acquisition Mode 3-4, 3-6, 7-1
Acquisition Screens 7-21
Activate the Channels 7-4
AD16-1000-16 11-11
AD16-1000-16-OUT2 11-11
AD32-1000-16 11-11
AD32-1000-16-OUT4 11-11
AD64-100-16 11-11
AD64-1250-12 11-11
ADAP-BAN-BNC 9-4
ADAP-BNC-MICRODOT 9-2
ADAP-BR-1/4-120, using it 9-4,
9-9
ADAP-BR-1/4-350 9-4
ADAP-CAN-OPT-ISO 9-2
ADAP-DAQ-BNC 9-3
ADAP-MDAQ-BNC 9-3
ADAP-MIC-BNC-CBL 9-4
ADC 6-1
address, Dewetron Inc. ii, 4-11, 10-6,
10-8, 10-65, 10-67
addressing module 10-8
Add your company logo to printouts
7-32
Adlink 12-12
AD series 3-1, 3-2, 10-58, 10-114,
11-1, 11-11
amplifier column 10-7, 10-8, 10-66,
10-67
ANALOG INPUT connector 4-11
Analog input connectors 4-9
Analog output 10-4
Analog Output module 10-74
ANALOG setup screen 7-2, 7-19
Analysis Mode 3-6, 7-1, 7-27, 7-33
anti-aliasing 10-114, 11-4, 11-5,
11-6, 11-7
antivirus/security software 2-3
Arbitration ID 12-24
ARINC 429 3-7
ARINC-429 12-15
ARINC 429 receive setup 12-16
ARINC 429 transmit setup 12-17
Audio 3-3, 4-2, 4-7, 9-4
Automatic File Numbering 7-16
Automatic file SWITCHING function 7-18
Automatic Recording STOP function 7-16
B
Background image 3-5
Ballard 12-15
BAT-CHARGER-1 5-2
BATT-95WH 5-2, 8-2
Battery appears damaged 5-1
battery door 5-1
Battery handling 5-1
BATTERY STATUS LCD 5-1
BIOS 2-3, 5-3
break-out box 10-71
BUS interfaces 3-7, 4-10, 7-20
C
calibration 1-2
Calibration 1-2
CANALYZER 12-22
CAN bus interfaces 3-2
CAN channels, displaying 12-26
CAN data, performing MATH
12-27
CAN data, storing 12-27
CAN message rates 12-24
CAN output 3-2, 3-7
Carrying bag 3-3
CAT5e 4-5
CAT6 4-5, 10-114
CD 5-4
A-ii | Appendix
certificate of compliance 1-2
channel name, units, color 7-7, 7-11
Channel Setup 7-5
channel setup dialog 7-4
coefficients 3-4
CONN-DSUB-9 9-3
Connectors 4-1, 4-3, 4-5, 4-7, 4-9,
4-10
Copying Channel Settings 7-13
Copy/Paste menu 7-13
Core2Duo® 3-3, 3-4
Counter 3-2, 3-4, 4-9, 6-2, 6-3, 6-5,
6-6, 6-7, 6-8, 6-13
Counter/Encoder 3-2
Counter Filters 6-15
CPAD2 3-1, 10-1, 10-101
CPAD2 modules, adding new modules 10-102
CPAD2-RTD8 10-102, 10-104
CPAD2-TH8 10-102, 10-104
CPAD2-TH8-x 10-102, 10-104
CPAD2-V8 10-102, 10-104
CPU 3-3, 3-4
Current sensors, using 9-8
Cursor 3-6
cursors 3-6, 7-27, 7-29, 7-30
D
DAQ Module Connectors 10-1
DAQ modules, adding new modules
10-6
DAQ modules, Addressing 10-6
DAQN-V-OUT 10-4
DAQP-ACC-A 10-3
DAQP-BRIDGE-A 10-3, 10-30
DAQP-BRIDGE-B 10-38, 10-42,
10-44, 10-46, 10-48, 10-50,
10-56, 10-58, 10-68, 10-70,
10-71, 10-72, 10-74, 10-80,
10-86, 10-90, 10-94, 10-96,
10-98, 10-99, 10-104, 10106, 10-108, 10-110, 10-112
DAQP-CFB 10-3
DAQP-CHARGE-A 10-3
DAQP-CHARGE-B 10-3
DAQP-DMM 10-2, 10-12
DAQP-FREQ-A 10-4
DAQP-HV 10-2, 10-10
DAQP-HV-S3 10-2, 10-10
DAQP-LA-B 10-2, 10-20
DAQP-LA-SC 10-2, 10-20
DAQP-LV 7-6, 10-2, 10-14
DAQP-MULTI 10-4
DAQP-STG 10-3, 10-22
DAQP-THERM 10-4
DAQP-V 10-2, 10-18
DAQ-SHUNT-1 9-3, 10-14, 10-17
DAQ-SHUNT-1 adapter, using it
9-5
DAQ-SHUNT-1-BNC 9-3
DAQ-SHUNT-3 9-3, 10-14, 10-17
DAQ-SHUNT-4 9-3, 10-14, 10-17
DAQ-SHUNT-5 9-3, 10-14, 10-17
Data export 3-6
Data file format 3-5
Data replay 3-6
DBC file 12-22, 12-26
DBC files, saving 12-26
DC power cord 5-2
DC power input 4-1, 5-2
Default Display Range 7-11
Delay 12-23
Design mode 7-34
DEWE-30-8 expansion rack 10-5
DEWE-30-16 rack 10-5
DEWE-3210 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 4-9,
4-11, 6-1, 9-10, 10-62, 10100
DEWE-3211 1-2, 2-4, 3-1, 3-2, 4-9,
6-1, 9-10, 10-62, 10-100
DEWE-DCDC-24-300-ISO 8-3
DEWESoft 7 3-4
DEWESoft-OPT-ARINC/1553
12-15
Dewetron ii, 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 2-3, 3-3,
3-7, 4-4, 4-7, 5-2, 6-1, 7-1,
7-8, 7-20, 7-25, 7-64, 8-1,
8-2, 9-4, 9-10, 10-1, 10-6,
10-8, 10-15, 10-17, 10-43,
10-45, 10-47, 10-51, 10-62,
10-64, 10-65, 10-67, 10-77,
10-78, 10-100, 10-101, 10-
102, 10-105, 10-107, 10-109,
10-111, 10-113, 11-1, A-x
DEWE-VGPS-200C 3-7
digital filter 6-15
Digital inputs 3-7
Digital I/O connector 4-12
DirectShow 3-7, 12-12, 12-13
DIRECTX 12-13
Display Range 7-11
Display Range, Setting the Default
7-11
Display Scale 7-10
DLC 12-23
Documentation about your system
A-vii
DPS-2410 3-3, 4-1, 5-1, 5-2, 5-3,
8-1
DSUB 37-pin connector, 4-12
DVD 3-3, 5-4
DVD / CD drive 5-4
Dynamic acquisition rate 7-19
E
Encoder 3-2, 6-1, 6-2, 6-9, 6-10,
6-11, 6-12
encoders 3-7, 6-9, 7-20
End-of-Life Handling 2-3
EPAD2 3-1, 3-2, 10-1, 10-101
EPAD2 modules, installing new ones
10-103
EPAD2-RTD8 10-102, 10-104
EPAD2-TH8 10-102, 10-104
EPAD2-TH8-x 10-102, 10-104
EPAD2-V8 10-102, 10-104
Ethernet 4-2, 4-5
Event Counting 6-2, 6-3, 6-4
EVENTS 7-25
Export file formats 3-6
Export Your Data 7-33
F
FFT 3-5, 3-6, 7-21, 7-22
FFT graph, 3-5
file conversion 7-33
File export button 7-33
OWNER’s GUIDE - APPENDIX |A-iii
File Name 7-16
File Numbering, automatic 7-16
FILL ONE MODULE PROCEDURE 10-6, 10-65
FILL (or CLEAR) One Module
Procedure 10-7, 10-66
Fill Rack (all Modules) Procedure
10-6, 10-65
FILL RACK PROCEDURE 10-6,
10-65
firewire 4-2, 4-4
Flexpro 3-6, 7-33
Fluke 1-2
fly wheel (IRIG) 12-3
Fly Wheel Mode 12-3
Frequency Measurement 6-2, 6-13
Frequency to voltage 10-4
function scaling method 7-9
Fuse 4-1
G
Gated Event Counting 6-2, 6-4
GPS 3-5, 3-7
GPS antenna mounting 12-6
GPS-CLOCK 10-114, 12-5, 12-6,
12-7, 12-8, 12-9, 12-10,
12-11
GPS-CLOCK basic specifications
12-11
GPS input TNC connector 12-5
GPS track 3-5
GPS warm-Up time 12-7
graph 3-5, 3-6, 7-6, 7-9, 7-10, 7-11,
7-12, 7-13, 7-23, 7-24, 7-25,
7-28, 7-29, 7-30
Ground (earth) Connector 4-1
guide to operation 7-1
H
hard drive 5-3, 5-4, 7-2
Hazardous Substances 2-3
HDD 3-4, 5-3, 5-4
hot-swappable batteries 5-1
HSI 3-1
humidity 2-2, 3-3
I
IEEE-1394 3-3, 4-2, 4-4
IEPE 3-7, 10-2, 10-3, 10-14, 10-22,
10-42, 10-44, 10-46
Inductive 10-3
Inertial sensors 3-7
Input scaling 3-4
Installing the Smart Batteries 5-1
IRIG-CLOCK 10-114, 12-1, 12-2,
12-3, 12-4
IRIG-CLOCK basic specifications
12-4
IRIG-DECODER 12-1
IRIG IN connector 12-2
Isolation 3-2
J
J1939 3-2, 3-7, 12-24, 12-25
K
Keyboard 3-3
L
LabVIEW 11-11
LabVIEW compatibility 11-11
LCD 3-3, 5-1, 5-3, 8-2
LCD screen, battery indicator 5-1
LEMO 4-1, 4-9
LVDT 10-3
M
Math channel 3-6
Matlab ii, 3-5, 3-6
Max value 7-7, 7-11
MDAQ 3-1, 7-6
MDAQ-AAF4-5-BE-S1 10-99
MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU 10-99
MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU-S1 10-99
MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU-S2 10-99
MDAQ-BASE-5 3-1, 10-78
MDAQ-FILT-5-BE 10-98, 10-104,
10-106, 10-108, 10-110,
10-112
MDAQ-FILT-5-BU 10-98
MDAQ-FILT-5-BU-S1 10-98
MDAQ-SUB-ACC 10-94, 10-96,
10-98, 10-99, 10-104, 10106, 10-108, 10-110, 10-112
MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE 10-86
MDAQ-SUB-STG 10-80, 10-86
MDAQ-SUB-V200 10-90
Met/CAL® 1-2
MIL-STD-1553 3-2, 3-7, 12-1, 1215, 12-18, 12-19
MIL-STD-1553 receive setup 1218
MIL-STD-1553 transmit setup
12-19
Min value 7-7, 7-11
Module Installation Trouble-shooting 10-8, 10-67
modules are showing up in RED letters 10-8, 10-67
MSI-V-ACC 8-4, 10-2, 10-14, 1015, 10-22
MSI-V-CH-50 8-4, 10-2, 10-14,
10-15, 10-22
MSI-V-RTD 8-4, 10-2, 10-14, 1015, 10-22
Multifile 7-16, 7-17
multiplexed A/D 11-11
N
National Instruments 11-11, 11-12,
12-21
nCode ii
network stacks 2-3
Neutrino-4 5-2, 8-2, 8-3
NIST ii
NIST traceable 1-2
Notice event 7-25
NTSC/PAL video inputs 12-12
O
OBDII 3-2
OBD II support 12-25
On-board RS-485 interface 11-3
operating system 5-3, 5-4
A-iv| Appendix
Operation Guidelines 5-1
optical drive 5-4
Optical read/write drive 5-4
ORION 3-1, 3-2, 4-12, 6-16, 11-1
ORION-0424-200 11-1, 11-4,
11-11
ORION-0816-1000 11-1, 11-5
ORION-0816-1001 11-1, 11-5
ORION-0816-1002 11-1, 11-5
ORION-0816-1003 11-1, 11-5
ORION-0816-1004 11-1, 11-5
ORION-0816-1005 11-1, 11-5
ORION-0824-200 11-1, 11-5
ORION-0824-201 11-1, 11-5
ORION-0824-202 11-1, 11-5
ORION-0824-203 11-1, 11-5
ORION-0824-204 11-1, 11-5
ORION-0824-205 11-1, 11-5
ORION-1616-100 11-1, 11-5
ORION-1616-101 11-1, 11-5
ORION-1616-102 11-1, 11-5
ORION-1616-103 11-1, 11-5
ORION-1616-104 11-1, 11-5
ORION-1616-105 11-1, 11-5
ORION-1622-100 11-1, 11-5
ORION-1622-101 11-1, 11-5
ORION-1622-102 11-1, 11-5
ORION-1622-103 11-1, 11-5
ORION-1622-104 11-1, 11-5
ORION-1622-105 11-1, 11-5
ORION-3216-100 11-1, 11-5
ORION-3216-101 11-1, 11-5
ORION-3222-100 11-1, 11-5
ORION-3222-101 11-1, 11-5
ORION cards, Combining various
11-2
ORION cards installation 11-10
ORION cards, synchronizing them
11-2
ORION card Windows driver
11-10
ORION-DAQ-SYNC 11-2
ORION-DSA-SYNC 11-2
ORION series 11-1
ORION-SYNC 10-114
Outline Drawings 3-8
Overview 1-2, 3-5, 7-21
P
PAD-AO1 10-63, 10-74
PAD-CB8-B 10-68, 10-107, 10-111
PAD-CB8-BNC 10-68
PAD-CB8-RTD 10-63, 10-70,
10-71
PAD-DO7 10-63, 10-72
PAD module, old type without buttons 10-8, 10-67
PAD modules, adding new ones
10-64
PAD Modules Table 10-63
PAD Series Modules 10-61
PAD-TH8-P 10-63, 10-70
PAD-V8-P 10-63, 10-68
Paste special 7-14
Paste special… 7-14
Paste to all 7-14
PC-GPS-CBL15 cable 12-6
PC-GPS-CBL25 cable 12-6
PCM data 3-7
Period Time Measurement 6-2, 6-6
polynomial 3-4
Pot/Ohmic sensors 10-3
Power 3-3, 3-5, 8-1
power cord 2-1, 5-1, 5-2
PPS, IRIG 12-3
Print Out Your Data 7-31
Project 7-37, 7-38, 7-41, 7-42, 7-43,
7-44, 7-46, 7-59, 7-60
PROPERTIES BAR 7-22
PS/2 4-2, 4-3, 4-4
Pulse Width Measurement 6-2, 6-7
Q
Quadrature Encoder 6-2, 6-9, 6-10,
6-11
Quick start guide 1-2, 7-1
R
RAM 3-3, 3-4, 7-24
Recorder 3-5, 3-6, 7-21, 7-22, 7-23
recorder graph 3-6, 7-24, 7-25, 7-28,
7-29, 7-30
Recording modes 3-4
Recording setup 3-4
Recycling 2-3
Reference Check 7-9
Relay Output module 10-72
Reloading your Data Files 7-26
remote power-on 11-3
removable hard disk drive 5-3
Replay speed 3-6
Resistance 10-3, 10-4, 10-14, 10-22
RIBBON 7-22
RS-232/485 interface 10-62
RS232C 3-3, 4-2, 4-3
S
safety 2-1, 2-2
Safety precautions 1-2, 2-1
Sample rate 7-7
Sample Rate 7-19
Sample rate divider 7-7
Sample Rate, setting it 7-19
Save Your Setup 7-20
Scale/CAL 7-8
Scope 3-5, 3-6, 7-21, 7-22
Screen design 3-5
sensors 1-1, 1-2, 2-1, 3-4, 3-7, 4-7,
4-10
Setup files 3-5
Setup file, saving 7-20
Set Up Your Channels 7-4
Shock and vibration 3-3
Shunt resistors, using custom 9-7
SideHAND ii
Sigma-delta 11-5, 11-6, 11-7
signal conditioner hardware control
7-6
Signal Input Connectors 4-9
Simultaneous sampling 10-114
slope 7-8, 10-74, 10-98, 10-99
smart batteries 3-3, 5-2
Softing 12-21
Software licensing 3-6
Sound sensors 3-7
Specifications 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4
OWNER’s GUIDE - APPENDIX | A-v
Specifications, Analog Input 3-1,
3-8, 4-1
STOP, Automatically 7-16
Stop storing. 7-25
Stop storing after 7-16, 7-18
STORE and STOP buttons 7-35
STORING data 7-24
Strain gage 3-6
Support 1-1, 1-2
SYNC 4-11
Synching Multiple systems 11-2
synchronizing external devices 10114
synchronizing multiple systems
10-114
System restore DVD 3-3
System Startup 5-1
video channels, displaying 12-14
VIDEO-FG-4 3-7, 12-12, A-vii
Voice event 7-25
Voltage/current input configurations
6-1
T
Y
TEDS 3-4
Temperature 3-3, 10-4, 10-14, 1022, 10-50, 10-63, 10-70
Text event 7-25
Thermocouple 10-3, 10-4
time constant 10-3
TOOLBAR 7-22
touchpad 3-3
training 1-1, 2-2
turn on (or off ) all channels at once
7-4
Two Pulse Edge Separation 6-2, 6-8
y = mx + b 7-8
y/t 3-5
U
Unused (channels) 7-4
unzoom, how to 7-28
Up/Down Counter 6-2, 6-5
USB 3-3, 3-7, 4-2, 4-3, 4-6, 4-7
Used (channels) 7-4
V
Vector 12-21
VGA 3-3, 4-6
video 3-3, 3-7, 4-2, 4-4, 4-6, 4-7,
7-20
W
Weight 3-3
Windows 7 ii, 3-3, 5-4
Windows updates 2-3
Windows XP ii, 5-4
X
XLR 9-4
X-Y graph 3-5
X-YYY 3-5
Z
zoom 3-6, 7-20, 7-27, 7-28, 7-29,
7-33
Zooming in 7-27
zooming out 7-27
zoom in/out 3-6
A-vi| Appendix
Documentation about your system:
Model: (check)
◊ DEWE-3210
◊ DEWE-3211
Serial number:
Reference number:
Date shipped:
Order ref. number:
A/D card settings:
A/D card model name:
◊ ORION-
A/D card(s) details:
◊ AD-
◊
D/I:
CTR:
Other (list)
Conditioner settings:
Conditioner type(s): (check)
◊ DAQ modules
MDAQ modules
Specific modules (list all):
Slot 0:
MDAQ-BASE-5
Slot 1:
MDAQ-SUB-
Slot 2:
MDAQ-SUB-
Slot 3:
Slot 4:
Slot 5:
Slot 6:
Slot 7:
Expansion rack/modules (list):
DEWESoft settings:
CAN device:
Settings:
VIDEO device:
Settings:
GPS device:
Settings:
ALARM OUT settings:
ANALOG OUT settings:
DEWESoft edition:
◊ SE, ◊ PROF, ◊ DSA, ◊ EE
version 7.__ . ______
Amplifier interface: (check)
◊ ORION Onboard, ◊ ORION Onboard
COM:
Additional xPAD modules:
COM port:
Hardware key:
Software license:
DW7-
Software options (list):
Interfaces/settings:
Optional interfaces installed:
Comments/more information:
◊ PCI-ARINC card
◊ PCI-1553 card
◊ PCI-CAN/2
◊ VIDEO-FG-4
◊
◊
Dewetron, Inc. 10 High Street, Ste K, Wakefield, RI 02879 USA ¤ Tel: +1 401-284-3750 ¤ Fax: +1 401-284-3755 ¤ www.dewamerica.com
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement